69 Panepistimiu & Eolou St., 105 64 Athens Tel: 210-3727400 Fax: 210-3255460 E-mail: [email protected] Web: www.rae.gr
English translation (unofficial) of the
DRAFT
Distribution Network Operation Code
released for public consultation on 16.7.2008
The translation at hand was prepared in order to enable broader participation to the public consultation on the Distribution Network Operation Code draft. It represents an initial best effort, given existing temporal limitations, to convey the content of the official Greek document as accurately as possible. In case of differences between the Greek and English documents, the meaning of the former prevails.
Athens, July 2008 Section Ι: General Provisions
PART I
GENERAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER 1 ENTITIES, GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS
Article 1-1 Fundamental definitions and Scope 1. The present Network Operation Code (hereinafter “Network Code”) regulates the rights and obligations of the Competent Network Entities, of the Users of the Network and of the Suppliers, with respect to Network access and the usage thereof. 2. The terms defined in Law 2773/1999 and employed in the present Network Code assume the meaning and content attributed to them by said law. Specifically, for the application of the Network Code the implementing definitions included herein shall be in force and applicable. 3. The Competent Network Entities are: A) for the Interconnected Network, the Network Operator, in compliance with the provisions of articles 22 and 22a of Law 2773/1999 and PPC S.A. (Public Power Company S.A.) as the Network Owner, in compliance with the provisions of article 21 of Law 2773/1999. B) for the Non-Interconnected Islands Network, PPC S.A. as the Non- Interconnected Islands Operator in accordance with the provisions of article 23a of Law 2773/1999 and as Network Owner, in accordance with the provisions of article 21 of Law 2773/1999. 4. The Network Operator for the Interconnected Network and the Non- Interconnected Islands Operator for the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator reserve and assume, each one of that part of the Network for which they are responsible, the rights and obligations of the Network Operator specifically determined in the Network Code. 5. The Network Users (or “Users”) are: A) The holders of generation authorization or exemption from the obligation for generation authorization, as well as those users who are exempt from securing a generation authorization and whose electricity generating installations are connected to the Network (hereinafter: “Producers”). B) The “Customers” whose installations are connected to the Network in order to take up electricity. They are differentiated with respect to the Eligible Customers and the Non-Eligible Customers whose installations are connected to the Network.
1 Section Ι: General Provisions
6. The Network Users include, on a case by case basis and in compliance with the specific provisions of the Network Code, candidate Users, who wish their installations be connected to the Network. 7. The Suppliers are the holders of supply authorizations or exemption from the obligation to secure supply authorization, who supply electricity to the Customers. For matters regulated by the Network Code, the Suppliers may represent those Customers they supply exclusively, in compliance with Article 19-2, following a written letter of authorization by the later. 8. The Connection Point for Network/User is defined as the point of connection between the User’s installations and the installations owned by the Network Owner and which is further specified in Article 14-1. This Connection Point constitutes the separation point for the competence and responsibility between, on the one hand, the Competent Network Entities and, on the other hand, the, at each time and occasion, User. 9. For each User installation, the Common Connection Point for User Installations is defined as the point of the Network nearest to the Connection Point for Network/User; which is located upstream from the Connection Point for Network/User and through which electricity flows towards other Users’ installations as well. 10. The part of the Network electrically connected to the System shall, hereinafter, be referred to as “Interconnected Network”. 11. Those parts of the Network that operate at LV shall be referred to, hereinafter, as “LV Network”. The MV Network and the HV Network are defined correspondingly. The Users (or more specifically the Customers and Producers) whose installations are connected to the LV Network, shall, henceforth, be referred to as the LV Users (or LV Customers and LV Producers). The MV Users (MV Customers and MV Producers) are defined equivalently. There are no Customer connections to the HV Network.
Article 1-2 Code Supervision and Consulting Committee 1. By RAE decree, following the recommendation of the Interconnected Network Operator, a standing Code Supervision and Consulting Committee is set up consisting of representatives from the Competent Network Entities, the Users of the Network, the suppliers and any other requisitely involved entities or persons, as per case applicable, and all that is relevant to its operation are determined. 2. The Code Supervision and Consulting Committee will submit proposals to RAE for issues related to the supervision of the implementation of the Network Code, following queries by RAE, the Competent Network Entities, the Network Users or the Suppliers for possible necessary amendments of the Network Code or for taking measures related to its implementation.
Article 1-3 Code Implementation Manuals and Network Operator Instructions 1. The details for the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code are determined in the Implementation Manuals of the Network Code, which are
2 Section Ι: General Provisions
drawn up by the Network Operator and approved by RAE. For the issuance of the relevant decree, RAE shall take under consideration the outlook of the Network Owner and will place a draft of its decree for public deliberation. 2. The Implementation Manuals include in detail all the necessary adjustments and calculation methodologies required for the implementation of the Network Code. 3. In order to ensure the prompt and effective implementation of the provisions of the Network Code and in the resolutions and regulations issued under the authority granted by Law 2773/1999, the Network Operator issues all the requisite Implementation Instructions for the Network Code, which are notified to RAE, in order for the later to ascertain that the Instruction text ensures the observance of what has been prescribed above. 4. The Network Operator is obliged to exercise due diligence for the receipt and forwarding of every request or report by the Users and the Suppliers for the drawing up of the Implementation Instructions and Implementation Manuals for the Network Code or the provision of clarifications for the implementation of regulations contained therein, as well as for proposals for their amendment and modification.
Article 1-4 Decree regulating the distribution of electricity 1. The arrangements contained in Annexes I up to III of the Network Code and regarding: (a) the Quality of Service provided to the Users, (b) the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, and (c) the annual consideration for the Network, shall be updated by a decree issued in compliance with the procedure provided for the amendment and modification of the Network Code and the specific provisions of paragraph two (2) of the present Article. The amendment decree for Annexes I up to III shall be hereinafter be referred to as “Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree” while its term of effect, which shall be established in the same Decree and which may be between three and five consecutive full calendar years, shall be hereinafter be referred to as “Regulatory Distribution Period”. Each Regulatory Distribution Period commences on the day immediately following the expiration of the previous Regulatory Distribution Period. By the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree the basic parameters of the strategy for the implementation of the Network Code for the following Regulatory Distribution Period are regulated, in the context of the provisions of Parts I up to XI of the Code. 2. The Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree is issued at least six months prior to the expiration of the current Regulatory Distribution Period. To this end: A) The Operator of the Interconnected Network and the Operator of the Non-Interconnected Islands shall submit their proposals at least twelve (12) months in advance of the expiration of the current Regulatory Distribution Period, taking under consideration the views of the Network Owner. B) Following the submission of the aforementioned proposals, RAE proceeds with public deliberation, lasting at least three months.
3 Section Ι: General Provisions
C) RAE shall pronounce on the issuance of the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree at least seven months prior to the expiration of the current Regulatory Distribution Period.
Article 1-5 Appeals and arbitration by RAE 1. Every User or Supplier of the Network, who deems that access to the Network is not provided in the most economical, transparent and prompt manner, or that there is discrimination amongst the Users or amongst User or Supplier categories, as well as any third party with a legitimate interest may appeal to the competent Network Operator, who is obliged to respond on the appeal within thirty (30) days from the date the appeal was lodged. 2. In case the aforementioned appeal is rejected, the competent Network Operator as well as the applicant User, Supplier or third party with a legitimate interest, may relegate the dispute to arbitration by RAE. Such arbitration is carried out in compliance with the provisions of RAE’s Internal Operations and Administration Regulation.
Article 1-6 Ensuring the effective operation, maintenance and development of the Network 1. The Network Owner is obliged to ensure the effective operation, maintenance and development of the Network, in accordance with the provisions of the Network Core and specifically to: follow the general and the as per case applicable instructions issued by the Network Operator; collect and provide the Network Operator with data requested by the later in a manner ensuring its validity and its more effective usage; ensure the direct collaboration between all of the Owner’s organizational units with the Network Operator and the provision of data to the later; ensure for the implementation of the Regulatory Plan for Network Development and to generally cooperate with the Network Operator in good faith and exhibiting a spirit of harmonious collaboration. 2. The Network Operator is obliged to coordinate the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code by all organizational units of the Network Owner, and specifically: to issue the requisite general, or per case applicable, instructions; to coordinate the collection of all necessary elements; to collaborate directly and on a frequent basis with the at places organizational units of the Network Owner where necessary; to investigate all complaints lodged and proposals for the improvement of procedures, relating to the activity of the distribution of electricity via the Network; to monitor the implementation of the Regulatory Plan for Network Development and to generally cooperate with the Network Owner in good faith and exhibiting a spirit of harmonious collaboration.
4 Section Ι: General Provisions
Article 1-7 Supervision of the Network Code Implementation 1. RAE shall supervise the exercise of rights and performance of obligations by the Competent Network Entities, the Users and the Suppliers, in compliance with the Network Code. In this context RAE is specifically entitled to: A) have access to the facilities of the Competent Network Entities and to the technical and financial records kept by them, particularly those regarding the operation, maintenance and development of the Network, as well as to any other relevant information. B) To conduct, ipso facto or following a report by a third party, inspections, investigations and hearings relative to the observance of the provisions of the Network Code in the context of the procedure for the imposition of administrative penalties, as provided for in the pertinent legislation. C) To monitor the performance of the Competent Network Entities, in accordance with the provisions of their respective Authentications and to publish the relevant performance indexes. 2. The Competent Network Entities, the Network Users and the Suppliers can propose to RAE the amendment of provisions in the Network Code, the issuance of Instructions by the Network Operator and / or Implementation Manuals for the Network Core, or the amendment and modification of these, whenever they deem it purposeful. RAE shall assess these proposals and shall pronounce on them or issue relevant decrees, where appropriate, taking under consideration the views of all of the Competent Network Entities, the Network Users and Suppliers and of the Code Supervision and Consultation Committee, in accordance with Article 1-2. RAE shall take care that all interested parties can express their views on the matter specifically by arranging, in a systematic manner, public deliberations with respect to all of its decrees and decisions on matters regarding the distribution of electricity, save for cases of an urgent nature or personal administrative actions.
CHAPTER 2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES
Article 2-1 Non discrimination of Users The Competent Network Entities are obliged while performing their duties to refrain from any discrimination among Users or User categories, the sole exception being those cases explicitly specified in the Network Code and justified based exclusively on the objective technical features of the facilities of the Users or the Network.
Article 2-2 Transparency – Confidentiality 1. The Network Operator and RAE must adhere to the principle of transparency and to publicize general statistical information that they collect retarding the
5 Section Ι: General Provisions
operation and development of the Network and the facilities and installations of the Users, as well as regarding the activities of the Suppliers. 2. The Network Operator shall provide to the public and in particular to the Users and Suppliers, information, upon request, in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code. 3. The obligation to inform set forth in paragraphs one (1) and (2) is in force so long as it does not affect confidentiality issues, in compliance with the applicable legislation. 4. The aforementioned obligation of secrecy does not apply when disclosing information to RAE or any other Greek independent administrative authority, in the context of their respective exercise of competence. 5. General information of statistical nature regarding the operation of the Network, the Users and the Suppliers is not considered to be confidential in nature. 6. By decision of the Network Operator, approved by RAE, the procedure for informing third parties and the publication of information regarding the supervision of the Network shall be standardized, thus ensuring in a uniform and systematic manner the adherence to the principles of transparency and confidentiality and the right of access to information. 7. The obligations of secrecy provided for in this article are applicable also for the Network Owner.
Article 2-3 Extraordinary and unforeseen circumstances 1. In case of disputes between Competent Network Entities, Users and Suppliers, relating to the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code, the Network Operator is obliged to immediately request RAE’s views on the matter and to make every effort to reach agreement within a reasonable time frame. 2. Should such an agreement not be attained, the Network Operator shall resolve the matter, taking under consideration the views of RAE, of the Users or Suppliers involved and act in such manner as to: • safeguard environmental protection, the principle of Law and Regulations, public health, the integrity of the Network’s and User’s equipment and transaction security. • preserve the performance and integrity of the Network, • serve the general principles of the Network Code and of the Authorizations held by Competent Network Entities. • comply with the provisions of the Grid Operation and Power Exchange Code for Electricity. 3. The Users and Suppliers must abide by the requirements and instructions of the Network Operator for cases falling under the scope of paragraph (1).
6 Section Ι: General Provisions
Article 2-4 Technical Rules and Limitations The Network Owner and Network Operator must keep during the design, installation, maintenance and operation of the Network the technical rules and limitations which are determined in the Network Code, the decree of the Minister of Industry numbered 70261/2874 (Gov. Gazette B’ 608/6-10-1967) as applicable, the EN 50160 Standard, as this has been incorporated as a National Regulation or, in any other way, the general statutory context.
7
Part ΙΙ: Network Operations Specifications
PART II NETWORK OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 3 NETWORK OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Article 3-1 Network Nominal Voltage 1. The Network voltage is alternating and sinusoidal. The effective-rms value of the fundamental frequency waveform of the reference voltage shall be henceforth referred to as “Network Nominal Voltage” and shall designate Network equipment. Each part of the Network shall be designed as to operate under a specific Nominal Voltage and can be connected to parts of the Network designed to operate under a different Nominal Voltage, through transformers. 2. The Nominal Voltage at the various voltage levels of the Network can assume the following values: A) For the Low Voltage level Network (that is with an effective-rmsvalue less than 1kV – LV) (four conductor network): • 230 V between phase and neuter conductors (phase voltage) and • 400 V among phases (phase-to-phase voltage) B) For the Medium Voltage level Network (that is with an effective-rms value between 1kV and 35kV – MV) (three conductor network): • 15 kV or • 20 kV. • In certain areas in Attica and the islands there still exist Network parts with an operating Nominal Voltage between 6.6 kV and 22 kV, however the connection of the installations and facilities of new Users is avoided at these cases. C) For the High Voltage level Network (that is with an effective-rmsvalue greater than 35 kV – HV) (three conductor network): • 66 kV or • 150 kV.
Article 3-2 Network Frequency 1. Network Frequency refers to the repetition rate of the fundamental voltage wave per second, and is uniform and equal to the operating frequency of the System for the entire Interconnected Network. and single for each isolated electric network of a Non-Interconnected Island.
9 Part ΙΙ: Network Operations Specifications
2. The Operator of an Interconnected Network and the Network Operator at Non- Interconnected Islands are not responsible for monitoring Network Frequency in the context of their competence and responsibility with respect to the Network. 3. The Rated Value for Network Frequency is equal to 50 Hz (cycles per second), and its permissible fluctuation limits are determined in the System Operation Code for the Interconnected Network and in the Non-Interconnected Islands Operation Code for the Non-Interconnected Islands Network1.
Article 3-3 Network Short-Circuit Power 1. The Network Operator shall take due care for the design and operation of the Network so that the maximum anticipated short-circuit current value at the various levels of the Network (initial symmetrical value, as defined and calculated under the IEC 60909 standard) no to exceed the following values: A) At the LV Network: i) for an underground network, usually 25.0 kA and exceptionally 32 kA ii) for an overground network, usually 8.0 kA and exceptionally 13 kA B) At the MV Network: i) For the 20 kV network, 7.2 kA ii) For the 15 kV network, 9.6 kA iii) For the older 6.6 kV and 22 kV networks, 14.0 kA and 13.0 kA respectively. C) At the HV Network, for the 150 kV network, 31.0 kA. 2. At remote electric points of the Network, the short-circuit current may be considerably lower than the aforementioned values. Specifically in the Network of the Non-Interconnected Islands which is supplied by relatively smaller power generating stations, the short-circuiting current is usually much lower. Having said this, the differentiation of the specifications of the equipment is not generally recommended, in order to avoid modifications in case of change of the supply point for the system of these islands. 3. In any case, the Network Operator and the Network Owner shall inform the Users on the short-circuit level at a given point of the Network, in compliance with the provisions particularly of Article 15-5.
Article 3-4 Network Protection 1. The Network Operator cares for the design of the protection of the Network against overcurrent and overvoltage, the installation and maintenance of the requisite equipment, so as to ensure satisfactory gradation of the protection and the sufficient isolation and confinement of faults.
1 cf. Article E.I-4 note 1
10 Part ΙΙ: Network Operations Specifications
2. Protection against short-circuits is achieved by using appropriate protection devices for lines, HV/MV and MV/LV Substations (S/Ss) and is generally realized as follows: A) A three-phase power breaker is installed at the beginning ofMV lines leaving HV/MV S/Ss or the generation stations for Non-Interconnected Islands. This power breaker is controlled by overcurrent relays. In the case of overhead MV lines the breaker shall usually perform a cycle of interruptions – automated reclosing (rearming) for each identified overcurrent, finally remaining in the open position for permanent faults and in closed position for temporary ones. B) On overhead MV lines simple or remote-controlled breakers shall be installed, breakers which are similar in operation to those installed at the beginning of overhead lines, together with MV fuses, the operation of which causes three- pole or single-pole isolation. Other protection and control devices may also be installed. C) The MV/LV S/Ss are usually protected by fuses at the MV side, and the LV lines are protected by fuses per LV line. D) At the Connection Point for Network/User a suitable device for the protection against overcurrents shall be installed, generally before the meter, so that it will cause the isolation of the facilities of the User in the case of a fault inside them. 3. Protection against atmospheric overvoltage shall be, generally, carried out by the installation of suitable overvoltage arresters (e.g. lighting rods) at the MV/LV S/Ss as well as at other locations.
Article 3-5 Network Earthing The Network Operator shall attend to the efficient earthing of the Network, which is implemented as follows: A) The LV Network is a four conductor one (3 phase conductors and one neutral) and has a multiply earthed neutral conductor, that is the neutral conductor is earthed at least at the MV/LV S/Ss, at the Network/User Connection Point, at the meter installation point, as well as along LV lines. Those parts of Attica where there exist LV networks still employing the TT method (“Direct Earthing”) form an exception to the above. B) For the MV Network the neutral node of the transformers at the HV/MV S/Ss is earthed using a resistance, so as to limit fault current to the earth to a maximum of 1000A. The old 6,6 kV and 22 kV networks are an exception to this: in these networks the neutral node is directly earthed, that is without an in-between resistance. Another exception may be the MV Network of certain very small Non-Interconnected Islands, where the neutral MV node remains unearthed. C) For the HV Network the neutral node is always directly earthed.
Article 3-6 Voltage regulation and control The Network Operator shall see to the efficient regulation and control of the Network voltage by the installation of appropriate devices, such as automatic on-load tap changers for the HV to MV Transformers [HV/MV T/Fs], manual off-loadtap changers
11 Part ΙΙ: Network Operations Specifications for the MV to LV Transformers [MV/LV T/Fs], the automated devices of the generation units at Non-Interconnected Islands, the automatic voltage regulators on the Network lines and the reactive power compensation devices.
Article 3-7 Signal Transmission 1. The Network may be used for the transmission of signals, which are superimposed on the Network operating voltage or are transmitted via a fiber- optics network which is being constructed on the Network, in order to facilitate the transmission of data or commands to the Network equipment or the equipment of Users. 2. Signal transmission through the Network is controlled by the Network Operator. Usage of the Network for the transmission of signals between User facilities is not permitted. The power lines within the limits of User facilities may be employed to transmit signals with a frequency ranging from 95 kHz up to 148,5 kHz. 3. For the facilities of Customers they represent, Suppliers may use the Network to transmit signals to these facilities, as can the Network Owner for the facilities of the Network and all the Users, following an application to the Network Operator. The Network Operator shall accept such applications should there not be insurmountable technical obstacles and establish the relevant technical particulars. Where a Supplier’s application has been granted as above, the installation of the necessary signal transmission equipment on the Network is care of the Network Operator and the Supplier assumes the cost of the installation and the operating cost of this equipment. The cost in question is calculated by the Network Operator and approved by the Minister of Development, following RAE’s opinion on the matter. In establishing the technical specifications and in calculating the cost of the signal transmission systems the need for the optimization of all such systems to serve more purposes and users must be taken under consideration. 4. Suppliers using the Network for the transmission of signals as above shall provide the Network Operator with information on the estimated overall power of the load of the Customers they represent, which is controlled by signal transmission systems in cases it exceeds 5MW, as well as on the power load change rule of their Customer’s installations, based on the transmitted signals. More specifically they must inform the Network Operator with regard to the estimated fluctuation in the overall power of their Customer’s load, which is controlled by signal transmission systems per season, time of the day or geographical region, as more specifically established by the Network Operator.
12 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
PART III QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR NETWORK USERS
CHAPTER 4 QUALITY OF SERVICE – GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 4-1 Quality of Service – Fundamental Definitions 1. User Supply Continuity is determined by the absence of outages either of the electrical supply to the installations of Consumers connected to the Network or of the injection of electricity into the Network from Supplier’s installations connected to it, due to events that are not related to the operation of these User’s installations. 2. User Voltage Quality is determined by the absence of divergancies in the voltage from its rated value and the fully sinusoidal waveform of the Nominal Frequency. Such divergencies are categorized in Article 5-2. 3. User Power Quality is defined to include Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity. 4. Service Quality refers to the level of service towards the Users in their transactions with the Network Operator or the Network Owner. Such transactions include the transactions prior to the conclusion of contracts for the connection of the User’s installations to the Networks and its use, as well as the transactions during the term that such a contract is in force. Service Quality does not include issues relating to Power Quality. For more information cf. Article 7- 1. 5. User Quality of Service refers to the Service Quality and Power Quality.
Article 4-2 Quality of Service – General obligations of the competent Network entities 1. The Network Operator must take care so that all necessary measures with respect to the design, improvement, development, maintenance, operation planning, operation monitoring and daily operation of the Network are taken, so as to fulfill the operation specifications for the Network and to observe the limits for Power Quality set forth in the provisions of the Network Code. 2. The Network Operator must take all necessary measures and make all requisite resources available in order to maintain the Quality of Service towards the Users within the boundries established in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code. 3. The Network Operator must take care so that the voltage at the connection points of the Network to the System or to the substations of generation units allocated by the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator is monitored. In cases where there are considerable voltage divergencies from the anticipated voltage
13 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
characteristics, should these regard the Interconnected Network, the System Operator must be immediately informed, while if they regard the Non- Interconnected Island Network the provisions of the Non-Interconnected Island Network Code must be implemented. 4. The Owner of the Network must take all required measures to ensure User Quality of Service in accordance with the provisions of the Network Code, and specifically to follow the relevant instructions and to execute all commands issued by the Network Operator.
Article 4-3 Network Code Implementation Manuals for the regulation of quality of service 1. The Power Quality Manual and Service Quality Manual are published for the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code in terms of User Quality of Service, in compliance with what was set forth in Article 1-3. 2. The Power Quality Manual and Service Quality Manual establish among others, details on the specifications of the systems for monitoring User Quality of Service, additional indicators of Service Quality and detailed rules for their calculation, the elaborate procedure for ascertaining the completeness and accuracy of the information provided by the Network Operator on User Quality of Service, as well as the consequences in cases where the information provided is not complete or accurate and other issues specifically treated in this present Section of the Network Code.
Article 4-4 Quality of Service – General provisions regarding the limits of the quality provided 1. User Quality of Service must meet the minimum set requirements, which follow: A) Individual Guarantee Limits: these concern the quality provided individually to each User and should they be exceeded they may result in the Network Operator paying a consideration to the User, and B) Total Performance Limits: these concern the overall quality provided to the Users or to a given User group and their violation may entail the economic encumberment of the Network Operator, without this implying the payment of a consideration by the Network Operator to a given User. 2. Furthermore, for some Service Quality characteristics Anticipated Quality Limits may be set forth. Should these limits be exceeded then the average Service Quality provided to the corresponding User group exceeds the anticipated. When Total Performance Limits and Anticipated Quality Limits are defined for a given dimention of Service Quality the Anticipated Quality Zone is defined as the range between these limits. 3. Voltage Quality, Supply Continuity and Service Quality Limits are set for a given quality dimension under the following conditions: (a) that there is sufficient statistical data for the evaluation of the present condition in the dimension of Service Quality under consideration, (b) that the observance of such limits may be monitored or at least demonstratedly estimated and (c) that
14 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
the corresponding consequences in cases of violation of these limits are established. In all other cases indicative limits for Voltage Quality, Supply Continuity and Service Quality may be set forth.
Article 4-5 Force majeure 1. Force Majeure conditions shall mean the conditions following the occurance of extraordinary events of great magnitude, the tackling of which cannot be anticipated and planned for in a technically and financially rational manner by the Network Operator or the Network Owner. More specifically, as force majeure conditions are defined the extraordinarily adverse weather conditions, the unforeseen interventions by public authorities (e.g. police or the fire department), strikes, damages caused by third parties which cannot be avoided (such as plane crashes, terrorist acts, uprisings etc). Not included in Force Majeure are events occurring in the Network’s equipment or its surroundings, as well as in the installations of the Competent Network Entities, which are due to their normal or rationally anticipated operation and/or in expected or reasonably anticipated weather conditions, such as, for example, fires in substations, damages caused by third parties to inadequately guarded installations, etc. 2. For the Interconnected Network, Force Majeure is acknowledged, to the degree it affects the operation of the Network, in the following specific cases: Α) For Voltage Quality the cases where: i) on the one hand there are substantial voltage divergancies at the connection points of the Network to the System from the anticipated voltage characteristics exhibited in the course of the normal operation of the System to an extend that the Competent Network Entities cannot ensure the observance of Voltage Quality Limits set forth in Chapter 5, and ii) on the other hand the Network Operator has informed the System Operator accordingly, in compliance with Article 4-2, paragraph three (3). Β) For Supply Interruptions the cases where: i) the supply to parts of the Network from the System is interrupted for reasons which may be reduced to System operation or supply sufficiency, or ii) Load Shedding are implemented, in compliance with the provisions of the System Operation and Power Exchange Code (SO&PE Code), exclusively following an alarm activation by the Network Operator, as set forth in Chapter 23 of the SO&PE Code. 3. For Non-Interconnected Islands, Force Majeure is acknowledged, to the degree it affects User Quality of Service, in cases exhibiting objective and long-term problems in the development of electricity generation on a local level or in the supply of the local Network in any other way. In such cases the Network Operator must submit an exemption application, in accordance with Article 30-2.
15 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
4. RAE may ascertain, on a case by case basis, the concurrence of Force Majeure, in accordance with what is specifically set forth in the present SECTION of the Network Code.
Article 4-6 Payment of penalty clauses and considerations to Users for Quality of Service 1. The penalty clauses and considerations ensuing in favour of Producers from the violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits, shall be payed by the Network Operator to them within one month from said violation. 2. For each Customer, the Supplier holding the largest percentage of his representation is liable to inform said Customer on the payment of a penalty clause or consideration in his favour, in accordance with the aforementioned, as well as regarding the processing of said payment. In cases where this rule cannot be applied due to more than one Suppliers holding a equal stake on the representation of a Customer, the Network Operator shall determine the Supplier who is liable, from those Suppliers holding the greater percentage in the representation of the Customer and taking under consideration the views of these Suppliers. 3. The Network Operator calculates the penalty clauses or considerations in favor of a Customer and legally notifies them to the Supplier liable, in compliance with paragraph two (2), together with the Network Use Charges of this Customer for the corresponding Metering Period, in accordance with Article 28-9. The sums of the penalty clauses or considerations ensuing from a volation of a Customer’s Individual Guarantee Limits shall be compensated for with the corresponding Network Use Charges paid by the liable Supplier to the Network Operator, in compliance with Article 28-9. 4. The Suppliers are oblidged to discernibly record on the invoices of every Customer they represent, the penalty clauses and considerations credited to the Customer by the Network Operator due to the violation of Individual Guarantee Limits. 5. In case of an overdue payment of penalty clause or consideration imposed by the present SECTION of the Network Code, the sum due shall be automatically augmented for every day of delay by a sum calculated with an overdue payment interest equal to 0,1%, non accumulatively.
16 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
CHAPTER 5 POWER QUALITY – DEFINITIONS AND CALCULATION RULES
Article 5-1 Power Quality Dimensions 1. Power Quality “dimensions” consist of those voltage and Supply Interruptions characteristics which are discernible by Users, as established in Standard EN 50160. Article 5-2 Network Voltage Interruptions - Definitions 1. Slow Voltage Changes in the Network refer to increases or decreases in the effective-rms value of voltage, which are due to changes in the overall Network load or of the generation injected in it or part of it. They are quantitively characterized by the percentage rate of voltage change ε(%), which is calculated as follows: ∆U ε =×100 10min Un
where ∆U10min is the average value in a ten minute interval and Un the Nominal Voltage. 2. Rapid Voltage Changes regard isolated fast changes in the effective-rms value of voltage between levels maintained for a given but not specific duration, which occur in time frames ranging from one cycle to several seconds. Contrary to Slow Voltage Changes which are phenomena exhibiting a long duration (at least several minutes), Rapid Voltage Changes are fast transient phenomena. They appear occasionally, usually due to either sudden load changes at Customer installations, or in the generation at Producers installations, or in Network operations, and are, consequently, recognized as events. Rapid Voltage Changes are defined in terms of the maximum voltage change ∆Umax and the magnitude of the steady- state voltage change∆Uc, employing the following diagram:
U(t)
∆Uc
∆Umax
t
17 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Based on the maximum voltage change and the steady- state voltage changethe corresponsing relative – respective voltage changes are defined, reduced to the Network Nominal Voltage, Un:
∆Umax dmax (%)=⋅ 100 Un
∆Uc dc (%)=⋅ 100 Un A fast change in the effective voltage value, where the effective voltage value is decreased by more than 90% of the Nominal Voltage is considered a supply Voltage Dip, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph four (4). 3. Flicker refers to the phenomenon where repeated changes of luminosity in artificial light sources, which are caused by corresponding changes in their supply voltage, cause visual irritation. At given frequencies the human eye can perceive this phenomenon of even minute repeated fast changes or fluctuations in the supply voltage of light sources. Having said this, most of the equipment connected to the Network is not affected by this phenomenon. The intensity of the irritation caused by Flicker is estimated by the Flicker Metering Method set forth in IEC and can be quantified using the following indexes:
• Short-term Flicker Intensity (Pst), measured for a ten minute time span, and
• Long-term Flicker Intensity (Plt), calculated by integration over two-hour intervals, as follows2:
12 P 3 3 sti− Plt = ∑ i=1 12 4. Voltage Dips refer to the sudden dip of the effective voltage value of the Network to a value between 90% and 1% of the respective Nominal Voltage, which is followed by an restoration of the voltage after a short interval. Usually Voltage Dips last from 10ms up to 1 min. The Depth of a Voltage Dip is the difference between the minimum effective voltage value during the Dip and the Nominal Voltage. Voltage Changes which do not reduce the supply voltage to a level less than 90% of the Nominal Voltage are not considered Voltage Dips. 5. Temporary Power Frequency Overvoltage refers to temporary overvoltage of usually long durations. They are generally caused by switching operations or faults (e.g. sudden load reduction, single-phase faults, non-linearities, and more). The most common case of a Temporary Power Frequency Overvoltage appears in the course of a fault to the earth in the Network or a User’s installations and disappear once the fault has been cleared. The anticipated value of such an Overvoltage depends on the earthing characteristics of the Network. 6. Transient Overvoltages refer to small duration overvoltages with or without oscillation of the surrounding voltage waveform, with high damping. They are usually caused by the operation of Network breakers or protective equipment or by lightnings. The rise time of a Transient Overvoltage may vary from less than one microsecond to a few milliseconds. A key characteristic of Transient
2 cf. Article E.I-4 note 2
18 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Overvoltages is the energy contained in them, which varies considerably depending on the cause of the overvoltage. A Transient Overvoltage caused by a lighting is usually larger but contains less energy than an overvoltage caused by operations, due to the, generally, longer duration of Transient Overvoltages caused by operations. 7. A Harmonic Voltage is defined as a sinusoidal voltage with a frequency which is an integer multiple of the Network’s fundamental Frequency. Harmonic Voltages are frequently caused by the operation of non-linear loads connected to the Network. Harmonic Voltages can be estimated: • individually for each Harmonic Voltage of a given frequency based on its respective amplitude (Uh) in terms of the fundamental voltage amplitude (U1), where h is the Harmonic Voltage class, expressed in tenminute averages of the active values; • in total for all Harmonic Voltages or groups thereof, by employing, for example, the Total Harmonic Distrotion (THD) Coefficient, which is generally calculated as follows:
∞ 2 ∑U h THD(%)=×h=2 100 U1 Harmonics up to the 40th class are taken into account when calculating the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Coefficient. 8. Interharmonic Voltage is a sinusoidal voltage of a frequency between Harmonic Voltages, that is of a frequency which is not an integer multiple of the Network’s fundamental Frequency. The level of Interharmonics generally increases as a result of the widespread use of frequency converters and similar equipment. In some cases Interharmonics, even at low levels, cause Flicker or interferences in the acoustic frequency telecontrol systems. 9. Voltage unbalance in a three-phase system is defined as the state during which the active values of all three phase voltages or the voltage angles between two consecutive phases are not equal to each other. Voltage unbalance is usually due to the load current asymmetry between phases or to Network fault. Voltage unbalance is measured by the Voltage unbalance Index, which is defined, using the theory of symmetrical components, as the ratio of the negative sequence component to the positive sequence component of voltage under usual operating conditions. The periods for which the effective voltage value of all three phases is less than 50% of the Nominal Voltage are excluded from this calculation. 10. Mains signalling voltage are injected into the Network from the signal transmission systems established and operating in accordance with Article 3-7. They are superimposed on the operating voltage of the Network and are characterized by the frequency and the relative amplitude of the overlapping voltage. For the design and planning of their installations, Users must take into account voltages at signal transmission frequencies of an active value up to 1,4V at the LV Network.
19 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Article 5-2 Supply interruptions - Definitions 1. Supply Interruption is the state where the voltage at the Connection Point for Network/User is under 1% of the Nominal Voltage. 2. Supply Interruptions are more specifically classified as follows: Α) Planned Interruptions, when the Users affected have been timely and adequately informed in advance and which are caused by planned interruptions in the operation of the Network due to works, Β) Unplanned Interruptions, when the Users affected have not been timely and adequately informed in advance and which, as a rule, are caused by Network faults due to external events and factors, failure of the Network equipment or interventions by third parties. Unplanned Interruptions are further distinguished into: i) Long Interruptions, the duration of which exceeds 3 minutes and which, as a rule, are due to permanent faults, and ii) Short Interruptions, the duration of which is less than 3 minutes of the hour, and which are caused, as a rule, by the operation of the protection devices of the overhead parts of the Network (cycle of interruptions – automatic reclosing of line output breakers) for the isolation of temporary faults. 3. The minimum time in advance required for the notification of the Users about a Supply Interruption in order for said notification to be considered as timely and for the Supply Interruption to be considered as Planned is set forth in the Power Quality Manual. In establishing this minimum time requirement, account shall be taken particularily of the duration of the planned Supply Interruption, of the classification of Users in different categories and of the temporal period for the occurance of the interruption, which affects the anticipated demand of the affected Users. 4. The minimum requirements for the form of the ex ante notification provided to the Users about a Supply Interruption in order for said notification to be acknowledged as adequate and for the Supply Interruption to be considered as Planned, is set forth in the Power Quality Manual. In determining the minimum requirements in question, account shall be taken particularly of the duration of the planned Supply Interruption, the number of affected Users, classification of Users in different categories and the temporal period for the occurance of the interruption, affecting the anticipated demand of the Users affected. 5. In case of dispute which is relegated to RAE, in accordance with Article 1-5, and which concerns the timely and adequate notification of Users about Supply Interruptions, the Competent Network Entities assume the burden of proof for the timely and adequate character of said notification. 6. The deactivation of the connection to User installations in compliance with the provisions of Article 12-2 or in the context of Interruptible Load Contracts and also the interruption of the injection of electricity from Producers’ installations in the context of the distribution of electricity generation by the Network Operator or by the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator, shall not be considered
20 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
as Supply Interruptions and are, thus, not subjectible to the provisions of the Network Code regarding these Interruptions.
Article 5-3 General Statistical Indexes for Supply Continuity - Definitions 1. The System Average Interruption Frequency Index [f∆(Χ) – SAIFI] is the average annual number of Supply Interruptions per User and is calculated as follows:
K ∑ Ni f∆(Χ) = i=1 Ntot where:
Ni the number of Users (Customers and Producers) affected by the Supply interruption (i),
Ntot the total number of Users, whose installations are connected to the Network.
K ∑() sum for all Supply Interruptions during a year, the number of which is i=1 Κ. 2. The System Average Interruption Duration Index [t∆(Χ) – SAIDI] is the total temporal period per annum in which, as an average, a User faces Supply Interruptions. It is calculated in minutes of the hour on an annual bases, as follows:
K ∑()Ni × Di t∆(Χ) = i=1 Ntot where:
Di the duration of Supply Interruptions (i), expressed in minutes of the hour, the remaining symbols are as defined above. 3. The Customer Average Interruption Duration Index [t(∆Χ) – CAIDI] is defined as the average time required to resume supplying a User, following its interruption. It is calculated in minutes of the hour per annum, as follows:
K ()N × D ∑ i i t∆(Χ) t(∆Χ) = i=1 = Ni f∆(Χ) where: all symbols defined as in the formulas above. 4. The Energy Not Supplied Index [ENS] is defined as the energy demanded by Customers which has not been supplied due to Supply Interruptions. It is measured in kWh per annum and calculated as follows:
21 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
K Di ENS = ∑ Pi × i=1 60 where:
Pi the total load power the supply of which has ceased during the interruption (i), expressed in kW, all other symbols are defined as in the formulas above. 5. Additional Power Quality indexes may be defined in the Power Quality Manual, which regard the Supply Continuity for the installations of one User or a group of Users.
Article 5-4 Statistical Power Quality Indexes – Calculation Rules 1. The calculation rules established in the present article for the Statistical Power Quality Indexes shall be specified and supplemented in the Power Quality Manual, taking into account the developments in data collection and processing technologies, as well as the need for a progressive supplementation and development of the framework for monitoring and regulating the Power Quality supplied to the Users. 2. The statistical indexes for Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity, established in compliance with the provisions of Article 4-3 and Article 5-4, are calculated seperatedly for parts of the Network or for User categories so as to specifically serve the following goals: Α) to reflect the impact of possible local peculiarities, relating to ground and environmental conditions, Β) to reflect the impact of various alternative Network planning, operation and maintenance methods, such as, for example, the supply using underground or overhead lines, the monitoring or not of the Network using SCADA and or an electronic system for monitoring and operating supply networks (DMS), the existence of alternative supply methods, etc. C) to assess the reliability of supply in more homogenous, with respect to their needs, User groups, for instance discretely between Producers and Customers, amongst LV and MV Users, amongst Users which have concluded or not the Power Quality Contract under Article 6-2 etc, or parts of the Network. D) to discretely measure and assess, for Non-Interconnected Islands, the effects of the operation of thermal generation units on Supply Interruptions. Ε) to estimate the effects caused by various categories, which induce faults to the Network. Such causes fall under the following categories at minimum: i) Force Majeure, ii) liability of third parties or Users, iii) causes falling within the scope of responsibility of the Competend Network Entities. F) to assess the effects of the installations of particular Users or User groups on Network operation.
22 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
3. The concurrence of Force Majeure causes or of the liability-culpability of third parties and/or Users may be examined on a case by case basis by RAE, based on the methodology set forth in the Power Quality Manual. The assessment methodology and the identification degree of the concurrence in question may also assume a statistical character. 4. The Supply Continuity statistical indexes are calculated discretely for Planned and Unplanned Supply Interruptions. The statistical indexes regarding the number of interruptions are calculated discretely for Short and Long Supply Interruptions. 5. Indexes of the total equivalent disturbance resulting from Planned and Unplanned Interruptions can be defined, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph one (1) of the present article and of Article 5-4. For the calculation of these indexes, the duration of Planned Interruptions is multiplied by a weighting factor which is larger than zero and less than one and reflects the degree of disturbance caused on average to a User by a Planned Interruptions relative to the degree of disturbance caused to the same User by a Unplanned Interruption of equal duration. The value of the aforementioned weighting factor and the relative calculation details are set forth in the Power Quality Manual. 6. In calculating statistical indexes for the Non-Interconnected Islands Network, the Supply Interruptions to Users which are due to a supply interruption of the Network, or part of it, from the generation units system are also included. 7. The calculation of Supply Continuity indexes defined as the average values per User, such as, for example, the SAIFI and SAIDI indexes, for those cases where there are no accurate measurements per User and in order to assess the number of Users affected and to what degree, as well as the affected User category, in every interruption may be based on appropriate assumptions, such as, for example, the average number of connected Users per MV or LV line, or the number of Users per surface area unit, etc. 8. In calculating the statistical indexes regarding the duration of Supply Interruptions, account must be taken of the fact that the duration of an Interruption in the Supply of a User’s installations, which is caused, for example, by a fault or planned works, generally differs from the time period it takes for the removal of the causes of the Interruptions (for example, repairing the fault or completing such works) and may even vary among the Users affected. 9. Where the duration of a Planned Interruption exceeds the duration determined in the corresponding notification of the Users, any additional duration shall be added to the total time of Unplanned Interruptions and the number of such interruptions will not be increased. 10. Where the deadline for informing Users about an anticipated Supply Interruption, established in compliance with Article 5-3, is not observed; part of the interruption shall be considered as Planned, in a manner so as to provide sufficient incentives to the Competent Network Entities for informing-warning the Users as soon as possible, even if past due. 11. Where the requirements for the adequate informing of the Users with regard to an anticipated Supply Interruption, established in Article 5-3, are not observed; part of the interruption may be considered as Planned, providing, thus, the
23 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Competent Network Entities with sufficient incentives for notifying Users in the most suitable way, even in those cases where this warning is not fit.
CHAPTER 6 USER POWER QUALITY LIMITS
Article 6-1 Rules for the implementation of Power Quality limits 1. Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity limits are established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. This decree establishes the Individual Guarantee Limits, the Total Performance Limits and the Anticipated Quality Limits, in accordance with Article 4-4, for the Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity indexes, as defined in the Network Code or in the Power Quality Manual, in compliance with Article 5-4. 2. In detemining the Power Quality limits, as above, account is taken of the following: Α) the current Power Quality level provided to the Users, based on measurements, Β) technological developments in the fields of equipment and electrical networks managment, C) the evolution of Users’ needs regarding the Power Quality of their installations, and also their willingness to pay for its improvement, or their readiness to concent to lower Power Quality. D) the estimated effective cost of Power Quality improvement, per level of improvement, Ε) the anticipated annual Network cost, F) comparative breakdowns of the annual cost and the provided Power Quality regarding electricity distribution networks internationally. G) specifically for Supply Interruptions, the fact that the implementation of new technologies for monitoring and controlling the Network, which contribute substantially to the reduction of the duration of Interruptions (which is generally considered to be the key parameter for the disturbance of Users) may have the opposite effect on the frequency of Interruptions (which generally causes a lesser disturbance to the Users). 3. Power Quality limits regard voltage at the Connection Points of Network/Users. The Network Operator shall, at his discretion, set corresponding limits in other parts of the Network, where the Network Operator possibly monitors also Network operation, in order to ensure the observance of the limits at the Network/User Connection Points. 4. Power Quality limits may be set uniformally for the entire Network, or different for parts of the Network, or network User groups. Specifically for the Non- Interconnected Islands Network, Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity limits are anticipated to be generally wider, since events occuring in the system of thermal generation units which adversly affect Power Quality for local Users are
24 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
included in the corresponding indexes together with events on the Network. Furthermore, Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity limits for cases of seasonal only operation of the User’s installations in certain areas, are anticipated to be generally wider for the other terms of the year, as is the case also for especially remote areas. 5. For time periods exhibiting Force Majeure conditions, affecting either the operation of the Network directly, or the System and/or the electricity generation installations and, consequently, the operation of the Network, the validity of the limits for Power Quality is revoked, both of the Individual Guarantee Limits and of the Total Performance ones. These periods are not included in the calculation of general Power Quality statistical indexes. 6. In cases where third parties or Users are responsible for the deterioration of Power Quality and which could not have been foreseen or planned for the removal of, by the Competent Network Entities in a financially justifiable manner, such as substantial damages caused to the Network by works of third parties, the Network Operator shall decide on a case by case basis for the revocation of the validity of Power Quality limits and the exclusion of such events from the calculation of the corresponding general statistical indexes. 7. The reduction of event causes to Force Majeure as well as the assignment of liability to third parties and or Users, in compliance with paragraphs five (5) and six (6) of the present, shall be verified by RAE based on the methodology set forth in the Power Quality Manual. The recognition in question may also be partial, that is to regard a percentage of the events which are reduced by the Network Operator to these reasons. It is explicitly clarrified that for the cases of paragraphs seven (7) and nine (9) the provisions of Article 6-5 are concurrently applicable. 8. In all other cases falling in the scope of the provisions of paragraphs five (5) and six (6) above, the Competent Network Entities must take all measures they deem necessary to provide supply of technically satisfactory quality to the largest possible part of the Users affected by such conditions. 9. The Network Operator shall apply a statistical methodology for the processing of the annual Power Quality indexes, in order to thus indentify specific time periods when parts of the Network exhibit great recrudescence of the numerical value of certain indexes, compared to their corresponding average values. For those cases where (a) the recrudescence of the Power Quality indexes compared with the corresponding average values exceeds a specific statistical margin and (b) where said recrudescence can be statistically related to external factors falling outside the sphere of responsibility of the Competent Network Entities, the corresponding durations shall be exempt from the final calculation of Power Quality indexes for the respective year and the corresponding data shall not reflect on the calculations for possible overstepping of the Total Performance limits. The exemption of durations may also be partial, regarding, thus, a percentage of such periods. The details for the statistical methodology for processing Power Quality indexes, the overstepping limit of average values of the Power Quality indexes, of the requisite degree of association with external factors, as above, and the relevant procedures are set forth in the Power Quality Manual.
25 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Article 6-2 Power Quality Contracts 1. Users may conclude Power Quality Contracts with the Network Operator, where individual Voltage Quality and/or Supply Continuity limits are set, in order for the supply of their installations to be realized under improved Power Quality conditions. 2. The Power Quality Contract is drawn following the User’s application. In the application, the User must establish, besides the information required for the determination of the User’s installations, at least the following elements: (a) the Power Quality dimensions the User wishes to improve (eg. reduction of the frequency of Short-term Unplanned Interruptions, reduction of the maximum duration of Unplanned Supply Interruptions, reduction of the height of Voltage Harmonics, etc), (b) the desired supply quality limits for the User’s installations, per dimension of the User’s Power Quality, (c) a possible priority set among the dimensions of Power Quality the User wishes to be improved. 3. The application for the Power Quality Coontract may be filed jointly by more than one Users. In this case, in the Users’ application the data of paragraph two (2) above must be filled for each User individually and, in addition, the participation percentage for each of the participating User in covering the cost must also be established. For each User this percentage is established as uniform for the cost of works and the operation and maintenance cost and for all participating Users the sum of their participation percentages must add up to one hunderd percent. In cases of joint applications, each participating User shall enter into a different Power Quality Contract with the Network Operator. 4. In case of existing connections, applications for an Power Quality Contract shall be submitted during the Application for Connection procedure for the amendment of a connection in accordance with the provisions of Article 13-5 and the drawing up of this contract shall be followed by the amendment of the Network Connection Contract for those cases where this is deemed necessary. For new connections where special Power Quality conditions are requested, applications for the conclusion of an Power Quality Contract in addition to the Network Connection Contract shall be submitted in the context of the procedures for applying for an new connection, in compliance with Article 13-5. 5. In each Power Quality Contract the following are specifically set forth: Α) The Power Quality indexes, whose value is monitored. Β) The admissible fluctuation limits for these indexes. C) The monitoring method employed for the corresponding Power Quality dimensions, and details regarding the recording, collection and processing of the data, including the necessary details for the calculation of the corresponding indexes. D) the consideration paid by the Network Operator for each violation of the limits agreed upon under a Power Quality Contract. Ε) the method employed for the verification of violations, the launching of the consideration payment procedure (following the User’s application or
26 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
automatically) and the other necessary details for the manner in which any such consideration shall be paid. F) the required works to the Network and necessary equipment needed in order to provide the User with increased Power Quality under the Power Quality Contract, including the charges made to the User for the carrying out of these, pursuant to the Participations System set forth in PART VIII. G) the additional periodical charges made to the User for the provision of improved Power Quality under the Contract, which are established based on the unit charges and approved in compliance with Article 26-1, in a manner such as to cover for the works and equipment determined in compliance with paragraph (G) and the potential additional operation and maintenance cost. These charges shall be settled together with the Network Use Charges, in accordance with Article 28-9. H) charges made to the User for the unilateral, by the User, termination of the Power Quality Contract. In every case, care must be taken to avoid double charges to Users made under the Power Quality Contract and the Network Connection Contract for the same installations. 6. When a User’s application for an Power Quality Contract specifies as desirable for improvement Power Quality dimensions for which no general limits have been set, in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code, the Network Operator must, prior to the drawing up of the Power Quality Contract, take care that measurements of the provided to the User quality in said dimention are carried out for an adequate period of time, which may generally extend up to one year. The cost for such measurements shall be borne by the User and must be paid in any case and independently of the conclusion or not of the Power Quality Contract. In such a case the deadlines for the drawing up of the Connection Offer or the connection amendment are correspondingly extended, in compliance with Article 13-5. 7. The Network Operator must, in every case where higher Power Quality is provided to some Users and in order to cater for the objective needs of such Users, fully recover the additional cost incured from such provision by means of the respective Power Quality Contracts3. 8. In cases where the general operation limits of the Network established in accordance to the Network Code become equivalent or stricter than the limits determined by a Power Quality Contract, such a Contract will automatically become null and void with respect to such limit. 9. The general terms and provisions of the Power Quality Contracts shall be approved by RAE following the recommendations of the Network Operator. 10. The Network Operator shall submit annually a report to RAE with statistics regarding the Power Quality Contracts concluded, the applications which have been submitted for such Contracts and also including a statistical analysis of the willingness of the Users to pay for better Power Quality, per User category and
3 cf. Article E.I-4 note 3
27 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
per Power Quality dimension. The form and manner for the submission of this report shall be approved by RAE. 11. The Network Operator’s income from the Power Quality Contracts shall be credited to the Network Owner.
Article 6-3 Interruptible Load Contracts 1. Customers may enter, following their application, with the Network Operator into an Interruptible Load Contract, by virtue of which they accede to the interruption of the supply to their installations up to a maximum of 200 hours annually, during high loading periods for the Network or the System, without advance notice and as an initiative of the Network Operator. 2. Customers entering into a Interruptible Load Contract are not subject to the fixed segment of the Network Use Charges, in accordance with Article 28-6. 3. An Interruptible Load Contract may be concluded by Customers whose installations simultaneously fullfil the following conditions: Α) are supplied by Network elements (in particular transformers and or lines) whose maximum load approaches their maximum transfer capacity, and Β) energy consumption by the Customer is measured by a Hourly LV Load Meter or a Hourly MV Load Meter, remote controlled by the Network Operator. 4. The Network Operator may enter into Interruptible Load Contracts only in those cases exhibiting the preconditions of the previous paragraphs and for the corresponding time. Furthermore, the Network Operator must make public the geographical regions where there are Network elements whose maximum load approximates their maximum transfer capacity and where there isn’t an immediate and foreseeable solution to this problem. 5. The Network Operator shall submit to RAE, on an annual basis, a report containing statistical data regarding the concluded Interruptible Load Contracts, the applications that have been submitted regarding such contracts and the supply interruptions to the corresponding Customer’s installations which have been realized in the context of such Contracts.
Article 6-4 Individual Power Quality measurements 1. By the Electricity Supply Regulation Decree, User categories may be determined, where the Network Operator installs and operates equipment for measuring their Power Quality dimensions. The installation of such equipment is done expenses of the Network Owner. The operation and maintenance of the equipment in question is care and expenses of the Network Owner. 2. The remaining Users reserve the right for individual verification of the Voltage Quality or and the Supply Continuity of their installations. Such verification may be done by way of the installation of suitable certified equipment either care of the Network Operator or care of the interested User. 3. Disturbances to the Network voltage waveform are generally local or their intensity varies locally. For this reason, as a rule a safe estimate of the supply
28 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Voltage Quality for a User’s Installations is made by the installation of suitable equipment near the corresponding Network/User Connection Point. With regard to Supply Continuity, measurements taken at one point of the Network may be reliable indication for the Supply Interruptions to all Users connecting to the same part of the Network. The Power Quality Manual establishes rules for the necessary degree of proximity between the metering equipment and a Network/User Connection Point, for such measurements to be also reliable for such a User. 4. In every other case, save for those of paragraph one (1) above, the installation of equipment for the measurement of Power Quality in the installations of a particular User is effected upon the User’s application, filed with the Network Operator. 5. In cases where the User submits an application for an individual verification of Power Quality, the Network Operator must compose a relevant offer, inclusive of a proposal for the equipment and an offer for the cost of its installation and operation for the required time. The User interested may either accept the Network Operator’s offer or, alternatively, install himself, following the notification of the Network Operator, and based on the specifications set out by the Network Operator regarding the equipment, the installation, the access to measurement data and the security of said data, suitable equipment at a point designated by the Network Operator. 6. It is noted that in order for the measurement data of the User’s Power Quality to be reliable and suitable for the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code with respect to Service Quality limits, it is particularily important besides the certification of the type of the equipment used to safeguard-protect such equipment against possible attempts to tamper with the measurements. 7. Users are granted full access to the individual measurements data regarding their installations. 8. The Network Operator must post in his website an updated indicative list of certified and suitable measurement devices which may be installed by Users to measure the Power Quality of their installations. 9. The implementation details for the present Article are given in the Power Quality Manual.
Article 6-5 Monitoring Power Quality at Network level 1. The Network Operator must monitor Power Quality at the Network level. The Power Quality Manual establishes the following particulars with respect to the monitoring of the Users’ total Power Quality: Α) The degree and scope of monitoring by the Network Operator for each type of voltage disturbances or Supply Interruptions to the Network, in order to thus attain a safe estimation, indicatively, of the provided quality for disturbance type or Supply Interruption with respect to the level of User, or a safe estimate of the provided quality on the geographical regions level or for User category; or to generally monitor the operation of the Network in order to forecast more long-term developments and requirements regarding its operation. In this
29 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
context, the Power Quality Manual may also establish specific parameters of the metering procedure, such as the number or density of the metering points, the technology employed in the transmission or collection of the meterings, specifications for the points and the method for installing the metering equipment, etc. Β) Data collection, processing and storage specifications. C) Specific rules governing access to information, in compliance with the principles set forth in Article 2-2. 2. RAE shall check the integrity and accuracy of the information regarding User Power Quality, which is recorded and reported by the Network Operator. In this context, the Network Operator and the Network Owner must allow for on-site checks by RAE or its representatives and provide any necessary information for the unhindered – unobstructed conducting of said checks. The methodology and detailed rules for these checks are established in the Power Quality Manual. 3. In the context of the auditing as defined in paragraph two (2) above, RAE is specifically entitled to request from the Network Operator the installation of equipment for the measurement of Power Quality dimensions at points of the Network designated by RAE and the granting to the authority of direct access to such equipment, for the collection of measurement data. The Network Owner and Network Operator must service RAE’s applications in compliance with above. 4. Where the integrity and or accuracy of the information provided by the Network Operator for Users’ Power Quality is deemed unsatisfactory, the affected Power Quality indexes shall be calculated anew, by applying adverse for the results reliability factors, based on the methodology and detailed rules established in the Power Quality Manual. 5. RAE shall publicize information on the results of its aforementioned checks, in compliane with Article 2-2. 6. The full cost for the monitoring, in accordance with the present Article, Users’ Power Quality on the Network level shall be borne by the Network Owner.
Article 6-6 Consequences of the failure to observe individual Power Quality limits of Users with individual metering 1. Violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits for the Power Quality of Users for whom an individual metering of Power Quality is carried out, in compliance with Article 6-4, shall lead to the imposition of penalty clauses to the Network Operator and in favor of Users. 2. Those cases where a penalty clause is imposed, as well as the sum of such penalty clauses in each case, shall be approved by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. The sum of the penalty imposed by such a penantly clause shall be determined per Power Quality dimension and per User category and is based on the statistical analysis of the willingness of the Users to concede to a lower Power Quality or their readiness to pay for a higher Power Quality.
30 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
3. Specifically for the case of a User who, following his application for individual verification of Power Quality, in compliane with Article 6-4, is encumbered with the corresponding expenses for the installation of the equipment, the pentalty clauses imposed in case of a violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits shall be established in such a way as to cater, based on the number of Power Quality dimensions for which a violation has been recorded, the size and systemization of such violations, for the crediting of the full sum of the corresponding offer enforced by the Network Operator to the User for the installation and operation of Power Quality metering equipment, in compliance with the provisions of Article 6-4. 4. The Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree establishes the deadlines for the payment of penalty clauses per case applicable, as well as the percentages of their automatic accretion in case of their overdue payment. 5. The provisions of the paragraphs of the present Article above are not applicable in the following cases: Α) for User’s installations where there is no individual metering of Power Quality dimensions, in accordance with Article 6-4, for these dimensions, Β) for User’s installations where there is, in accordance with Article 6-4, individual Power Quality measurement, in complianec with Article 6-4, and specifically for those Power Quality dimensions for which this particular Users has concluded a Power Quality Contract, in compliance with Article 6-2. 6. There are no limits set to the total sum which may be paid by the Network Operator to the Users due to violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits relative to Power Quality.
Article 6-7 Consequences of the failure to observe individual Power Quality guarantee limits for Users without individual metering 1. For those Power Quality dimensions for which no individual metering at the installations of a given User is not carried out, in compliance with Article 6-4, a consideration shall be paid to the User by the Network Operator for those cases where there is a documented violation of the corresponding Individual Guarantee Limits, following an application by the User. 2. A consideration, following the application by a User for whom no individual metering of certain Power Quality dimensions is carried out, may be paid only for those Power Quality dimensions for which the imposition of a penalty clause in favor of the Users with an individual metering of Power Quality in this dimension has been foreseen and only in the case of a violation thereof. 3. The Network Operator must pay such a consideration in cases where: Α) The violation of Individual Guarantee Limit has been demonstrated for the User in question by measurements of the given Power Quality dimensions of neibouring Users. The adequacy of this demonstration shall be governed by the rules set forth in the Power Quality Manual, in compliance with the provisions of Article 6-4, paragraph three (3).
31 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Β) Otherwise the violation of an Individual Guarantee Limit for the User under consideration shall be demonstrated based on generally accepted evidence. 4. The sum of the consideration which shall be paid by the Network Operator in the cases above, is equal to the sum of the automatic penalty clause which would have been imposed where individual measurements were taken for the given User and the specific Power Quality dimension, without the encumberment of the User with the installation and operating expenses of the metering equipment. 5. The Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree also establishes the deadlines for the payment of the considerations hereunder, per case applicable, and also the percentages for the automatic accretion-increse thereof, should the payment of such be overdue.
Article 6-8 Consequences of the violation of the total Power Quality performance limits 1. Each and every violation of the Total Performance Limits regarding the admissible Power Quality for Users on the Network level, that is the provision of a lower quality than the minimum anticipated in a given quality dimension, shall result in an annual charge made to the Network Operator for a sum denoted by ChQSAn i, in cases of lower quality then the Users’ Power Quality in dimension (i). 2. For those Power Quality dimensions where an Anticipated Quality Zone has been defined, each exceedance of the Anticipated Quality Limit on the Network level, that is the supply of higher quality than the maximum anticipated in a given quality dimension will result in the annual crediting of the Network Operator with a sum denoted by CrQSAni, when regarding the supply of higher quality in dimension (i) of the User’s Power Quality. 3. The aggregate annual net charge made to the Network Operator due to divergancies in the User’s Power Quality on the Network level from that anticipated, shall be denoted by QVCi, and calculated as the algebraic sum of ChQSAni and CrQSAni, for all User’s Power Quality dimensions. 4. The way of calculation of the annual charge or credit made to the Network Operator for divergencies from the anticipated quality for every Power Quality dimension on the Network level, is established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. The charge or credit shall be established distinctly for every Power Quality dimension, and is in general analogous with the exceedance of the corresponding limit, while indifference zones may also be established, within which divergancies in quality do not entail a corresponding charge or credit. It is also possible to set upper and lower limits for the total, as above, annual net charge made to the Network Operator due to Power Quality divergancies for Users on the Network level, from the anticipated quality, QVCi, as a percentage of the Annual Consideration of the Network Owner, established in compliance with Article 27-3. For those Power Quality dimensions where an Anticipated Quality Zone has been determined, the calculation method for the ChQSAni charge may differ from the method employed for the calculation of the CrQSAni credit.
32 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
5. For the determination of the annual charge or credit of the Network Operator in cases of deviations from the anticipated quality for each Power Quality dimension, account shall be taken of the statistical analysis data for the marginal benefit and marginal cost of Users due to the improvement or worsening of the quality, respectively, in the given quality dimension. 6. Implementation details for this Article are established in the Power Quality Manual.
Article 6-9 Report and publication of Power Quality statistics 1. The Network Operator shall submit to RAE annually and until the end of February each year, a full and detailed statistical survey report on Power Quality of Users for the immediately preceeding year. 2. With regard to Supply Continuity, the annual Power Quality report shall contain a statistical analysis based on the indexes established in Article 5-4 and Article 5-5. 3. In the annual report on Power Quality emphasis should be placed on the presentation of the degree of observance for the corresponding quality limits. More specifically the following are included: A) statistical data regarding the violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits, separately for Users with or without individual Power Quality metering, in compliance with Article 6-4, Β) statistics regarding the violation of the Total Performance Limits or and Anticipated Quality Limits C) presentation of the results per User categories, geographical region, network type and per Power Quality dimension. D) identification of User categories and geographical regions exhibiting the lowest values for Power Quality indexes at Network level. Ε) statistics regarding the compensations paid to Users for damages done to User installations due to a substantial diversion in the operation of the Network from the rated values of its characteristics, established in PART II. 4. The Network Operator’s annual report on Power Quality shall be pending on RAE‘s approval of its structure and content; the results of the respective checks under Article 6-5 also being taken under consideration. 5. Part of the approved annual report on Power Quality shall be made public, in compliance with Article 2-2, following the approval by RAE of the content and the type of said publication. 6. The Network Operator shall inform the Users on the publication of the approved annual report on Power Quality and shall notify to them the information contained in the report relating to the key Power Quality indexes for those parts of the Network and User categories that each User belongs to, following the approval by RAE.
33 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
CHAPTER 7 SERVICE QUALITY
Article 7-1 Service Quality - Definitions 1. Service Quality to the Users refers to a number of services provided to the Users by the Competent Network Entities, some of which are provided by the Competent Network Entities to persons wishing for their installations to be connected to the Network, prior of the commencement of the operation of the connection of said installations. Indicativelly, the following categories of services provided by Competent Network Entities to Users are mentioned: Α) Services prior of the connection of the User’s installations to the Network: • Response to the Connection Application • Calculation of Connection Charges • Execution of connection works Β) Usual services after the connection of a User’s installations to the Network: • Accuracy of estimated bills • Meter reading • Customer centers service • Telephone services • Provision of information, for example on the Individual Guarantee Limits and the Total Performance Limits, as well as on the consequences provided for should these limits be exceeded. C) Occasional services after the User’s installations have been connected to the Network: • response to meter fuse fusion • response to voltage related complaints • response to problems – complaints regarding the meters • response to querries regarding charges and payments • meeting scheduling and observing • reply to User’s letters (requests for the provision of information) • handling of Users’ claims • reconnection following an interruption due to unpaid debts on behalf of the Customer • substantiation of charges, following a request • execution of works • notice of supply interruption
34 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
2. Service Quality dimensions incorporate all the characteristics of the services extended by Competent Network Entities towards their Users and which affect the Users’ satisfaction. As dimensions of Service Quality are mentioned, only indicatively: the response time to a Supply Application, the time of calculation for Connection Charges, the accuracy and transparency in the calculations of Connection Charges, the response time for an incoming telephone call, the accuracy of replies and answers in a telephone call, Competent Network Entities’ staff politeness when replying in telephone calls and others. 3. To measure the Service Quality provided by the Competent Network Entities, corresponding indexes per quality dimension are employed, and the performance of said Entities is determined based on these.
Article 7-2 Statistical indexes for Service Quality – General Provisions 1. The indexes for measuring the Service Quality provided by the Competent Network Entities are established in the Service Quality Manual, based on the provisions of the present Chapter of the Network Code. 2. The general rules established in the present Article regarding Service Quality statistical indexes are particularized and complemented in the Service Quality Manual, taking account in particular of the technological developments in data collection and processing and also the need for gradual supplementation and development of the monitoring and regulation framework for the Service Quality provided by the Competent Network Entities. 3. The Service Quality statistical indexes are calculated in total as well as per User category, thus facilitating the following objectives: • to evaluate the quality provided and the indicated improvement margins thereof per region with respect to the administrative organization of the Competent Network Entities. • to reflect the impact-effect of possible new measures and technologies employed, • to reflect the impact of possible local peculiarities and the need for taking special measures or/and set different quality limits. • to evaluate the Service Quality provided to more homogenous, with respect to their needs, User groups, hence, for example, separately for Producers and Customers, for LV Users and MV Users, etc. • to detect potential-possible weaknesses in the procedures employed to serve Users. • to reflect the effects of various categories of causes affecting Service Quality. 4. In almost all of the services provided by the Competent Network Entities to the Users one dimension of Service Quality to the Users is time, that is the Competent Network Entities’ response speed. In such cases, the performance at a given Service Quality dimension shall be measured as the waiting time, following a User’s request, for a satisfactory result.
35 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
Article 7-3 Implementation rules for service quality limits 1. Limits for Service Quality provided to Users are established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree, in the form of Individual Guarantee Limits and Total Performance Limits under Article 4-4. 2. In detemining the Service Quality limits, as above, account is in particular taken of the following: Α) the current Service Quality level provided to the Users, Β) technological developments relating to the provision of services to Users and the monitoring thereof, C) the evolution of User’s needs for better Quality of Services and also their willingness to pay for its improvement or and their readiness to concent to lower Service Quality. D) the estimated effective cost for Service Quality improvement, per improvement level, Ε) the anticipated annual operation cost of the Network, F) comparative breakdowns of the annual cost and the provided Service Quality by electricity distribution companies internationally. 3. Service Quality limits may be set uniformally for all Users or separately per geographical regions or User groups thereof. 4. Service Quality limits are set on quality indexes established under Article 7-2. 5. In such cases where in the provision of services by the Competent Network Entities there interfere works or actions that need to be fulfilled care of the User applying for the provision of such services or a third party outside the scope of responsibility of the Competent Network Entities, the time for securing authorizations and executing such works is calculated, and not added to the time for the completion of the necessary works by the Competent Network Entities. The Competent Network Entities must exercise due diligence for the execution of works or actions by third parties under this Article, and to inform RAE of systematic problems. 6. For time periods exhibiting Force Majeure conditions, affecting the quality of the services provided to Users, the validity of the Service Quality limits is revoked. Such periods are not included when calculating the general statistical Service Quality indexes. 7. In cases where third parties or Users are responsible for the reduction of Service Quality and which could not have been foreseen or planned for the removal of, by the Competent Network Entities in a financially justifiable manner, the Network Operator shall decide on a case by case basis for the revocation of the validity of Service Quality limits and the exemption of such events from the calculation of the corresponding general statistical indexes. 8. The reduction of event causes to Force Majeure as well as the assignment of liability to third parties and or Users, in compliance with paragraphs six (6) and seven (7) of the present, shall be verified by RAE based on the methodology set forth in the Service Quality Manual. The recognition in question may also be
36 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
partial, that is to regard a percentage of the events which are reduced by the Network Operator to these reasons. It is explicitly clarrified that for the cases of this paragraph the provisions of Article 7-4 are concurrently applicable. 9. In all other cases falling in the scope of the provisions of paragraphs six (6) and seven (7) above, the Network Operator must take all measures deemed necessary to provide satisfactory, to the extend possible, Quality of Service to the largest possible part of the Users affected by such conditions. 10. The Network Operator shall apply a statistical methodology for the processing of the annual Service Quality indexes, in order to thus indentify specific time periods when certain regions exhibit great recrudescence of the numerical value of certain indexes, compared to their corresponding average values. For those cases where (a) the recrudescence of the Service Quality indexes compared with the corresponding average values exceeds a specific statistical margin and (b) where said recrudescence can be statistically related to external factors falling outside the sphere of responsibility of the Competent Network Entities, the corresponding durations shall be exempt from the final calculation of Service Quality indexes for the respective year and the corresponding data shall not reflect on the calculations for possible overstepping of the Total Performance limits. The exemption of durations may also be partial, regarding, thus, a percentage of such periods. The details for the statistical methodology for processing Service Quality indexes, the overstepping limit of average values of Service Quality indexes, of the requisite degree of association with external factors, as above, and the relevant procedures are set forth in the Service Quality Manual.
Article 7-4 Monitoring service quality 1. The Network Operator must monitor Service Quality provided to the Users on an individual and on an overall level. The Service Quality Manual establishes the following particulars with respect to the monitoring of User’s Service Quality: Α) the degree and extend of Service Quality dimensions the Network Operator must monitor. Β) Data collection, processing and storage specifications. C) Specific rules governing access to information, in compliance with the principles set forth in Article 2-2. D) rules on the compilation and submission of reports on Service Quality. 2. RAE shall check the integrity and accuracy of the information regarding User Service Quality, which is recorded and reported by the Network Operator. In this context, the Network Operator and the Network Owner must allow for on-site checks by RAE or its representatives and provide any necessary information for the unhindered – unobstructed conducting of said checks. The methodology for these checks, which may include, in particular, public opinion surveys, and detailed rules are established in the Service Quality Manual. 3. Where the integrity and or accuracy of the information provided by the Network Operator for Users’ Service Quality is deemed unsatisfactory, the affected Service Quality indexes shall be calculated anew, by applying adverse for the
37 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
results reliability factors, based on the methodology and detailed rules established in the Service Quality Manual. 4. RAE shall publicize information on the results of its aforementioned checks, in compliane with Article 2-2. 5. Individual measurements of the dimentions of Service Quality provided to the Users may be taken using such equipment as deemed suitable and satisfactory for each case, as, for example, by checking the dates of document registration, the time registration of telephone calls, the time of commencement and completion of works, charges calculation and information provision documents, etc.
Article 7-5 Consequences of the failure to observe individual guarantee limits with respect to service quality 1. Violation of Individual Guarantee Limits with respect to User Quality of Service shall lead to the imposition of penalty clauses to the Network Operator and in favor of Users. 2. Those cases where a penalty clause is imposed, as well as the sum of such penalty clauses in each case, shall be approved by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. The sum of the penalty imposed by such a penantly clause shall be determined per Service Quality dimension and per User category and is based on the statistical analysis of the willingness of the Users to concede to a lower Service Quality or their readiness to pay for a higher Service Quality. 3. There are no limits set to the total sum which may be paid by the Network Operator to the Users due to violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits relative to Service Quality. 4. The Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree also establishes the deadlines for the payment of the considerations hereunder, per case applicable, and also the percentages for the automatic accretion-increse thereof, should the payment of such be overdue.
Article 7-6 Consequences of the violation of the total service quality performance limits 1. Any violation (negative exceedance) of the Total Performance Limits with regard to the admissible Service Quality to Users, namely the provision of a lower quality than the minimum anticipated in any given quality dimension in total, shall result in the annual charge of the Network Operator with a sum denoted by ChQSAni in cases where quality is lower then anticipated in dimension (i) of the Service Quality to the Users. 2. For those Service Quality dimensions where an Anticipated Quality Zone has been defined, each exceedance of the Anticipated Quality Limit with respect to Service Quality to the Users, that is the supply of higher quality than the maximum anticipated in a given quality dimension will result in the annual crediting of the Network Operator with a sum denoted by CrQSAni, when
38 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
regarding the supply of higher quality in dimension (i) of the Service Quality to a User 3. The aggregate annual net charge made to the Network Operator due to divergancies in the User’s Service Quality on the Network level from that anticipated, shall be denoted by QVCi, and calculated as the algebraic sum of ChQSAni and CrQSAni, for all User’s Power Quality dimensions. 4. The way of calculation of the annual charge or credit made to the Network Operator for divergencies from the anticipated quality for every Service Quality dimension is established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. The charge or credit shall be established distinctly for every Service Quality dimension, and is in general analogous with the exceedance of the corresponding limit, while indifference zones may also be established, within which divergancies in quality do not entail a corresponding charge or credit. It is also possible to set upper and lower limits for the total, as above, annual net charge made to the Network Operator due to Service Quality divergancies from the anticipated quality, QCCi, as a percentage of the Annual Consideration of the Network Owner, established in compliance with Article 27-3. For those Service Quality dimensions where an Anticipated Quality Zone has been determined, the calculation method for the ChQSAni charge may differ from the method employed for the calculation of the CrQSAni credit. 5. For the determination of the annual charge or credit made to the Network Operator in cases of deviations from the anticipated quality for each Service Quality dimension, account shall be taken of the marginal benefit and marginal cost of Users due to the improvement or worsening of the quality, respectively, in the given quality dimension. 6. Implementation details for this Article are established in the Service Quality Manual.
Article 7-7 Reporting and publication of statistics regarding service quality 1. The Network Operator shall submit to RAE annually and until the end of February each year, a full and detailed statistical survey report on Service Quality of Users for the immediately preceeding year, based also on the relevant indexes established in Article 7-2. 2. In the annual report on Service Quality emphasis should be placed on the presentation of the degree of observance of the corresponding quality limits. More specifically, the following are included: Α) statistical data regarding the violation of Individual Guarantee Limits for Users, Β) statistics regarding the violation of the Total Performance Limits or and Anticipated Quality Limits C) presentation of the results per User categories, geographical region, network type and per Service Quality dimension. D) identification of User categories and geographical regions exhibiting the lowest values for Service Quality indexes at Network level.
39 Part ΙΙΙ: Quality of Service for Network Users
3. The Network Operator’s annual report on Service Quality shall be approved in reference to its structure and content by RAE, also taking into account the results of the respective audits – checks under Article 7-4. 4. Part of the approved annual report on Service Quality shall be made public, in compliance with Article 2-2, following the approval by RAE of the content and the type of said publication. 5. The Network Operator shall notify the Users regarding the publication of the approved annual report on Quality of Service and shall legaly notify to them those elements of this report which regard the basic Quality of Service indexes, for the parts of the Network and User categories relating to each User, following RAE’s approval.
40 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
PART IV OPERATION MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE NETWORK
CHAPTER 8 MONITORING OF THE OPERATION OF THE NETWORK
Article 8-1 Monitoring of the Operation of the Network – General Provisions 1. The Network Operator shall take all necessary actions to ensure the good operation of the Network, under the usual or under extraordinary conditions, in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code and the delegaded decisions and regulations issued in accordance with Law 2773/1999. In this context the Network Operator shall have specifically the following responsibilities: Α) to establish the specifications and operating rules of the Network Control Centers, Β) to see to the performance of operational checks on the Network and the User’s installations, C) to issue the necessary instructions to the Network Owner, D) to issue standing instructions, in compliance with Article 1-3. 2. The Network Owner shall operate the Network and maintain its operational and technical integrity, following the orders and instructions of the Network Operator.
Article 8-2 Network Control Centers 1. The operation of the Network is controlled by the Network Control Centers. Each Network Control Center monitors and checks the operation of a given part of the Network, within a given geographical region. 2. Furthermore, Network Control Centers plan for the operation and maintenance of the Network, in order to optimize their cost-efficiency, taking into account the necessary works on the Network, provisions on energy absorption by the Customers and the injection of energy by the Producers, which they prepare, as well as the requirements for ensuring Network reliability. 3. Network Control Centers shall be set up by the Network Owner, who must dispose of all required resources for the fulfillment of their duties, in particular with respect to the adequate and suitably-trained human resources and the necessary equipment, such as SCADA systems or Distribution Monitoring Systems (DMS). The development of Network Control Centers is established in the Network Development Regulatory Plan.
41 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
4. The operation of the Network Control Centers shall be governed by the Implementation Instruction, issued in compliance with Article 1-3. For its preparation the Network Operator takes into account the characteristics of the supervised part of the Network, of the available equipment of the Center and of the other operational units of the Network Owner regionally competent for Network operation. In the Implementation Instruction for Network Control Centers operation general and special provisions for each Network Control Center are laid out, specifically regarding the following: Α) The organizational structure and the competences of the personnel, the required equipment and basic operating principles. Β) Details on the procedures that must be observed for interventions and works on the Network. C) Details on the collection and processing of data regarding Network operation, the divergencies from its normal operation and the actions taken to counter such conditions, etc. D) specifications and periodicality for the preparation of surveys regarding load forecasting and the optimization of Network operation and maintenance. Ε) Specifications and periodicality of Network maintenance and the planning thereof. F) Procedures for granting authorizations to the personnel of the Network Owner and to Users for operating the equipment installed on the Network/User Connection Points, as well as the required qualifications and obligations thereof. G) Procedures for collaboration and communication with: (a) the Network Operator, (b) the other operating units of the Network Owner responsible for Network operation, (c) the authorized personnel of Users with respect to the equipment installed at the Network/User Connection Point and (d) the System Operator. Η) Details on the transmission and recording of orders or the confirmation of events in and works on the Network. I) Details on cases of Emergency State management and the procedures for Load Shedding in compliance with CHAPTER 10. 5. With regard to the electric systems of Non-Interconnected Islands it is deemed necessary due to their small magnitude not to install an autonomous Network Control Center and the relevant responsibilities may be assigned, upon RAE’s approval, to the load distribution center for thermal generation units. In such cases the specific provisions of the Non-Interconnected Islands Operation Code which regard the segregation-discrimination of responsibilities of the personnel employed in Network activities are applicable.
Article 8-3 Network Operations 1. The Network Owner as well as the Network Operator, by means of the orders issued to the Network Owner, may carry out operations on Network equipment which are mandatory in particular for the following reasons:
42 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
Α) isolating installations and devices for maintenance, the contruction of new works, repairs, Network tests, protection tests, isolation of identified or potential faults and execution of works by the Users, Β) voltage regulation, C) limiting the loading current of Network equipment to levels compatible with the capacities of installations and Network safety, D) Network or User’s installations operation testing, under Article 8-4. 2. The Network Owner must take all suitable measures so that the planned switching operations has the minimum possible adverse effects on the operation of User’s installations, and in particular it must: A) plan works in advance and in a timely manner and inform the Users as early as is practicable. Β) carefully choose the time of execution for works, Γ) adopt appropriate measures, such as the reconfiguration of the Network, in order to minimize Supply Interruptions to Users. 3. Under extraordinary conditions, the Network Operator and the Network Owner may deactivate User installations, besides the cases listed in Article 12-2 or Interruptible Load Contracts, to the extend necessary for the safe operation of the Network or the installations of Users, and in particular in those cases where the following shall or may occur: Α) risk with regard to the safety of persons, Β) risk for the stability of the System or the Network, C) risk for the network or for a given installation or device of a User, D) overloading of Network elements, Ε) substantial Network voltage divergancies, beyond the limits [in excess of the limits] established under CHAPTER 6.
Article 8-4 Network Operation Testing 1. The Network Operator shall execute the required Network operating tests, aimed to control and develop operational procedures, personnel training and the collection of data regarding Network operation under abnormal operating states. 2. The following are specifically regarded as Network operating tests: Α) tests for the collection of data regarding Network behavior, inclusive of the controlled imposition of frequency and/or voltage alterations at Non- Interconnected Islands, Β) Network reset tests, C) tests regarding the procedures applicable in cases of Emergency State. D) tests and monitoring ot Voltage Quality in various states of the Network. 3. The Network Operator must inform Users for the schedule and the consequences of the operation tests, and also for any change to test scheduling or the nature of
43 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
such testing, in compliance with the provisions of CHAPTER 7. Users may request a deadline in order to survey the consequences of such operation tests on their installations. The Network Operator shall collaborate with the Users in order to jointly ascertain the risks implied by the above tests. 4. Following a User’s request and specifically to check the operation of generation units connected to the Network, the Network Operator shall plan, in collaboration with said User, the required tests-checks necessitating Network operations.
Article 8-5 Safety rules 1. The Network Owner shall see to the observance-compliance of the safety rules and issue the required work permits, as well as the authorizations for the issuance of operation orders-mandates and the execution of operations, isolations and works on the Network or its close vicinity. 2. The Network Operator shall compile the Instruction for the Safe Operation and Control of the Network, in compliance with the provisions of Article 1-3, where the following shall be specifically included: Α) the procedures and rules applicable during Network operations for the isolation of parts of it, in order for works on the Network or its close vicinity to be executed, as well as any necessary detail on the safety measures taken, Β) the required qualifications for the persons issuing the corresponding work permits and the authorizations the orders to perform operations and isolate parts of the Network, C) details on special works, so that these are realized always under safe conditions, such as, for example, the procedures regarding “working in live parts”. 3. A work permit for works to be performed on the Network shall be granted to persons who reserve the corresponding right and who are designated by the Network Owner. These persons assume the responsibility of compliance with the safety rules during the execution of the works listed in their respective work permits and for taking all indicated-suitable safety measures for the personnel in the work area. For any work on the Network or in its vicinity, the Network Owner shall take all required safety measures, which shall also be notified to any affected Users. 4. For works executed in the vicinity of the boundaries between the Network and a User’s installation, that is near the Network/User Connection Point, the holder of the work permit on the Network side must take all necessary safety measures, which are also notified to the User’s representative. The work permit holder may request electrical isolation confirmations from the User’s representative.
44 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
CHAPTER 9 PROVISION OF INFORMATION REGARDING THE OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS
Article 9-1 Information provided by Users – General Provisions 1. The Network Owner may request from Users information regarding the operation of their installations, which is deemed necessary for the conduct of surveys on the Network, and particulartly for its development. 2. The Network Owner may determine the information to be provided by Users on the operation of their installations, periodically or in case of changes to the installations, taking into account the power of the User’s installations and local conditions. 3. Users must immediately inform the Network Owner on any realized or planned change to their installations or to the way these operate, which may affect their ability to connect to the Network in the existing manner, or to affect Network design, in compliance with the provisions of Artcle 15-1. 4. MV Users and HV Producers must inform the Network Owner on any substantial change to the equipment compensating the reactive power of their installations, in accordance with the instructions issued by the Network Owner. The provided information specifically regards the kind and magnitute of such compensation, namely if it is permanently connected or connected in steps and the range of changes thereof, as well as the point of installation of such compensating devices. 5. Users must provide the Network Owner with the requested information in compliance with the provisions of the present Article and following the Network Owner’s instructions. The Network Owner may request Users to resubmit information and/or to submit additional information, in those cases the Network Owner deems that the submitted information is insufficient or inaccurate.
Article 9-2 Information provided by Customers 1. Customers with installations connected to the Interconnected Network and exhibiting an annual maximum active power demand in excess of 5MW in the course of the last three years, shall submit to the Network Owner the following information, by the end of each year: Α) The anticipated maximum annual active power demand and the period such a demand appears, for each of the following five years. Β) The anticipated minimum annual active power demand and the period such a demand appears, for each of the following five years. C) The anticipated active power demand during the maximum System load period, for each of the following five years.
45 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
D) The anticipated active power demand during the minimum System load period, for each of the following five years. Temporal periods during which the maximum or the minimum load of the System is anticipated to appear for each future year, shall be notified to such Customers by the Network Operator. 2. Customers with installations connected the Non-Interconnected Islands Network and exhibiting an annual maximum active power demand in excess of 5 MW or 10% of the maximum total demand for the Network, in the course of the last three years, shall submit to the Network Owner the following information, by the eand of each year: Α) The anticipated maximum annual active power demand and the period such a demand appears, for each of the following five years. Β) The anticipated minimum annual active power demand and the period such a demand appears, for each of the following five years. C) The anticipated active power demand during the maximum local Network load period, for each of the following five years. D) The anticipated active power demand during the minimum local Network load period, for each of the following five years. The Network Owner shall notify such Customers with respect to the temporal periods during which the maximum or minimum load of the local Network is anticipated to appear for each future year, in compliance with the provisions of the Non-Interconnecting Islands Operation Code.
Article 9-3 Information provided by Producers 1. Producers with installations whose power exceeds 2MW shall notify the Network Owner, as soon as possible, on any anticipated modification of the characteristics of their installations or their way of operation. 2. The aforementioned liability-obligation applies also to Producers with installations connected to the Non-Interconnected Island Network who, in the course of the last three years, have had an annual maximum injection of active power into the Network exceeding 5% of the maximum total demand of such Network. 3. More specifically, the Producers established in paragraphs one (1) and two (2) above, shall notify the Network Owner for any realized or anticipated change in the characteristics of their generation units, such as, for example, the increase or decrease of the necessary reservations percentage, the loss or recovery of autonomous start capability of the units, any changes to the performance rate, etc, in accordance with the instructions issued by the Network Owner. 4. For Producers possessing RES or Cogeneration units, their obligations-liabilities under the present Article shall be determined and specified on a case by case basis by the Network Owner.
46 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
CHAPTER 10 STATES OF EMERGENCY
Article 10-1 State of emergency cases and general obligations 1. A state of emergency incurs in situations where there has been or is expected to come about for a substantial number of Network Users, a Supply Interruption, or significant reduction in the reliability of the supply, or significant deviation of the characteristics of Network operation from their rated values at Network/User Connection Points. There shall be a state of emergency in particular in the following cases: Α) alarm activation by the System Operator, in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 23 of SO&PE Code; Β) alarm activation by the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator, due to the failure of generation to reliably cover the total load in compliance with the Non- Interconnected Islands Operation Code; C) interruption of the operation of important Network elements; D) interruption of the operation of systems which are important for monitoring and checking the operation of the Network; Ε) operation of Network elements near their acceptable operation limits (such as in particular thermal loading limits) or even beyond such limits, without it being possible to immediately resume their operation at safe levels through Network operations; F) substantial reduction in the Network’s operational reliability resulting from an interruption of the operation of elements employed in the alternative supply of parts thereof; G) significant deviation of the Network’s operational characteristics from their rated values, without the possibility for immediate reversion through Network operations; H) in all other cases where the available resources for the operation of the Network or for monitoring and checking such operation are not deemed by the Network Operator to be sufficient for its reliable operation. 2. The Network Operator and the Network Owner must take in advance all measures contributing on the one hand to the avoidance of the occurance of states of emergency caused by the Network itself or the operation of Competent Network Entities, and, on the other hand, to the effective management of states of emergency when such arise. Such measures must be reasonably cost-efficient, considering international experience and technological advances. 3. When states of emergency arise, the Network Operator must take all suitable measures to limit its effects to the extend possible, and to bring the Network back to normal operating conditions as soon as possible.
47 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
4. The Network Owner and the Users must assist the Network Operator in states of emergency, implementing his orders, to the extend that these do not compromise the safety of their personnel, installations and equipment. 5. Details for the implementation of the provisions of the present Chapter are laid down in the Network Access Manual.
Article 10-2 Alarms 1. In a state of emergency the Network Owner shall activate an alarm through the Network Control Centers, directed to the Users and the Network Operator. 2. The Network Access Manual establishes in detail alarm types, as well as the requirements and the way of their notification per Users category and per type of alarm. 3. In emergency cases, the Network Owner may take actions prior to the announcement and notification of an alarm to the Users. In this case the Network Owner must inform them as soon as possible regarding: the actions taken, provided that they affect them operationally, the possible duration of the state of emergency and its anticipated termination, save for its being a temporary state that has been fully restored. 4. In order to perform the notification obligation, as this is defined in the provisions of the present Article, the Network Operator as well as the Users and the Network Owner, are required to possess suitable means of communication and comply with the procedures established in the Network Access Manual.
Article 10-3 Load Shedding 1. In States of Emergency the Network Operator reserves the right to proceed with load shedding. 2. Load shedding may be performed as follows: Α) automatically due to under-frequency, Β) automatically due to low voltage, C) by using signal transmission systems, D) by means of Network element operations, performed by the Network Owner, Ε) by operations of the equipment in User’s installations, following the mandate issued by the Network Operator. 3. Automatic load shedding due to under-frequency or low voltage shall be performed using automatic breakers controlled by suitable relays. For the Interconnected Network the installation positions for such breakers and the settings of the respective relays are established in Chapter 23 of SO&PE Code, with the collaboration of the System Operator and the Network Operator. For the Non-Interconnected Islands Netowrk, the positions for the installation of such breakers and the settings of the respective relays shall be established by the Network Operator. In any case, the Network Operator shall inform those MV
48 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
Users and HV Producers who are operationally affected on the position and principles of operation of such automatic breakers for load shedding. 4. Load shedding using signal transmission systems shall be done care of the Network Operator, who may in states of emergency issue orders also through the signal transmission systems installed upon a Supplier’s request, in compliance with Article 3-7. In such cases the System Operator shall inform Suppliers in this respect as soon as possible. 5. Load shedding by Network elements operations performed by the Network Owner or be operations on installations of Users performed by their personnel, shall be coordinated by Network Control Centers. The respective orders shall be recorded in a special file, in compliance with the provisions of the regulation governing the operation of such Centers. 6. The Network Operator shall take all necessary measures so as for load shedding in states of emergency to be performed governed by the following principles: Α) To ensure the following, per case applicable: (a) the execution of orders issued by the Network Operator in compliance with Chapter 23 of the SO&PE Code; (b) the operational integrity and restoration of the electric system for Non- Interconnected Islands in the case of an emergency, in accordance with the provisions of the Non-Interconnected Islands Operation Code; (c) the load shedding which is necessary due to reasons reduced to the operation of the Network. Β) Nuisance to Users must be kept at the lowest possible level, and Users must be informed as soon as possible regarding load shedding. C) To the extend possible there should be no discriminations amongst Users. During load shedding, accound shall be taken of cases of Customers to whom supply priority is given and Customers who are not subjected to load shedding. The principles and criteria employed to determine the Customers not subjected to load shedding as well as priorities on the implementation of load shedding by Customer category shall be established by a decree of the Minister of Development, issued following the Network Operator’s proposal and RAE’s assent. The Network Operator shall be responsible for the implementation of this decree and the preparation of an analytical list of Customers or Customer categories for load shedding. Such a list shall be incorporated in the operation regulations of Network Control Centers. D) The Network Operator shall take care so that load shedding, be it automatic or manual, is performed in such a manner so that, with the exception of the discriminations among Users under paragraph (C) above, there are no substantial deviations in the load shedding that different User groups are subjected to in the long run. Ε) When for a prolonged period of time there is a substantial shortage of electricity generation to cover the entire load of the Network and there is a need for extended load shedding, the Network Operator shall impose a cyclical shedding scheduling per Customer groups governed by the principles established in paragraphs (A) to (D) inclusive above. 7. The Network Operator shall see to the preparation and update of automatic or manual load shedding programs, be them cyclical or not, for each Network
49 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
Control Center, as well as that Users are informed on the basis of the principles under paragraph six (6) above. For the preparation of such programs, the Network Owner shall collaborate in particular with MV Users, HV Producers and Customers who have supply priority.
CHAPTER 11 NETWORK MAINTENANCE
Article 11-1 Network maintenance – General provisions 1. Network maintenance shall be carried out by the Network Owner, according to the planning it draws up in compliance with Article 11-2 and the Network Operator’s instructions, in such a manner as to ensure and promote its operational and technical adequacy. The Network Operator shall monitor and check the planning and execution of Network maintenance, in term of the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code and the instructions it issues to the Network Owner. 2. The maintenance of Network equipment and the planning thereof, shall comply with the instructions given by its manufacturers, internationally applicable standards and the rules of sound professional practice. 3. The Network Owner shall keep a detailed records of the performed maintenance works. It shall also keep statistical data on the equipment presenting faults (manufacturer, procurement order, year of manufacture, etc) and generally on both the equipment as well as standardized structures. These data shall be notified to the Network Operator.
Article 11-2 Network maintenance planning 1. The Network Owner plans for the maintenance of the Network on an annual and weekly basis. The annual Network maintenance plans are notified to the Network Operator. 2. Network maintenance planning shall be carried out in such a way as to minimize User Supply Interruptions, taking into account also the System maintenance plan, prepared under Chaper 50 of SO&PE Code and the coordination capabilities between the Network maintenance programs for neighboring Network Control Centers. 3. The annual Network maintenance plan shall be prepared annually until the end of October of the previous year. Significant changes-alterations to the annual maintenance plan may occur only if justified, on objective reasons which ensued and were not foreseen at the time of compilation-editing of the plan. Such changes are notified to the Nework Operator. The annual Network maintenance plan shall include in particular the following information for each Network maintenance:
50 Part IV: Operation Monitoring and Maintenance of the Network
Α) planning of the Supply Interruptions that may be caused, estimation of the duration and load power for each Supply Interruption, Β) list of the Network equipment that will undergo maintenance, C) type of maintenance for each Network element, D) planning of User’s briefing. 4. The weekly maintenance plan for the Network shall be prepared by 12 o’clock noon on Thurday of the previous week for each [coming] week, based on the annual maintenance plan. The weekly maintenance plan for the Network includes all planning details for Network operations, the parts of the Network that shall not be live, the starting time for each Supply Interruption, the User briefing actions, the elements of the Network that will undergo maintenance and the maintenance type. The weekly Network maintenance plans are notified to the Network Operator to the extend and in a manner the Network Operator deems necessary.
51
Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
PART V CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK AND OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS
CHAPTER 12 PROVISION OF NETWORK ACCESS
Article 12-1 Obligation to provide access to the Network 1. The Network Operator and Network Owner must provide Users with access to the Network, with no discriminations among Users or User categories, in the most direct and cost-efficient manner. For the attainment of this objective the Network Operator and the Network Owner must collaborate with those applying for connection to the Network, as well as with the existing Network Users, and to notify them of its existing capabilities and prospects, in accordance with the provisions of the Network Code. 2. The Network Owner shall assume those responsibilities for which it is explicitly established in the present PART of the Network Code that the Network Owner may be authorized by the Network Operator to assume, following the corresponding authorization by the Network Operator and as its representative. 3. Denial of the provision of access to new Users is forbidden, as is the interruption of the connection to the Network for User installations operating parallel to it, save for those cases explicitly determined in the Network Code and Article 12-2 in particular.
Article 12-2 Cases of connection denial and Network connection interruption 1. The Network Operator may deny connection to the Network for User’s installations not complying to the specifications and other requirements for the legal operation of installations and equipment, established in the Network Code or otherwise in the wider institutional framework. 2. Besides the cases above, the Network Operator may deny to a User the connection of its installations to the Network only temporarily and exclusively on grounds of the exhaustion of the transmission capacity of Network elements. For each such case the Network Operator must document the grounds for access denial and also take all necessary measures for priority provision of Network access to such User as soon as possible. 3. For each denial of connection for a User’s installations to the Network in accordance with what has been specified in paragraph two (2) above, the Network Operator shall designate a deadline for the connection of such installations to the Network, based on the principles and rules established by RAE. Where such deadline has been exceeded, the provisions of Article 7-5 shall
53 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
be in force and applicable and the consequences due to the failure to comply with the provided Service Quality limits shall ensue. 4. The Network Operator shall compile on a quarterly basis and notify to RAE a report for all cases of denial of connection to the Network for User’s installations, providing analytical statistical data per region, Network type, User category etc, in compliance with RAE’s directives. 5. The Network Operator must disconnect User’s installation from the Network in the following cases: Α) where it comes to the Network Operator’s attention in an well-grounded manner that the installations do not comply with specifications or other requirements for the legal operation of installations and equipment, which are established in the Network Code or otherwise in the wider institutional framework; Β) in cases of unjustified denial or obstructiveness of a User to perform operation checks on its installations, in Compliance with article 16-2; C) where there are overdue User debts to the Network Operator; D) where the Network Operator has been informed of existing overdue Customer debts from the purchase of electricity, or in those cases where the Customer is not represented by a Supplier, in compliance with CHAPTER 19. It is explicitly clarified that Suppliers must, in such cases, comply with the provisions of their permits, of the apposite regulation and the Supply to Clients Code. Ε) in cases of temporary connections, under Article 13-8, in compliance with the special provisions of said Article. 6. In the cases above under paragraph (5.A) where the operation of a User’s installations violates the specifications or other requirements relating to human and installation safety, the Network Operator must interrupt the connection of such installations to the Network as soon as possible, without the advance notice of the User being required. In all other cases of paragraph (5), the Network Operator must inform the User in that respect and must set a deadline, deemed reasonable by the Network Operator, for the User to comply with its obligations, should such subsist, and to interrupt the connection of the User’s installations to the Network in case of non-compliancy. The relative details are established in the Network Access Manual. 7. The Network Owner must interrupt the connection of User’s installations to the Network, following a request by said User, if possible by the time specified in the application. 8. In the cases of the interruption of the connection of a User’s installations to the Network under the provisions of paragraphs (5) and (7), the Network Operator shall impose a corresponding interruption charge, as follows: (a) in the case of a Customer connection, to the Supplier who is liable for the payment of Network Use Charges for said Customer, under Article 28-9, and (b) in the case of a Producer connection, to the Producer. In the case of the restoration of the connection of User’s installations, following an interruption under the above, the Network Operator shall impose a corresponding charge for the restoration of the connection, correspondingly to the above. The sum of the charges imposed in
54 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
compliance with the present paragraph shall be determined-established by a decree of the Minister of Development, following the proposal of the Network Operator and RAE’s assent. The relative income shall be credited to the Network Owner. 9. The Network Operator may authorize the Network Owner to interrupt the connection of User’s installations to the Network, on grounds of the present Article.
Article 12-3 Customer installation categories The following Customer Categories are distinguished, based on the intented use of electricity in each one’s installations: Α) Domestic Customers, Β) Commercial Customers, C) Industrial Customers, D) Agrarian Customers, Ε) Street and Square Lighting (henceforth “SSL”), F) Hellenic Republic buildings.
CHAPTER 13 PROCEDURES FOR THE PROVISION OF ACCESS TO THE NETWORK
Article 13-1 Network Connection Contracts 1. The connection of User’s installations to the Network and their operation parallel to the Network shall be permitted only following the conclusion of the corresponding Network Connection Contract between, on the one hand, the User and, on the other hand, the Network Operator or the Network Owner, under its authorization by the Network Operator. 2. Each Network Connection Contract shall establish in particular the following: Α) the Network/User Connection Point; Β) the Network’s Nominal Voltage at the above Network/User Connection Point; C) with respect to Customers, the Customer Category to which the contracting party is subsumed, based on its declarations regarding the function of the use of electricity in its installations, in compliance with Article 13-10 and the documents on the observance of the required specifications and the fulfillment of the preconditions for the legal operation of its installations and equipment, in compliance with Article 13-6; D) the Maximum Agreed Power for the User’s installations, that is the maximum power the User may absorb from the Network (for Customers) or inject to it
55 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
(for Producers) the transportation of which through the Network must be ensured by the Network Operator. For LV Customers, the Maximum Agreed Power depends on the type of the corresponding Supply, in accordance with Article AP IV-1; Ε) the special obligations assumed by the User, beyond the provisions of the Network Code and regarding the operational limits of its installations and the provision of data and information to the Network Operator; F) every other special obligation of both parties in the context of the provisions of the Network Code. 3. In cases where a Network Connection Contract has been drawn up for the implementation of a new connection of a User’s installations, or for the amendment of an existing connection, in an appendix to such Contract the following shall be incorporated: a general description of the way for connecting User’s installations to the Network, the sum of the charges made to the User for the connection of its installations to the Network and the way of payment for these. In those cases where the charges made to the Customer for the connection of its installations to the Network is determined based on performed works, and also in cases of the connection of Producer’s installations, the description of the corresponding connection works in the Appendix to the Network Connection Contract shall be detailed and in agreement with the acceptable Connection Offer. 4. The inclusion of terms regarding the sale and purchase of electricity is not permissible in an Network Connection Contract. 5. In cases where the User wishes the provision of improved Power Quality for its installations, the User may also enter into a Power Quality Contract, under Article 6-2. 6. The Network Operator’s income resulting from the drawing up of Network Connection Contracts, which is established under PART VIII, shall be credited to the Network Owner.
Article 13-2 Network connection contract terms 1. The type of Network Connection Contracts is pending on RAE’s approval of the proposals made by the Network Operator and shall be included in the Network Access Manual. 2. The general terms of Network Connection Contracts for Customer’s installations are established in APPENDIX VI. 3. The analytical terms of Connection Contracts for power generating stations to the Network are established in APPENDIX VI.
Article 13-3 User Succession 1. Where a Supplier submits a Load Meter Representation Declaration for a Customer, in compliance with Article 19-3, due to a change of Customer whose energy consumption is metered by a given Load Meter, the Network Operator
56 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
must immediately forward to the Customer a draft Connection Contract similar to the one concluded for the same consumption installations with the previous Customer, suitably amended with information relating to the new Customer, which must be provided by the aforementioned Suppliers. Should this draft of the Contract not be contested by the new Customer within a deadline of fifteen (15) working days from its receipt, it shall be considered that the Customer enters into this contract without reservations and that the Contract is now recognized as binding for both parties, the Customer and the Network Operator. In case where the Customer wishes the amendment of substantive terms of the Connection Contract draft, the procedures for submitting a Connection Application for amendment under Article 13-5 shall be observed. 2. In case of alteration of the details for a Producer for given electricity generation installations connected to the Network, the Producer must notify the Network Operator on the change, as soon as possible, and in any case prior to its entry into force. Afterwards the Network Operator shall immediately forward to the Producer a Connection Contract draft similar to the one concluded for the same generation installations with the previous Producer, suitably amended with the data of the new Producer. Should this draft of the Contract not be contested by the new Producer within fifteen (15) working days from its receipt, it shall be considered that the Producer enters into it without reservations and the Contract is now recognized as binging both the Network Operator and the Producer. In case where the Producer wishes the amendment of substantive terms of the Connection Contract draft, the procedures for submitting a Connection Application for amendment under Article 13-5 shall be observed.
Article 13-4 Code Manual and implementation instructions for Network access 1. For the implementation of the provisions fo the Network Code relating to User access to the Network, a Network Access Manual shall be published in compliance with Article 1-3. The Network Access Manual establishes all necessary methodologies and details for the implementation of the provisions of the present Part of the Network Code, based on the principles and rules set forth therein, such as are in particular: • the detailed general terms of the Network Connection Contract for every type of Supply; • the content of the Network Connection Offers; • details on the rules and procedures for transferring the ownership and management of the works for the connection of installations of generation authorization holders, which have been built be the latter; • details on the way of detemining the limits for Network Voltage Disturbances caused by the operation of User installations and detailed methodologies for the assessment-estimation of the disturbances caused; • details on the checks of the operation of Users installations run by the Network Operator. 2. The Network Operator shall issue and publish, in a manner approved by RAE, clear and coherent instructions to the Users for Network access, which will
57 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
include in detail the fixed general regulations and the procedures for Network connections and the operation of Customers and Producers installations, as well as technical information on the limits of operation of such installations, as these are established by the Network Code and the Network Access Manual. These instructions shall be hereinafter reffered to as “Instructions to Users for Access”. 3. The Instructions to Users for Access shall include in particular the following: Α) Information relating to categories and types of connection; Β) Information regarding the procedures and the authorities which may be contacted by any party interested ub a new connection to the Network or the amendment of an existing connection. More specifically, they establish the service units of the Network Owner to which the respective requests by Users should be submitted, depending on the type of the request and the category of the installations, as well as the corresponding procedures to be followed until the satisfaction of the request. C) The information that must be submitted per case, and exemplars of the relative documents that must be filled in. D) The technical limits for the operation of User installations, in terms of causing Network Voltage Disturbances. Ε) The applicable methodologies for the determination of the way of connection of User installations to the Network and the establishment of the consquences of such connection to the operation of the Network, per User installations category. F) The Network Connection Contract standard-template, per User category. G) The methodology and calculation details for the connection charges and the Network Use Charges and the approved, under Article 26-1, numeric values for the calculation parameters of such, per User category. Η) Earthing requirements for User installations, per geographical region. I) Detailed requirements for information exchange between the Users and the Network Operator with regard to the operation of the Users’ installations. J) Technical specifications for the operation of Network equipment elements, which may affect the operation of User installations. K) Other information the provision of which promotes transparency and the effective briefing of the interested parties with respect of the observed procedures and applicable methodologies, the technical specifications and the requirements. 4. Furthermore the Network Operator shall issue Implementation Instructions to the Network Owner, in compliance with Article 1-3, which shall include the general technical requirements which must be satisfied for the connection of Customer or Producer installations, in order to ensure the sound operational collaboration of each installation with the Network, as well as indicative special surveys that must be carried out for establishing the way a User installation is connected to the Network.
58 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Article 13-5 Procedure for submitting and processing Network connection applications 1. Users interested in connecting their installations to the Network, or in the amendment of an existing connection, shall submit a relative Connection Application to the Network Owner, in compliance with Article 13-6. The processing of the applications for a new connection or for the amendment of an existing connection shall be carried out by the Network Owner. 2. At the time of the submission of the Connection Application, Users shall pay a charge corresponding to the Application’s processing costs. The sum of such charges is established for Customers and per Customer category by a decree of the Minister of Development, following the Network Operator’s proposal and RAE’s assent. The as above charge made to the User shall be offset with the Network Connection Charges for said User installations. Furthermore, the charges made to the User under the present paragraph shall be refunded to the User in case of Network connection denial, in compliance with Article 12-2 paragraph (2). 3. Where there is reason to deny Network access, in compliance with Article 12-2, the Network Owner shall forward the case to the Network Operator, who shall rule on it and inform the immediately interested User in writing in case the Network Operator deems that there are grounds for such denial. 4. Should additional information be required for the processing of applications for new connections or the amendment of existing connections, the Network Owner shall inform the User in writing and also orally when procedures must be accelerated. Specifically for the case of relatively small Non-Interconnected Islands the submission of additional information may be required in order to assess if and to what extend the connection of the specific installations to the Network also affects the operation of the electricity generation system. 5. In its response to each User Connection Application for a new connection or the amendment of an existing connection, the Network Owner shall prepare and notify to the User a Network Connection Offer, in compliance with Article 13-7, within a deadline established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. Where the submission of additional information is required for the conduction of the survey, the deadline for the preparation of the Connection Offer shall be extended for a duration equal to the time it takes for the User to submit such information. 6. Should the User accept the Network Connection Offer and following the undersigning of the corresponding Network Connection Contract, in compliance with Article 13-1 and the payment of resultant charge for the construction of the connection, the Network Owner must implement the new connection, or amend the existing one, within the deadline set by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. 7. Especially regarding the generation authorization holders who may themselves construct the works connecting their installations to the Network or the System under Article 13-9, they shall state in writing if they intend to undertake the
59 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
construction of such works themselves, in which case the procedures established in Law 3468/2006 shall be in force and applicable.
8. The Network Owner shall immediately notify to the Network Operator an electronic copy of all Connection Applications submitted, and all the Connection Offers prepared under the present Article. Furthermore, the Network Owner must notify immediately to the Network Operator all additional relative information requested by the latter. 9. In cases of exceedance of the deadlines established above, the provisions of CHAPTER 7 are in force and applicable and the consequences resulting from the failure to comply with the rendered Service Quality limits shall apply. 10. Where a User deems that the time required for the processing of its application for connection to the Network, or for the amendment of an existing connection is unjustifiably prolonged, the User may appeal under Article 1-5.
Article 13-6 Network connection application 1. Users’ applications for the connection of their installations to the Network, or the amendment of an existing connection, shall be drawn up and submitted in compliance with the provisions of the present Part of the Network Code, the Network Access Manual and the Instructions to Users for Access. 2. The Network Owner shall prepare and dispose to Users standardized applications for the connection of installations to the Network, or the amendment of existing connections. 3. A User Connection Application for the connection of its installations for the Network, or for the amendment of an existing connection, must be accompanied- supplemented by all necessary information required for the compilation of the corresponding connection survey, in compliance with Article 13-10 and Article 13-11, as well as by the documents demonstrating the compliance with required specifications and the fulfillment of the preconditions for the legal operation of its installations and equipment established in the Network Code or otherwise in the wider institutional framework. The number and extend of the required information for the survey of new connections or the amendment of existing ones on a case by case basis, depends on the type and size of the installations and the particular equipment of the User and their anticipated evolution. The Network Operator must take care so that Users are granted the capability to produce the required information for the connection in a piecemeal manner, and, if possible, after the preparation of the Network Connection Offer. The Network Operator shall inform the Users accordingly, in particular by way of the Instructions to Users for Access. In the case where the information is submitted in a piecemeal manner and the final submitted information by a User substantially differs from what was initially submitted by the same User, thus imposing the need for the conduct of a new connection survey, the User is liable a new for the payment of the corresponding charge, in compliance with Article 13-5 paragraph (2).
60 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
4. The Network Owner must assist Users to quantify their requirements at the time of the submission of Connection Applications, specifically with respect to the maximum anticipated power of the connection of their installations.4, in order to establish the connection method which will cater for User needs in the most efficient and cost-effective manner for each User and for the Network. In such context, the Network Owner shall provide all required information and may also make relevant suggestions to Users, without, however, imposing upon them in any way a reduction of their requirements, save for the cases where the provisions of Article 12-2 are in force and applicable. The Instructions to Users for Access establish in detail indicative methodologies for the quantification and assessment of Customer and Producer requirements in terms of the characteristics of the connection of their installations and specifically in terms of the maximum power of such connections. 5. Network Connection Applications may be submitted jointly for a group of neighbouring Customer installations connected to the same Network voltage level (LV or MV), or for a group of neighbouring Producer installations connected to the same Network voltage level (LV or MV or HV) by a person possessing a written authorization for this purpose by all interested Users5. The Network Operator shall not in general take initiative for the grouping of applications by Users for new connections, but must inform the Users about such possibility and propose the submission of joint applications for those cases where this shall contribute to the most effective development of the Network and the reduction of the cost of the required works or/and of the charges made to the Users for the connection. In cases of the joint submission of Connection Applications a unified survey for the connection of the interested Users installations shall be carried out, but distinct and separate Connections Offers shall be prepared, one for each User. 6. Users submitting Connection Applications for their installations to the LV Network may request the provision of the possibility for future increase of the Maximum Agreed Power or/and of the number of meters or Supplies, information which should be taken under consideration by the Network Owner for the design of the connection, in compliance with Article 14-2.
Article 13-7 Network connection offer 1. Every Network Connection Offer shall establish in particular the following: A) The Network/User Connection Point; B) the Network voltage level to which the User installations shall be connected; C) a description of the way of connection of the User installations to the Network; D) the maximum power which may be exchanged between a User’s installations and the Network, based on the method of connection under consideration and, specifically for Customers, the type of Supply;
4 cf. Article AP.IV-3 5 cf. Article E.1-5, paragraph 1
61 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
E) the User’s obligations with respect to the operation limits of its installations and the provision of information and briefing to the Network Operator; F) the sum and the method of calculation of the Network Connection Charge for the User’s installations, as well as the manner of the payment thereof; G) the anticipated Power Quality for the User’s installations, based on the proposed connection; H) possible future substantial changes to the operational specifications of the Network, established in CHAPTER 3, which may affect a User’s installations, determining, if possible, the possible time for each such change. 2. The Network Owner may prepare, based on its judgment, more than one Network Connection Offers when responding to a User’s application for a new connection or the amendment of an existing one. 3. In case where a User requests the preparation of a new Network Connection Offer, in order, for example, to increase the anticipated Power Quality or to expand the operation limits for its installations, the User shall submit this request in writing, and the Network Owner may, based on its judgement, assess-examine the expedience of such preparation and to draw up a new Offer within a new deadline set, under Article 13-5. 4. Specifically for generation authorization holders who reserve the right to construct the works for the connection of their installations to the Network, or to the System, themselves, in compliance with Article 13-9, the Network Connection Offer shall establish, in addition to what is referred to in paragraph (1), the following: Α) A full technical description of the required works for the connection of the generation authorization holder’s installations, referring to all relevant specifications observed in the design and construction of such works. The Network Operator shall prepare and publicize-publish a relevant Network Code Implementation Instruction with such information. Β) The sum and way of calculation of the charge made to the generation authorization holder for the preparation by the Network Owner of the survey in compliance with paragraph (A) above. C) The sum and way of calculation of the charge made to the generation authorization holder for the Network Owners’ check and approval of the surveys for the construction of the connection works, which are undertaken- executed by the generation authorization holder. D) The sum and way of calculation of the charge made to the generation authrization holder for the monitoring by the Network Owner of the construction of the connection works for its installations and the approval for its construction, in compliance with the specifications established by the Network Owner. Furthermore, the sum and way of calculation of the charge made to the generation authorization holder for the acceptance by the Network Owner of the works for the connection of its installations, in those cases where such works are subsumed to the Network. Ε) The procedure for monitoring the construction and acceptance of the connection works by the Network Owner.
62 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
F) The way the generation authorization holder shall pay the aforementioned charges.
Article 13-8 Temporary connections to the Network 1. As temporary are considered those connections to the Network for uses of a non- permanent nature. Temporary connections to the Network may have an operating duration of up to two years from their activation and their operation shall be interrupted care of the Network Owner, either following an application by the corresponding User, or following the expiration of the operating duration of the connection, as established in the corresponding Connection Contract. 2. Temporary Network connections are distinguished to: Α) Usual, which regard, for the most part, contractor’s connections for building works and which are usually intended to be converted to permanent connections. The operation of temporary connections of such type is agreed for a maximum duration of up to two (2) years. Β) Special, for the servicing of short-term or seasonal needs with a limited duration, up to six (6) months, the installations for the servicing of which shall be dismantled after their passage. C) Extraordinary, for circumstantial supplies of electric power of up to 30 days, in order to service circumstantial needs such as, for example, the supply of electric power to theatrical, cinema or TV crews, of trade fairs, open air events etc. 3. A temporary connection with a duration exceeding six (6) months shall not be considered special, but will be regarded as usual, irrespective of whether the connection shall be definitely dismantled following its termination or not. 4. Special and extraordinary connections may be extended after the lapse of their originally agreed period of validity, for duration of up to a maximum of two (2) years, by producing suitable city-planning and other documents and certificates. 5. Usual connections may be extended in compliance with the extensions accorded by the city-planning authorities, or to be converted to permanent ones, following the submission of a corresponding application to the Network Owner. 6. For the installation of temporary connections to the Network, the procedure established in Article 13-5 shall be followed. The information to be submitted by the Users for the installation and operation of temporary connections to the Network is determined in the Network Access Manual.
Article 13-9 Works for connecting producer installations 1. Generation authorization holders may build LV and MV lines and MV/HV step- up substations to connect their generation installations to the Network or the System, individually or in groups of generation authorization holders with neighboring installations, in compliance with the provisions of the law. 2. Where connection works are built in compliance with paragraph (1), the Network Owner shall prepare a technical description of the required connection
63 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
works, referring to all corresponding specifications set by the Network Operator on the design and construction of such works. The Network Owner shall check and approve the construction surveys for the connection works undertaken- elaborated by the generation authorization holders, shall monitor the construction of the connection works by the generation authorization holder and approve of its compatibility with the specifications posed by the Network Operator. The Network Owner shall accept such connection works where these are integrated in the Network. 3. Where connection works are build in compliance with paragraph (1), the generation authorization holders must abide by the specifications and other requirements set by the Network Operator and to pay to the Network Owner the cost of works executed under paragraph (2) above. 4. The distribution lines constructed by generation authorization holders from Renewable Energy Sources, in compliance with article 11 of Law 3468/2006, for the connection of their installations to the Network or the System, and which fall outside of the boundaries of their proprietorship, as well as the corresponding MV/HV S/Ss located outside the premises of the generation station, shall remain, in principle, in the ownership and under the management of such generation authorization holders and shall not be integrated in the Network. In the case where another Users connects through such works, deemed purposeful by the Network Owner for the drawing up of the Connection Offer for such new User and pending on the approval of such advisability by the Network Operator, the ownership of the works used also by this new User shall be transferred to the Network Owner and their operation to the Network Operator, while the original owner of the works shall retain the ownership and operation of the part of these works which does not serve other Users. The transfer of ownership and concession of operation shall regard distinct and self-inclusive elements of the connection installations and not part thereof. In case deemed purposeful, in the Network Operator’s discretion, to use in the future part of the remaining works for the connection of additional Users, such parts shall be integrated in the Network both with respect to their ownership and operation. For the implementation of the above, moment of connection for a new User to works owned and operated by an authorization holder for generation from RESs, shall mean the time of drawing up of the Network Connection Contract for such new User. 5. Where electricity distribution installations are integrated in the Network in compliance with the provisions of the present Article, the Network Owner shall pay to the owner of these installations a consideration for the transfer of the ownership of the land, established on the basis of its valid objective value, as this is determined at each time. This consideration shall not be paid if the owner of the land is the Greek Government. The Network Owner shall also encumber all corresponding transfer expenses.
Article 13-10 Information provided by Customers for Network connection 1. Customers wishing the connection of their installations to the LV Network or the amendment of an existing LV connection, shall provide, in their respective Connection Application, at least the following information:
64 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Α) The maximum total power requested, in kVA and kW, taking into account the load diversity factor of individual loads and information on any seasonal nature thereof. Β) The number of phases for the requested connection (single-phase or three- phase). C) The exact address of the Customer’s installations, as well as the point of its ownership where it is requested that the meter be installed (preferably by the submission of a sketch). D) Declaration of the intended use of electricity in the Customer’s installations, in order for the Customer to be placed in the appropriate Customer Category. 2. Customers wishing the connection of their installations to the MV Network or the amendment of an existing MV connection, must, in addition to the above under paragraph (1), provide the following information: Α) For all load types: i) The maximum total active and reactive power absorbed (average 15 minute value). ii) Information regarding the type of installed devices and the way these are controlled (for example, the type and way motors are started up and controlled). iii) Information regarding the variability of the operation of devices and machinery, for example if such operation is constant for long periods of time, cyclical or otherwise interrupted. iv) Information for the calculation of the short circuit contribution, when requested by the Network Owner. Β) For loads which, under paragraph A(iii) above, are anticipated to have cyclical or otherwise interrupted operation. i) The amount and rate of change (increase or decrease) of the active and reactive power, the periodical nature of changes and generally information on the anticipated change of power over time, under normal operating conditions (e.g. typical daily demand curves, different for given periods of the year should this be required). ii) The corresponding information for extreme operating conditions, as well as the frequency with which such conditions are anticipated to appear. C) Information on the existence of devices and machineries which may cause Network Voltage Disturbances, in the sense of the provisions of Article 5-2, resulting in the increased possibility of problems to the smooth operation of the installations of other Users or and of the Network. In such cases the Network Owner may request additional data from the User on the manufacturer characteristics of such devices and machinery. Specifically in these cases, the Network Owner shall consider, at its discretion, more than one Network Connection Offers, in compliance with Article 13-7, in order to provide alternatives to Users with regard to the operational limits of such devices and machineries and the connection cost.
65 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
D) Operational electrical connection plans, as well as topographical surveys, tracing ownership and responsibility boundaries for the maintenance and the operation of equipment at the Network/User Connection Point.
Article 13-11 Information provided by Producers for Network connection 1. The Producers who wish to have their installations connected to the Network or the amendment of an existing connection, shall provide the Network Owner the information established in the present Article. 2. For each type of generation units at the Producer’s installations the following information shall be submitted: Α) The type of primary energy and the type of motor, if any (e.g. natural gar turbine, wind motor, photovoltaic generator). Β) The type of generator (synchronous, asynchronous) and of any power converters. C) The operation method provided for (e.g. continuous or intermittent parallel connection and operation, should this be a backup generation unit, etc). D) The electric characteristics, and in particular: • Nominal Voltage, rated active and apparent power, as well as own consumptions, if any. • Maximum continuous active power output to the Network, as well as maximum possible short-term generation and its duration. • Minimum continuous active power output. • Reactive power change chart, showing reactive power as a function of the active power and illustrating the possibilities of change to reactive power under different characteristic current and voltage values. • Information about the automatic voltage regulation system, if any. • The power, wiring and way of earthing of the step-up transformer, if any. • The way of start-up and parallelization with the Network. • The certified characteristics of harmonics emissions and other disturbances and emissions (e.g. flicker emissions upon the coupling-decoupling of wind generators and during their operation). • The minimum start-up and pause times for the units. 3. Regarding the equipment and device at the Network/User Connection Point (for Producer installations) the following information shall also be submitted: Α) Description and electric wiring chart of the suggested devices, the equipment to be installed and the earthing connections. Β) Characteristics for the parallelization equipment and devices at the Network/User Connection Point and per generation unit, as well as a
66 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
description of the method employed for the restart of the station, following its disconnection from the Network. C) Characteristics of the coupling equipment and of the protections, as well as of the desirable settings thereof, in order to ensure the protection of the generation stations and also to attain coordination with the corresponding Network equipment. D) Characteristics of the communication systems for the purpose of checks and metering. Ε) Operational electric connection charts-diagrams-designs, as well as land surveys showing the boundaries of ownership and responsibility for the maintenance and operation of the equipment at the Network/User Connection Point. 4. The Producers shall provide the Network Owner with the additional information that it may request in order for the Network Owner to assess the consequences of the concurrent operation of the generation installations with the Network and, in particular, the following: • the characteristic reactions and resistances of the winding of generators as well as time constants; • the inertia constant of generation units; • information on the generator excitation system; • the characteristic resistances of step-up T/Fs, the capabilities of voltage tap, the wiring and earthing for such windings; • detailed information on the anticipated protection scheme and the type and characteristics of protection relays; • full information on the automations of the generating units and specifically on the motor rotations regulator and the voltage regulator of the generator; • full information regarding the power converters, if any, and the way these are controlled; • full information regarding the reactive power compensation devices, the installation position and the way of coupling and protection. 5. The Network Owner may request additional information also in accordance with Article 13-5. Especially in cases where it is provided that should a Supply Interruption from the Network occur, part or all of the generation units of the installation shall automatically assume the supply of part or all of the consumptions (“islanding”) of the Producer’s installation, detailed information must be provided regarding the way by which this shall be attained under different operating conditions, and more specifically information on the way in which it is foreseen that the new parallelization with the Network shall be performed. 6. Islanding, under which, part of the Network is operationally isolated and Producer installations supply neighboring Customer installations, is permited only as long as the Producer’s units accept distribution orders from a Network Control Center, and under the terms and preconditions established in advance by the Network Operator.
67 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Article 13-12 Provision of information to the Users 1. The Network Owner shall provide the Users, following an application by the latter, with information on the operation and anticipated development of the Network, particularly in order for them to study the possibility for connecting their installations to the Network. This information shall be provided as soon as possible and certainly within 30 days from the receipt of the corresponding application. In case where special surveys are required, Users must pay the charges for the elaboration of such surveys, charges which are calculated based on unit cost data and are approved by the Minister of Development, following the proposal of the Network Operator and RAE’s assent. 2. The Network Operator and Network Owner shall possess in standardized form and immediately provide to each interested party a list of the information that must accompany an application for the provision of information on the operation and development of the Network.
CHAPTER 14 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT NETWORK CONNECTIONS
Article 14-1 Installation ownership boundary The installation ownership boundary between the User and the Network Owner shall be established as follows: Α) For LV Network connections, the output terminals of the metering device to the User’s installation. Β) For connection to the MV Network, the output terminals of the User’s cable at the current T/Fs when metering is installed externally or the connection terminals of the User’s cable at the MV switchboard to the T/F when the metering device is internally installed. C) For distribution lines, which are built by Producers generating electricity from Renewable Energy Sources, in compliance with Law 3468/2006 for the connection of their installations to the Network outside the boundaries of their proprietorship and which remain in the ownership. the connection terminals of the lines owned by the User in the Network.
Article 14-2 Selecting a way to connect User installations – General Provisions 1. The way by which to connect User installations to the Network shall be selected by taking all of the following criteria under consideration: Α) the supply of a connection with sufficient power and satisfactory Power Quality to the User, in accordance with the corresponding Connection Application.
68 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Β) the observance of the rules and standardizations applied by the Network Owner, in order to ensure the safe and sound operation of the Network, and the cost-efficiency of its maintenance. Specifically for Customers a suitable type of Supply is selected, in compliance with Article AP.IV-1. C) the assurance of the supply of satisfactory Power Quality to all the Users, for the servicing of which various criteria and preconditions are assessed, principally regarding the estimated Supply Voltage Changes and Rapid Voltage Changes, as well as Flicker and Harmonics emissions. D) the minimization of the total long-term fixed and variable cost arising from such connection. Ε) the minimization of the impact to the environment. 2. The Network voltage level to which Customer installations are connected shall be selected based on the following more specific rules: Α) Installations with a maximum demand up to 135 kVA are connected to LV. Β) Installations for which the maximum requested demand lies between 135 and 250 kVA are connected to LV or MV, depending on Network conditions. C) Installations for which the maximum requested demand exceeds 250 kVA but is less than 10MVA are, as a rule, connected to MV. D) Electricity consuming installations where the maximum requested demand exceeds 10 MVA are connected, as a rule, to the System. Depending, though, on local Network conditions, they may be connected to the MV Network, following a request by the Customer to this effect, and provided that the relevant operations requirements established in the Network Code are met, at the Network Owner’s discretion. 3. The Network voltage level at which connection of Producer installations are made is selected based on the following more specific rules: Α) installations with a maximum generation capacity of up to 100kW are usually connected to LV, if local conditions permit; Β) installations with a maximum generation capacity greater than 100kW and up to 6MW, are usually connected to an existing MV line, and after a possible reinforcement of the local Network, provided that local conditions allow it. Otherwise, the connection is done at a point with higher short-circuit level or even to a dedicated MV line through a HV/MV S/S like in the cases of paragraph (C) below; C) installations with a maximum generation capacity greater than 6 and up to 20 MW are usually connected to MV busbars of an existing or new HV/MV S/S, through dedicated MV lines, provided that local conditions allow it. Otherwise they are connected just like the cases of paragraph (D) below; D) installations with a maximum generation capacity in excess of 20MW are connected to HV, through a S/S belonging to the Producer and located inside the area of a Producer’s station, or outside of it, implementing the provisions of paragraph 2 of article 11 of Law 3468/2006. Exceptionally, they are connected to MV, in accordance to the above, only if local conditions render it purposeful or necessary (more specifically so as to avoid the installation of two HV/MV S/Ss at a short distance or in the case of inability to build a HV/MV S/S inside
69 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
the area of the station, etc), in concert with the Network Owner. In cases where it has been decided, in accordance with the above, to connect through a HV/MV S/S located outside the area of the generation station, the connection of the generation station with the HV/MV S/S shall be made using underground cables, save for those parts of the lines regarding which the Network Owner justifiably deems that there are objective technical difficulties for the implementation of this type of works and which are, thus, build overhead. 4. The Network Operator may, specifically in the cases of User installations of high power, rule justifiably and in concert with the User and the Network Owner, to use an alternative way of connection to those established in paragraphs (2) and (3) above, such as, for example, a connection at a higher Network voltage level or to a point with higher short-circuit current.
Article 14-3 General requirements for equipment at User installations 1. For the connection of a User’s installations to the Network, coupling and protection devices must be installed, in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. 2. The equipment of the User’s installations must, in general, be compatible with the Network’s operation specifications, which are established in CHAPTER 3. 3. At the installations of MV and HV Producers a breaking and secure isolation device is installed, accessible to the Network Owner, while in LV Producer installations a similar device is installed only if justifiably requested by the Network Owner. 4. At MV Customer installations a breaking and secure isolation device is installed, while at LV Customer installation a similar device is installed only if justifiably requested by the Network Owner. 5. The equipment under paragraphs (3) and (4) above is installed, as a rule, at the Network/User Connection Point, unless the Network Owner justifiably deems otherwise purposeful. 6. The protection devices at Users installations, inclusive of breaking devices installed at the Network/User Connection Point, must ensure that in case of any fault inside the User’s installation, such devices shall come into operation and cause the isolation of the installations from the Network, prior to the triggering of the Network’s own protection. More specific requirements for Producer installations may be established by the Network Operator. 7. The earthing of the User installations must be compatible with that of the Network, and with respect to the Netwok/User Connection Point, the earthing must be build in accordance with the instructions issued by the Network Owner. At the indoors electric installations of Users connecting to the LV Network in regions where this has a multiply earthed neutral conductor, in compliance with Article 3-5, it is possible to apply the TN protection method (“neutering”), in compliance with the ELOT-384 Standard. More specifically, the LV Network provides, as a rule, Users with the capability to connect the earthing conductor of their installations to the neutral conductor of the Network at the Network/User
70 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Connection Point, unless the attainment of sufficiently low resistance of the LV neutral conductor is practically unattainable, in which case other earthing methods are applied, which are established in the ELOT-384 Standard. In areas of Attica where the TT method (“Direct Earthing”) is employed, the same earthing method shall also be used at the indoors electric installations of LV Users. Details are provided in the Instructions to Users for Access. 8. New LV Customers installations are build so as to allow for the application of the neutering system, as a method for the protection of such installations.
Article 14-4 Requirements for telecommunications equipment 1. At MV User, HV Producer and LV Producer installations, tele-metering terminal units shall be installed, in accordance with the instructions issued by the Network Operator and the provisions of the Network Code. 2. The Network Operator may request the installation of a remote-operation (tele- operation) and tele-indication terminal at the User’s installations, taking into account the size of the User’s installations and the location of the corresponding Network/User Connection Point. In such case this terminal unit must provide at least the following signals: Α) ON or OFF position of the connection circuit breaker; Β) voltage meter (V or kV) with 15 minute average values; C) active power (kW or MW), reactive power (kVAr or MVAr) or and apparent power (kVA or MVA) meter. The Network Operator may request the transmission of additional information deemed necessary and which is available from such terminal units. 3. The communication protocols for the cases above shall be determined by the Network Operator, while they shall, in general, comply with the IEC 60870 Standard. 4. The Users must, in general, install and maintain suitable means for ensuring their regular and or extraordinary communication with the Network Operator in those cases where such communication is provided for, in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code and the Network Access Manual. 5. Additional obligations for Producers, whose installations are connected to the Interconnected Network and their units are registered with the unit register, in compliance with the Transmission System Operation and Power Exchange Code (TSOPEC), relative to the installation of telecommunications equipment and the provision of signals are established in the TSOPEC. 6. Additional obligations for Producers, whose installations are connected to the Non-Interconnected Islands Network, relating to the installation of telecommunications equipment and the provision of signals are established in the Code on Operation of Non-Interconnected Islands.
71 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
CHAPTER 15 OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS
Article 15-1 General Provisions for the operation of User installations connected to the Network 1. The equipment of User installations must be compatible with the Network’s operating specifications, as these are established in CHAPTER 3. 2. Users must ensure that the operation of their installations complies with the limitations established in the Network Code, as well as all other regulations in force and applicable6. 3. The Network Operator shall, for each User installation, examine the Network Voltage Disturbances caused by its operation, and may set justified respective limits on a case by case basis. The Network Access Manual establishes detailed methodologies for the calculation of Network Voltage Disturbances caused by the operation of Users installations, possibly by employing simplified methods. 4. The established, under the Network Code, limitations on the operation of Users installations, refer to the corresponding Network/User Connection Point. The Network Operator may, at its discretion, postpone the point for the inspection of the compliance with such limitations to the Point of Common Connection, specifically in cases where a User installations are connected at the endpoint of a line of great length which is exclusively used by such User. In any case, the operation of a User’s installations must not cause a violation of the Voltage Disturbance limits, established in the Network Code, at the Point of Common Connection. 5. Any changes to the information submitted by a User during the connection, or the amendment of an existing connection procedure, regarding said User’s installations, must be immediately notified to the Network Operator. In such cases where this change substantially affects the characteristics of energy demand (for Customers) or injection (for Producers) in the Network, as well as the characteristics of the protection and control equipment of the User’s installations, the latter must immediately submit a Connection Application for the amendment of the connection of its installations with the Network. 6. Customers may connect to their installations, electricity generation units only after the written agreement of the Network Operator, to whom they are obliged to notify all relating information and date requested. The configuration of possible backup thermal units must ensure that these do not operate parallel to the Network. 7. Should Users fail to perform the obligations laid down in the present Chapter, this may entail the disconnection of such Users’ installations from the Network, in compliance with Article 12-2. 8. Details on the implementation of the provisions of the present Chapter are laid down in the Network Access Manual.
6 cf. Article E.I-4 note 6
72 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Article 15-2 Coupling and protection equipment 1. The coupling/decoupling and protection equipment at the installations of Users are of particular importance for ensuring the coordination with the protection devices of the Network and the avoidance of hazardous situations. The system for the protection of User installations must collaborate with the protection system for the Network, as that faults in either side be correctly detected and settled. 2. Users must constantly ensure the correct operation of the coupling/decoupling and protection equipment of their installations. 3. Protection devices safeguarding User installations from Transient Overvoltages must be selected taking into account the most adverse, in terms of energy content, fault interruption Transient Overvoltages, which generally also cover inductive Transient Overvoltages due to lighting or operations at the Network. 4. In particular with respect to Producers’ installations the following additional limitations are in force: Α) Protection settings must ensure the immediate decoupling of a Producer’s generators in case of fault, thus avoiding the risk of the isolated operation of their installations (possibly connected also to part of the Network). To protect generation installations against high overvoltages and mechanical stress, when automatic reclosure devices are employed in the Network, the decoupling must be attained prior to the reset operation of the network breakers. Β) In order to avoid risks to the personnel performing works on the Network near Producer installations, the capability for automatic or manual isolation of such Producer installations must be ensured, when necessary. The connection must have a visible decoupling device capable of interrupting load current, accessible at any time by the Network Owner’s personnel, in compliance with the provisions of Article 14-3, paragraph (3). C) The coupling of more Producer generators at one Network/User Connection Point is acceptable, however, it must be ensured that their concurrent start is avoided. Consecutive coupling in time shall be notified to the Network Operator and shall be approved by it. At installations with asynchronous generators it is recommended to start the generators using an electronic starter and not their direct parallelization with the Network, in order to avoid overvoltages and voltage dips in the network. If synchronous generators or controlled voltage output converters are employed then it is necessary to have a parallelization device (preferably automatic), which allows the coupling of the installations only when phase deviation conditions of the voltage vectors at each side of the connection permit. D) Generation installations connected to the Network contribute to fault current, thus increasing the short-circuit level. This contribution must be taken into account to avoid exceeding the tolerance limit of Network equipment. At the same time the equipment of Producers’ installations must be suitably specified for the Network short-circuit level at the Connection Point for Network/User.
73 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Ε) The operation of coupling and protection equipment must be regularly checked by the Producer’s specialized personnel. The result of such checks shall be recorded on a special register kept care of the Producer. F) Producers must disconnect their generation installations from the Network for serious technical reasons related to the Network. The Network Operator and Network Owner may effect an instantaneous decoupling of generation installations in cases of hazardous or abnormal situations. The coupling of a generation installation with the Network and specifically its recoupling following disturbances in the Network, or in the installations of the Producer is permitted only if such faults or disturbances are removed and coupling conditions are met, in particular with respect to the restoration of voltage and frequency within normal operation limits.
Article 15-3 Reactive power absorption 1. The Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree may determine limits in terms of the absorption from the Network of reactive power by Customer installations, as well as the consequences of the violation of such limits. 2. For Producer installations, the power factor must in general be over 0.95 (inductive) up to 0.85 (capacitive). The Network Operator may justifiably alter such general limits for a Producer’s installation and also to specify the way of operation of the reactive power compensation equipment at such installation, in concert with the Producer and taking account in particular of the following: Α) The impact of the absorption or injection of reactive power from the specific installation on the drop or increase of Voltage on the Network, and possibly on the energy or power losses on the Network. Β) The reasonable cost for achieving a satisfactory control over reactive power on a case by case basis. 3. Reactive power may be compensated locally at Producer installations for each generator or group of generators, and/or centrally for the entire installation. When the active power output of a generation installation exhibits fluctuations which are considerable for the operation of the Network (such as, for example, in usual wind energy installations), then it is usually necessary to automatically regulate such compensation, in order to maintain the power factor near the desirable value. The impact of compensation capacitors on Network harmonics must be taken into consideration for the survey of their installation.
Article 15-4 Disturbances caused to the Network voltage 1. The operation of the installations of each User causes Voltage Interruptions to the Network and thus affects Power Quality for other Users. The extend to which the operation of the installations of a User affects the operation of the Network depends on the following factors: Α) the way such User’s installations are connected to the Network and the characteristics of Network operation.
74 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Β) the operation characteristics of such User’s installations, and in particular: i) the relative size of the User’s installations, as expressed mainly by their maximum power and also their power factor; ii) the coupling/decoupling of the User’s equipment, characterized by its frequency and the power of such equipment; iii) other characteristics of the operation of the User’s equipment, key of which are the injection of voltage harmonics to the Network and the breaking phenomena of capacity loads. 2. When a User’s installations are connected to the Network, the Network Owner must ensure that the anticipated operation of said User’s installations do not cause Voltage Disturbances to the Network, which exceed the limits of acceptable Power Quality for the same and other Users, especially at the Common Connection Point. This is attained on the one hand by the selection of the suitable way for connecting the User’s installations to the Network, and on the other hand by including in the Network Connection Contract the limits for the operation of the User’s installations. From this follow, with respect to Voltage Disturbances caused to the Network, basic obligations on behalf of the Users to, on the one hand, comply with the operational limits established in the Network Connection Contract, and, on the other hand, to inform the Network Owner of any change in the data submitted during the procedure for the connection, or the amendment of an existing connection, of their installations to the Network. 3. Use of the Network for the transmission of signals is permitted to Users only exceptionally and in particular situations, following an application by the User documenting the corresponding need and pending on the written consent of the Network Operator7. 4. In each case where after the connection of User’s installations problems to the smooth operation of Network devices or inadmissible Voltage Disturbances are detected caused by the User’s installations, the latter must take immediately the necessary measures, which shall be determined in cooperation with the Network Owner.
Article 15-5 Information provided by the Network Operator 1. The Network Owner must provide information or clarifications to the interested Users, besides those contained in the Network Code, the Network Access Manual or the Instructions for Access to Users, in order to facilitate the efficient operation of User installations and the cooperation of such installations with the Network. Specifically, the Network Owner must in particular notify to the Users all information required for the selection and setting of protective and control equipment for their installations. 2. The Network Owner must inform Users about significant changes to the operation of the Network, which may affect the operation of their installations,
7 cf. Article E.I-4 note 7
75 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
and in particular the operation and settings of coupling and protection devices, as soon as possible prior to these changes coming into effect.
CHAPTER 16 CHECKING AND MONITORING THE OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS
Article 16-1 Checking User installations for Network connection 1. The Network Access Manual details the checks and tests conducted by the Network Owner for the initial synchronization of the operation of User’s installations with the operation of the Network. 2. For MV Customers and Producers’ installations, their initial start in parallel operation with the Network is performed in the presence of representatives of the Network Owner, who shall, in particular, conduct the following checks and tests: Α) visual inspection of the installation, mainly with regard to its compatibility with the information submitted for the connection, Β) check of the capability to access and perform operations at the coupling position, Γ) response tests on the protection devices and tests of their compliance with the operation times determined in the case of typical faults, ∆) where there are compensation installations, if their coupling and decoupling in synchronization with the generators or the compensated loads is checked; and in cases of regulated compensation, checks of the correspondence of the setting with the at each time applicable power ranges. Ε) additional checks at the Network Owner’s discretion. 3. For the performance of tests and checks under the present Article, the interested User must submit, in a timely manner, to the Network Owner a corresponding application and to cooperate with the Network Owner on the time and way such tests and checks shall be performed, providing any assistance justifiably requested by the Network Owner. Following the completion of the tests and checks, the Network Owner shall compose a relevant report which it shall notify to the User and the Network Operator.
Article 16-2 Checks of the operation of User installations by the Network Operator 1. The Network Operator may check the operation of the metering, coupling and protection equipment for Users’ installations. In this context, the Network Access Manual particularizes in detail the following: Α) The cases where the Network Operator conducts on-site checks and tests of the operation of coupling and protection equipment for the Users’ installations, and in particular for MV Customers and Producers’ installations. In such cases it is
76 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
possible to provide for the mandatory existence of a suitable access point, such as, for example, a system of terminals with longitudinal separation and testing receptions. Β) The cases where the Network Operator may request the submission of apropriate certificates and documents confirming the compatibility of the operation of Users’ installations with the requirements specified in the Network Code and the Network Access Manual. C) The cases where the Network Operator may request the submission of suitable documents attesting the legality and safe operation of Users’ installations. D) The cases where the Network Operator reserves the right to seal the metering, coupling and protection equiptment for Users’ installations and/or to the exclusive access thereof. 2. For all cases above, the Network Access Manual determines in detail all corresponding rules for the checks of the operation of Users’ installations for: Α) the planning and in advance informing of Users as well as data exchange, Β) data exchange and provision of access during checks and tests, C) the inference of conclusions and the ex ante exchange of information, D) the periodicality or the in some other, non-periodical, way of planning for the checks, as well as the usual reasons for conducting extraordinary checks. 3. The Network Operator may monitor and check the operation of Users’ installations and the way this affects the operation of the Network, constantly and at the Network Operator’s discretions. To that end, The Network Operator shall install equipment deemed necessary on the Network or and User’s installations, if this is deemed necessary and in concert with such User, at no charge for the latter. 4. Users must assist the Network Operator in the conduct of checks under the provisions of the present Article, providing all required information and contributing to the planning and execution of such checks, with the sole exception those cases where the proposed checks endanger the safety of their installations or entail an unjustifiably high cost of operation. 5. The Network Owner must on the one hand assist the Network Operator in the conduct of checks under the provisions of the present Article and in compliance with the latter’s instructions, and, on the other hand, to inform the Network Operator in cases where the Network Owner deems purposeful the conduct of checks and tests on the operation of a given User’s installations. 6. In case of unjustified denial or obstruction shown by a User for the execution of checks under the provisions of the present Article, and in particular in those cases where the postponement or cancellation of such checks may, in the Network Operator’s discretion, worsen substantial anomalies in the operation of the Network or in other User’s installations, the Network Operator may interrupt the connection of such User’s installations with the Network, in compliance with Article 12-2.
77 Part V: Connection to the Network and Operation of User Installations
Article 16-3 Checks performed by Users on the operation of their installations 1. Users may perform checks and tests on the the operation of their installations, in order, for example, to confirm the compliance of their operation with their obligations and the relevant specifications, or when they measure the performance or run tests on the equipment installed and its protections. 2. In cases where the above checks and tests run by a Network User may affect the operation of the Network in a peculiar way and beyond what is anticipated for the usual operation of such User’s installations, or for their performance the assistance of the Network Operator is required, in order to impose special operating conditions for the Network, or for specialized monitoring of the impact of such tests and checks on the operation of the Network, the interested User must submit a corresponding application to the Network Operator in a timely manner. The Network Access Manual establishes the special cases of Users’ equipment or type of tests for which the timely submission of a corresponding application to the Network Operator is mandatory. 3. The application submitted by a User under the above, for the conduct of checks and tests on the operation of such User’s installations, must describe in detail the works that are to be performed and the impact such works are anticipated to have on the operation of the Network, the proposed time and anticipated duration for their conduct, as well as any other relevant information required in order to take all necessary measures for the limitation of the impact of such works. 4. The Network Operator may, based on its justified judgment, request the presence of its representatives during checks and tests of the operation of the User’s installations, under the above. In such case, and at the Network Operator’s absolute discretion, it is possible that the repetition of certain tests at the final check for the approval of the connection of such User’s installations, under Article 16-1, may not be required.
78 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
PART VI METERS, MEASURMENT MANAGEMENT AND PERIODIC MEASUREMENT SETTLEMENT
CHAPTER 17 NETWORK METERS
Article 17-1 Network Meter Categories 1. Meters measuring the injection of energy into the Network or the absorption of energy from it, henceforth called “Network Meters”, fall under the following categories: Α) Network Boundary Meters, which measure the amount of energy injected from the System to the Interconnected Network. These meters are identified with the “Distribution Network Boundaries Meters”, defined under Article 158, paragraph (1.D) of the SO&PE Code [System Operation and Power Exchange Code For Electricity]. The technical specifications for such measurements are established in the SO&PE Code. There are no Network Boundary Meters in the Non-Interconnected Islands Network. Β) Hourly MV Generation Meters, which measure the power injected to the Network from generation units connected to the MV Network or the HV Network, at least on an hourly basis. The Hourly MV Generation Meters connected to the Interconnected Network are identified with the “Registered MV Generation Meters”, defined under Article 158, paragraph (1.A) of the SO&PE Code. C) Hourly LV Generation Meters, which measure the power injected to the Network from generation units connected to the LV Network, at least on an hourly basis. D) Hourly MV Load Meters, measuring the energy absorbed by MV Customers, at least on an hourly basis. Ε) Hourly LV Load Meters, measuring the energy absorbed by LV Customers, at least on an hourly basis. F) Simple Load Meters, which measure the energy absorbed by Customers cumulatively and without the ability to distinguish between the absorption of energy per hour or other time unit. G) Zone Load Meters, which measure the energy absorbed by Customers, cumulatively per temporal zone defined within each 24 hour period, without being able to distinguish energy absorption per hour. 2. Load Meters are the Hourly MV Load Meters, the Hourly LV Load Meters, the Simple Load Meters and the Zone Load Meters. Generation Meters are the Hourly MV Generation Meters and the Hourly LV Generation Meters. Non- Hourly Load Meters are the Simple Load Meters and the Zone Load Meters.
79 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
3. The Non-Hourly Load Meters fall into subcategories, based on the following criteria: Α) Connection voltage for the installations of Customers. Β) Maximum Agreed Power of the connection of Customer’s installations to the Network, as established in the corresponding Network Connection Contract. C) Geographical region. D) Customer Category, in compliance with Article 12-3. Ε) Additional criteria at the Network Operator’s discretion. 4. The subcategories above shall be established by the Network Operator following RAE’s approval, three (3) months in advance of the beginning of the first calendar year from their entry into force. The aforementioned subcategories shall apply for a period of at least three (3) consecutive calendar years.
Article 17-2 Network meters Specifications 1. Generation Meters must meet the following requirements: A) have the capacity for recording the injection of actual and reactive power into the Network, at least on an hourly basis, Β) have the capacity for recording the average active power at the Network/User Connection Point, per quarter of the hour, C) have the capacity for the tele-transmission of the measurements. 2. Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters must be able to measure the active and reactive power at least on an hourly basis. 3. Hourly HV Generation Meters, Hourly MV Generation Meters and Hourly LV Generation Meters’ devices must include the necessary equipment for the tele- transmission of the measurements taken in compliance with the protocols and other specifications of the central measurements collection system of the Network Operator. Hourly MV Generation Meters’ devices must include the necessary equipment for the tele-transmission of the measurements taken in compliance with the protocols and other specifications of the central measurements collection system of the System Operator. 4. For Hourly MV Generation Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters the provisions of Appendix A of the SO&PE Code are in force and applicable. 5. For Network Meters which measure the absorption or injection of energy to the LV Network, the requirements established by the IEC 60521 (1988-03) Standard “AC energy meters of Classes 0.5-1 and 2” shall apply. 6. The Network Operator shall see to the synchronization of Network Meters with the capacity for the hourly recording of measurements and shall cooperate with the System Operator for those meters deemed necessary.
80 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
Article 17-3 Installation and maintenance of Network meters 1. The cost of Load Meters and Generation Meters installed on the connection of new installations to the Network and the corresponding metering and telecommunications equipment, is included in the calculation of the charges made to Users for Network connection under PART VIII. The Network Operator shall see and is responsible for their installation. 2. The operation, maintenance, repair of faults and replacement, when necessary, of the existing Network Meters, as well as of the corresponding metering and telecommunications equipment shall be the responsibility of the Network Operator, care and expenses of the Network Owner. 3. As an exception to the provisions of the previous paragraphs, Suppliers may undertake themselves to install Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters, provided they produce a corresponding written authorization from the Customer. The Network Operator shall ensure that the Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters installed by Suppliers bear the certifications provided for by the relevant instructions and standards and comply with the other applicable operational specifications and requirements. The Network Operator must publicize and update a list of the above operational specifications and requirements in respect of the metering and telecommunications equipment. Checking and acceptance of the Load Meters installed under the provisions of the present paragraph shall be performed care of the Network Operator, based on a procedure approved by RAE. 4. In the cases of the previous paragraph, Suppliers assume the cost of the initial supply and installation of the meters and the other relevant equipment, ownership of which shall be transferred to the Network Owner. In any case, the Network Operator must immediately take all necessary actions and conduct all necessary checks with respect to the Load Meters installed by Suppliers. 5. Users must: Α) provide to the Network Operator all information provided for in the Network Code regarding the meters at their installations and the respective measurements, Β) take care for the safety of the meters and their measurements, C) immediately report to the Network Operator or the Network Owner any damage to a Network Meter or to a metering device at their installations, independently of its cause.
Article 17-4 Checks and tests of the operation of Network meters 1. The Network Owner specifies in the Implementation Instructions the periodicality of checks and tests of the operation of Network Meters and metering devices, as well as the criteria for conducting extraordinary tests and special checks. The above checks and tests shall be conducted by the Network Owner.
81 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
2. Every user may request the conduct of checks and tests on the Network Meter and/or possible metering device at its installations. Should such equipment be operating within the specified fault limits then the User shall encumbered only with the cost for such checks and tests, otherwise such cost shall be borne by the Network Operator. In case where checks and tests are conducted on the Network Meters and/or metering devices, following a request by a User, the Network Operator shall inform the User regarding the checks and tests that will be conducted, as well as of the results of such checks and tests and the User reserves the right to be present during their conduct. 3. During the conduct of checks and tests under the present Article the avoidance or minimization of the duration of possible metering interruptions shall be ensured, while certified testing equipment shall be used, which enjoys traceability to recognized primary standards. 4. When following a check or test, the existence of a fault exceeding the limits under Article 17-2 is established, such a fault shall be recorded prior to the immediate setting, repair or replacement of the metering device or possible faulty part thereof. 5. For the verification of the results collected telemetrically, the Network Operator may request the Network Owner to periodically collect also the on-the-spot indications of Network Meters.
Article 17-5 Meter and metering device protection 1. The Network Owner shall take care for sealing the meters, the information collecting equipment and the connected modems, as well as the telephone connections. 2. The meters shall be installed in such a way so as for the metering results to be protected against any unlawful, on the spot or remote, electronic intervention. 3. Every metering device together with the corresponding telecommunication connection equipment shall be placed in a safe cabinet, installed in a easy accessible, free from obstacles space. Load Meters and Generation Meters, as well as any possible metering devices shall be sealed by the Network Owner. Seal checking shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures established per Meters category by the Network Owner. Unsealing may be carried out only by the Network Owner. 4. Access to the metering device and the information provided by such, as well as to the corresponding telecommunications connection equipment shall be conducted in compliance to the procedures established-determined by the Network Operator in the Implementation Instructions issued by it in compliance with Article 17-4. 5. The local indications of Load Meters and Generation Meters must always be easily readable.
82 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
Article 17-6 Replacement of metering equipment Should a Network Meter or metering device or part or component thereof be destroyed or damaged or cease to operate or exceed the preset accuracy limits, the Network Owner must adjust, replace or repair it immediately, in order for it to operate within the preset accuracy limits, as soon as possible and certainly within 96 hours.
CHAPTER 18 MEASUREMENT COLLECTION AND MEASUREMENT DATA
Article 18-1 Collection of measurements from non-hourly load meters and metering periods 1. The Network Operator shall determine the frequency for the collection of measurements from the Non-hourly Load Meters, uniformly per such meters’ subcategory8. The collection period for the measurements from Non-hourly Load Meters in each subcategory may not exceed six months and must be a multiple of one month and an integer submultiple of twelve months. 2. Metering Period for a Non-hourly Load Meter shall be defined the temporal period between two consecutive measurements collections for such meter. 3. The Network Operator shall coordinate the collection of measurements from Non-hourly Load Meters in such manner so that the Metering Period of each such meter to have as constant a duration as possible. 4. The Network Owner shall collect the measurements from Non-hourly Load Meters in compliance with the orders and instructions of the Network Operator, and shall provide the measurements of such meters to the Network Operator immediately and in compliance to the latter’s orders and instructions.
Article 18-2 Collection of measurements from hourly load and generation meters 1. Measurements from the Hourly MV Load Meters, the Hourly LV Load Meters and the Hourly LV Generation Meters shall be collected by the Network Operator using a centralized or on-the-spot electronic system for the collection and transfer of such measurements to measurements and readings database files. The collection of the measurements taken from such meters shall be conducted at least once per month. 2. Exceptionally, should this electronic system for the collection of measurements not function, collection of measurements shall be effected in any other appropriate way. In cases of problem to the collection of the measurements under paragraph (1), the Network Operator shall inform with respect to the
8 Meter subcategories are established in PART I, Article 17-1
83 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
problem those representatives of the meters exhibiting such problem, as well as the Network Owner, who must undertake all necessary actions to resolve the problem, in accordance with the instructions and orders issued by the Network Operator.
Article 18-3 Measurement data 1. The measurements collected by Load Meters and Hourly LV Generation Meters are subjected, by the Network Operator, to automatic control, as well as to corrections or estimates, if necessary, in compliance with the provisions of Article 18-4, Article 18-5 and Article 18-6. This procedure shall give the final measurement data (hereinafter: “Measurement Data”). All Measurement Data refers to the Network/User Connection Point. 2. Measurement Data for Hourly MV Generation Meters and the Network Boundaries Meters shall be established for the Interconnected Network by the Network Operator, in compliance with the provisions of the SO&PE Code. Measurement Data for Hourly MV Generation Meters for the Non- Interconnected Islands Network shall be established by the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator in compliance with the provisions Non-Interconnected Islands Operation Code. 3. Measurement Data shall be exclusively employed in all procedures established under the Network Code where measurements of the energy injected into the Network or absorbed by it are required. 4. The Network Operator may request the contribution of Suppliers, Producers, Customers and the Network Owner for the correction or estimations of measurements, and all of the aforementioned must respond immediately. 5. The Network Operator may re-estimate Measurement Data where it is ex post documented that an incorrect measurement has been taken from a Network Meter.
Article 18-4 Measurement control 1. Measurement control may be performed on all Load Meter and Generation Meter measurements, automatically or manually, immediately upon their entry in the electronic managements system. 2. Measurement control includes the identification of errors in measurements, errors which may be due to operation conditions, local readings or faults in the technical equipment. 3. Measurement control mainly consists in the following cases: Α) Control of the compatibility of the measurement and their collection procedures with the specifications observed and orders and instructions issued by the Network Operator. Β) Comparison of the measurements taken by the principal meter to those taken by the verification meter, should such exist, and amongst the measurements of Network Meters which are successively installed in a tree configuration.
84 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
4. The Network Operator may implement additional measurement control procedures, besides those established in the previous paragraph.
Article 18-5 Measurement control results 1. If the measurements collected by Load Meters and Hourly LV Generation Meters are successfully certified in compliance with the control procedure under Article 18-4, they shall be recognized as Measurement Data. Otherwise, as well as in cases where such measurements had not been available, the following procedure shall be followed: Α) The Network Operator informs the representatives of the meter and the Network Owner about the problem. Β) The meter representatives, having been informed about the problem, as per the above, provide the Network Operator with an estimate of the amount of energy that has not been measured correctly. C) After ascertaining the causes of the problem, the Network Owner shall proceed with the following actions: i) Provide the Network Operator with all possible information on the causes of the problem and the actions which may be taken to tackle the problem. ii) Should the problem be caused by a failure in the metering device, then the Network Owner shall see to its repair or replacement, in compliance with Article 17-6. D) The Network Operator shall correct or estimate measurements in compliance with Article 18-6. The resulting measurements shall be recognized as Measurement Data. 2. The Network Owner shall undertake all necessary actions so that all problems to Network Meters are resolved within forty eight (48) hours from the notification of the problem to the Network Owner.
Article 18-6 Correction and estimation of measurements 1. Where the measurements from a Load Meter or an Hourly HV Generation Meter are not available or successfully certified in compliance with the control procedure, the Network Operator shall employ the measurements from the verification meter to determine the Measurement Data, if these measurements have been successfully certified using the control procedure under Article 18-4. 2. Where no verification meter exists and the measurements from the principal meter are not available or successfully certified in compliance with the control procedure, an estimation of the Measurement Data shall be carried out in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (3) below. The same shall apply also to the case where both the measurements of the principal meter and the verification meter are not available or successfully certified in compliance with the control procedure.
85 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
3. In the cases under paragraph (2) above, for the correction or estimate of the amount of energy injected into or absorbed by the Network, the following shall be taken into account: Α) The average of the Measurement Data collected for the same meter at the three most recent and, to the extend possible, similar Metering Periods with respect to the operation of the installations being measured. Β) The measurements of suitable meters upstream from the meter in question. C) Additional information and historical data deemed by the Network Operator as purposeful to be taken under consideration, including of the estimation made in compliance with Article 18-5 paragraph (1.B). 4. Where the meter is not installed at the Network/User Connection Point, Measurement Data shall be calculated, either on-site from the meter or under the measurement correction procedure, taking account of the respective electric losses. 5. The Network Operator shall take care so that the correction or estimation of the measurements are made within seventy two (72) hours from the notification to the Network Operator of the original measurements. 6. In case of measurement correction or estimation, in compliance with the provisions of the present Article, the entry of the corresponding Measurement Data to the meters and measurements database, must be flagged accordingly, while all data and the method employed for the correction or estimation of such measurements shall be entered and kept in a separate file. 7. The Network Operator shall publish every month on its website a concise list of the cases where measurements were corrected or estimated with statistical analysis, including: Α) the statistical analysis of cases where it has been necessary to correct or estimate measurements, such as, for example, the distribution of events per Network Meter category, geographical region, Network Meter representative, etc; Β) a description of the reasons which necessitated the correction or estimation of measurements, and C) any other information which may be required for transparency purposes.
Article 18-7 Measurements and measurement data records and provision of information 1. The Network Operator keeps a full electronic record of measurements and Measurement Data, which includes the following information for each Network meter: Α) measurements, Β) Measurement Data, flagged in case these have been determined following correction or estimation under Article 18-6. C) file containing the data and the methods employed for the correction or estimation of the measurements per case applicable.
86 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
2. The information contained in such file shall be kept by the Network Operator for a duration of at least five (5) years from their date of entry. 3. Users reserve the right to access the primary measurements and the Measurement Data that concern them directly, as well as to other measurement information, provided they have a legal interest in them. 4. The Network Operator must, besides the information established under the Network Code, provide Suppliers with the data the Network Operator employs for the implementation of the provisions of this Part, upon their request in compliance with the provisions of Article 2-2. The Network Operator must especially provide Suppliers with the following information: (a) full historical data on Customer energy consumption, upon a Supplier’s application to which the respective Customer authorization shall be attached; (b) the primary data and Measurement Data for the meters of Customers they represent, on a periodic basis for Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters and immediately following their collection or determination for Non-Hourly Load Meters. 5. The Network Operator and the System Operator must establish and abide by a procedure for the exchange of all necessary data and information regarding the implementation of the provisions of the present Part. The relevant procedure shall be notified to RAE.
CHAPTER 19 METER REPRESENTATION
Article 19-1 Dominant and alternative suppliers 1. A Supply authorization holder supplying over seventy percent (70%) of the total energy annually absorbed by Customers shall hereinafter and exclusively for the application of the provisions of the present Part be referred to as “Dominant Supplier. All other Suppliers shall be referred to as “Alternative Suppliers”. 2. The Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations shall be set by RAE’s decree, following the proposals by the Network Operator, in such a way as to correspond either to the time when there is no Dominant Suppliers, or to the time when the Network Operator can demonstratively adhere to all detailed procedures established in the present Part in an uniform for all Suppliers manner. The Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations may be different with respect to the Interconnected Network and the Non- Interconnected Islands Network where there are Eligible Customers procuring energy from Alternative Suppliers. The necessary details for the implementation of the present Part in respect of the measurements of Metering Periods which include the Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations shall be set by RAE’s decree following the suggestions of the Network Operator. 3. After the Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations all Suppliers shall be treated in the procedures established in the present Part as Alternative Suppliers.
87 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
Article 19-2 Meter representation – General Provisions 1. Each Load Meter shall be represented by Suppliers who supply energy to the corresponding Customer under Article 19-4. MV Customers with an Hourly MV Load Meter may procure energy from more than one Suppliers simultaneously, in which case every Supplier supplies a given constant percentage of the Customer’s energy. All other Customers may not procure energy from more than one Suppliers simultaneously. For the implementation of the provisions of the present PART it is understood that each Customer shall be represented by those Suppliers representing such Customer’s Meter. 2. Each Generation Meter shall be represented by the corresponding Producer. 3. Load Meters for Non-Eligible Customers as well as the Load Meters of Eligible Customers for whom a Load Meter Representation Declaration has never been submitted, in compliance with Article 19-3, shall be represented by the Dominant Supplier. 4. The Network Operator shall prepare and update a special table (henceforth referred to as “Matrix on Correspondence between Load Meters and Alternative Suppliers”), where for each Customer’s Load Meter, procuring energy from Alternative Suppliers, the representatives for such meter and the percentages of representation by each Supplier shall be recorded. 5. Supply authorization holders who in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code, represent Load Meters of Eligible Customers connected to the Interconnected Network, shall act for such Customers as their Load Representatives under the provisions of SO&PE Code.
Article 19-3 Load meter representation declaration 1. Suppliers shall submit to the Network Operator Customer Load Meter Representation Declarations in the following cases: Α) at every occasion a Customer switches Suppliers, Β) every time the information for the Load Meter of a given Customer changes, C) each time there is a change of the Customer, whose energy consumption is measured by a given Load Meter, D) each time there is a change in the representation percentages of a Hourly MV Load Meter. 2. By submitting a Load Meter Representation Declaration the Supplier solemnly declares that the a Customer is an Eligible Customer. Each Load Meter Representation Declaration must be undersigned by the corresponding Customer. 3. The Network Operator shall issue an Implementation Instruction, under Article 1-3, by which all necessary details for the orderly operation for the procedure of Load Meter change of representation shall be established, also providing all necessary information to interested parties. 4. In cases of the submission of a Load Meter Representation Declaration by which a change in the representation of a Customer is effected, the Network Operator
88 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
shall immediately inform the existing Suppliers of the Customer for such change and the anticipated time the change shall enter into force in compliance with Article 19-4. For Hourly MV Load Meters, the existing Suppliers of the corresponding Customer must themselves submit a Load Meter Representation Declaration immediately, so that at the time the change of representation enters into force, the sum of the representation percentages for the given Customer to be 100%. 5. It is explicitly clarified that Suppliers must abide by the provisions of their authorizations, the relevant regulation and the Customer Supply Code, for the submission of the declaration on the termination of the representation of a Customer’s Load Meter. 6. In case where a Load Meter is not represented by at least one Supplier, the Network Operator must contact the Customer, to which the Meter corresponds, immediately and inform the Customer in accordance with the records the Network Operator keeps. In case of voluntary supply interruption or if the Customer does not appoint a Supplier as representative, the Network Operator shall attend to the interruption of the operation of the connection in compliance with Article 12-2. 7. In case where the total percentage of representation for an Hourly MV Load Meter is not equal to 100%, the Network Operator must immediately contact the Customer to which such meter corresponds and correspond such Hourly MV Load Meter with a Supplier or Suppliers depending on the respective declaration of the Customer and the way of representation the latter designates.
Article 19-4 Content and entry into force of network load representation declarations 1. Every Load Meter Representation Declaration or declaration for the termination of Load Meter representation shall include: Α) the Load Meter code, Β) information regarding the Customer corresponding to the Load Meter, C) the date at which it is desirable for the Load Meter Representation Declaration to enter into force, which, for Load Meter Representation Declarations may not come sooner than thirty (30) days following the submission date for the Declaration, D) with respect to Hourly MV Load Meters, the representation percentage for the load of the meter. This percentage shall assume a single and fixed numerical value throughout the whole of the term of validity of the declaration. 2. The type of Load Meter Representation Declarations and declarations for the termination of Load Meter representations shall be approved by RAE, following the proposal made by the Network Operator. 3. The Network Operator shall determine the date of entry into force of each declaration under the present Article, which date must be within five (5) days from the date established by the declarations as the desirable one for its entry into force and inform to that respect the involved Suppliers and the Customer.
89 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
4. The Network Operator shall see to the collection of measurements from Load Meters, at a time as close as possible to the date that the declaration submitted under this Article comes into force, issuing suitable orders and instructions to the Network Owner, if required, and informing to that respect all interested Suppliers. 5. The Network Operator shall update the Matrix on Correspondence between Load Meters and Alternative Suppliers with the content of each valid declaration submitted under the present Article.
CHAPTER 20 NETWORK LOAD REPRESENTATION CALCULATIONS
Article 20-1 Network load representation calculations – General Provisions 1. The procedure laid down in this Chapter shall apply discretely to the Interconnected Network and to every set of interconnected between them Non- Interconnected Islands where there are Eligible Customers who procure energy from Alternative Suppliers, while it shall not be applicable for the remaining Non-Interconnected Islands. 2. The representation percentages for the load of the Interconnected Network by Suppliers, established in compliance with the provisions of the present Chapter, shall be the same for the whole of the Interconnected Network. Furthermore, they correspond to the representation percentages of Distribution Network Boundaries Meters by Load Representatives in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 30 of the SO&PE Code, and are employed for the implementation of the relevant provisions of the SO&PE Code. Correspondingly the established under the provisions of the present Chapter, representation percentages of Suppliers of the load for each set of electrically interconnected between them Non-Interconnected Islands shall be the same for each such set of islands.
Article 20-2 Procedure for the ex ante estimation of representation percentages of Network load 1. The Network Operator shall establish the ex ante estimated representation percentages of Network load by Suppliers. These percentages shall apply to the immediately following month, assume a single value per Supplier for all hours of such month, refer to the total energy injected into the Interconnected Network or the Network of the corresponding set of Non-Interconnected Islands, and are established under APPENDIX V, Article AP.V-1. 2. The Network Operator shall estimate ex ante the total consumption of electricity for Customers for the immediately following month, until the tenth (10) day prior to its beginning. 3. The Network Operator shall notify to the Suppliers the ex ante estimated percentages of representation of the Network load for the immediately following
90 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
month, as well as the estimated total electricity consumption for Customers, by the tenth (10) day prior to the beginning of such month. The Network Operator shall notify to each Supplier its respective Network load representation percentages. 4. Suppliers may lodge a justified objection against the aforementioned, notified to them information within four (4) days from the receipt of such information. In case where objections have been lodged the Network Operator must proceed with the relevant calculations anew and notify the final results to the Suppliers within four (4) days from the date of receipt of the objection, documenting its actions. 5. The Network Operator shall notify to the System Operator for the immediately following month the ex ante estimated representation percentages of Network load, as well as the estimated total electricity consumption by the Customers, by the second (2nd) day prior to the beginning of such month.
Article 20-3 Procedure for the ex post calculation of the energy attributed to Suppliers 1. Immediately after the collection of measurements from a Non-Hourly Load Meter, the Network Operator shall calculate the energy consumption of the corresponding Customer for each month which has ended within the last Metering Period for the meter, in compliance with APPENDIX V, Article AP.V- 8. 2. Each month, immediately after the collection of the relevant measurements for all Non-Hourly Load Meters and the calculation of the monthly energy consumption of the respective Customers, in compliance with paragraph (1), for said month, that is after the collection of the measurements for all Non-Hourly Load Meters which include all the days of such month, the Network Operator shall calculate the energy ex post attributed to each Supplier for each hour of such month, by sequentially applying the provisions of the following Articles: Α) APPENDIX V, Article AP. V-2, for calculating the amount of energy attributed to each Supplier which corresponds to its Customers with an Hourly LV Load Meter or an Hourly MV Load Meter, for each hour of such month. Β) APPENDIX V, Article AP. V-3, for calculating the amount of energy attributed to each Supplier which corresponds to its Customers with a Zone Load Meter, for each hour of such month. C) APPENDIX V, Article AP. V-4, for calculating the amount of energy attributed to each Alternative Supplier which corresponds to its Customers with a Simple Load Meter, for each hour of such month. D) APPENDIX V, Article AP. V-5, for calculating the total amount of energy attributed to each Supplier which corresponds to its Customers, for each hour of such month. 3. The ex post total amount of energy attributed to each Supplier concerns the energy supplied to Customers the installations of which are connected to the Network, to the extend it represented them, taking also account of Network losses.
91 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
4. The Network Operator shall notify to each Supplier the energy ex post attributed to it, per hour of the month, as a total and separately for the amounts that concern each Load Meter category, immediately after the calculation of such figures. 5. The Network Operator shall notify to each Supplier by the tenth (10th) day after the end of each month, the following information: Α) the electricity consumption corresponding to the total of all Hourly MV Load Meters, including the respective Network losses, per hour of the month, as this is calculated in compliance with APPENDIX V, Article AP.V-11. Β) the electricity consumption corresponding to the total of all Hourly LV Load Meters, including the respective Network losses, per hour of the month, as this is calculated in compliance with APPENDIX V, Article AP.V-11. C) the total electricity consumption which corresponds to the sum of Non-Hourly Load Meters of the Network, including the respective Network losses, as this is calculated in compliance with APPENDIX V, Article AP.V-12. 6. Suppliers may lodge a justified objection on the information of paragraphs (4) and (5) within five (5) days of their notification to them. Where objections have been lodged, the Network Operator must proceed with the relevant calculations anew and notify the final results to the Suppliers within five (5) days from the date of receipt of the objection, providing documentation for its actions.
CHAPTER 21 PERIODIC MEASUREMENT SETTLEMENT
Article 21-1 Calculation of charges and credits to Suppliers for each month 1. Immediately following the calculation of the total amount of energy attributed to each Supplier corresponding to its Customers, for each hour of one month (m), in compliance with Article 20-3 paragraph (2), the Network Operator shall calculated for each Supplier (j) the difference between the ex ante and the ex post attributed amount of energy corresponding to the Customers of such Supplier, for all hours of such month, in compliance with APPENDIX V, Article AP.V-6. 2. Then the Network Operator shall calculate the corresponding charge or credit m amount for each Supplier (j) and for month (m), ΜΠΧΠ_ Πρ j , as follows:
mkmkm∈∈ ΜΠΧΠ__ Πρρjj =∑ () ∆ΚΕ Π ×ΟΤΣ ∀∈km where:
km∈ ∆ΚΕ_ Πρ j the difference between the ex ante and the ex post attributed amounts of energy corresponding to Customers of this Supplier (j), for hour (k) in month (m), calculated in compliance with APPENDIX V, Article AP.V-6, ΟΤΣkm∈ for the Interconnected Network is the System Marginal Price for hour (k) in month (m), which during the Transition Period under the SO&PE
92 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
Code is taken as equal to the ex ante calculated Marginal System Price. For the Non-Interconnected Islands Network the Marginal System Price, in accordance with the provisions of the Non-Interconnected Islands Operation Code. ∑ the sum for all hours of the month (m). ∀∈km
m 3. A positive value for the attributed sum ΜΠΧΠ_ Πρ j which corresponds to Supplier (j), for month (m), shall regard an income for the Supplier for such m month. A negative value of the sum ΜΠΧΠ_ Πρ j which corresponds to Supplier (j), for month (m), shall mean a payment made by the Supplier for such month.
Article 21-2 Periodic measurement settlement 1. The periodic settlement of the payments made and the amounts collected by Suppliers for differences between the ex ante and ex post amounts of energy attributed to each Supplier, shall be carried out every six months and concern the months not included in the periodic settlement of the previous six-month period, and for those that the corresponding measurements from all Non-Hourly Load Meters have been collected and include all days of each month. 2. The periodic settlement of payments and charges to Suppliers shall include the following stages: Α) Until the fifth (5th) working day after the end of each calendar six-month period, the Network Operator shall enter such amounts separately for each Suppliers in an Initial Settlement Record, which shall be notified to the Suppliers for the part that concerns each of them. Β) Until the eighth (8th) working day after the end of each calendar six-month period, the Suppliers reserve the right to lodge documented objections to the Network Operator. C) Until the twelfth (12th) working day after the end of each calendar six-month period, the Network Operator shall rule on possible objections, finalize the sums to be paid or collected for each Supplier and record these sums separately for each Supplier in the Final Settlement Record, which shall be notified to the Suppliers for the part that concerns each of them. 3. The Suppliers who in accordance with the Final Settlement Record have a debit balance must, within three (3) working days from the receipt of such Record, settle such balance with the Network Operator. The Network Operator shall issue a corresponding document. 4. Suppliers who in accordance with the Final Settlement Record have a credit balance must on the fourth (4th) day from receiving this Record be credited by the Network Operator with the respective sum, by supplying the relevant document. 5. The Initial Settlement Record and the Final Settlement Record shall include the following information:
93 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
Α) The total sum owed by each Supplier (payment) separately for each month. Β) The total sum owed to each Supplier (amounts collected) separately for each month. C) Information employed for the calculation of the settlement amounts. 6. Monthly payments and collections referring to the Settlement Records and regarding the same Supplier shall be offset. 7. Notification of the Final Settlement Record shall render the payments and collections overdue. Payments and collections shall be effected within the deadline provided for and under the terms and provisions of the present, independently of objections or subjection to judicial or out of court settlement of disputes. 8. In settling the corresponding amounts due, each Supplier must take all necessary measures for the relevant transactions to be performed in a timely manner. 9. If, after the deadline established in paragraph (3) expires, a Supplier has not paid the sum determined in the Final Settlement Record, this shall constitute failure of payment for the Supplier in respect of the relevant sums. The total sums corresponding to failure of payment on behalf of Suppliers, shall constitute a Transaction Deficit for the respective six-month period. 10. In case of failure of payment, the Network Operator shall make all endeavors to inform the Customers represented by such Supplier, shall post a relevant notice on its website and shall take all legal actions against the Supplier in order to recover all periodic settlements due under the present Article. 11. Furthermore, in case of failure of payment, the Network Operator shall inform RAE to this respect, in order to consider the imposition of sanctions, in compliance with Article 33 of Law 2773/1999, as well as the revocation of such Supplier’s authorization. 12. Any failure of payment shall not suspend or hinder the course of the periodic settlement procedure and the performance of the relevant transactions. The Network Operator may suspend the payment of credits to Suppliers during the periodic settlement, exclusively in cases where there is a Transaction Deficit and pro rata the credit due to each Supplier. The Network Operator must pay such owed credits to Suppliers immediately after the respective Transaction Deficit has been covered in part or in full, pro rate such amounts due. 13. The Network Operator may apply the process established under the present Article anew, in cases where, following the completion of the periodic settlement procedure with respect to a given time period, corroborates a fault in a Network Meter. Following the finalization of Metering Data the Network Operator may apply anew the procedure laid down in the present Article in cases where following the completion of the periodic settlement procedure regarding a given time period, a fault is verified in a Network Meter. Following the finalization of Measurement Data for such meter, the Network Operator shall calculate anew the charges and credits for Suppliers corresponding to the time period for which Measurement Data was determined anew, and calculate the additional charges and credits corresponding to each Supplier. For the notification and settlement of the additional charges and credits, a procedure equivalent to the one established
94 Part VΙ: Meters, Measurement Management and Periodic Measurement Settlement
in the present Article for the charges and credits in respect of the six-month periodic settlement shall be employed.
95
Part VΙΙ: Network development
PART VII NETWORK DEVELOPMENT
CHAPTER 22 NETWORK DEVELOPMENT
Article 22-1 Scope of application 1. Network development includes works for the installations of new lines or other Network equipment, works for the reinforcement of the existing Network equipment or for altering its characteristics, as well as measures for the improvement of the Quality of Service provided to Customers and the implementation of new technologies for the surveillance and operation control of the Network. 2. Network development may be due to the following reasons: Α) growth in demand for electricity, Β) connection of new Users to the Network or need for the amendment of existing User connections, C) improvement of the quality and safety of the operation of the Network, D) changes to the load or generation characteristics, technology, reliability or environmental requirements, Ε) feasibility of interconnected the Non-Interconnected Islands Network with the Interconnected Network or with the System or between islands, or an increase of the stability limit for the Non-Interconnected Islands Network, F) reduction of the overall long-term cost of the Network, G) improvement of Users’ Quality of Service.
Article 22-2 Regulatory framework for Network development 1. The Regulatory Framework for Network Development refers to a Distribution Regulatory Period and establishes all key axes for the development of the Network during such period. It is approved by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree, which refers to such a Distribution Regulatory Period. 2. The Regulatory Framework for Network Development establishes in particular the following specifics: Α) Description of all important works or measures for the reinforcement, development or alteration of the key characteristics of Network equipment and, in particular, of the following: i) change of the Nominal Voltage of parts of the Network;
97 Part VΙΙ: Network development
ii) principles for the survey and installation of Network voltage control equipment and or to compensate for reactive power; iii) installation of new HV/MV S/Ss, in accordance with the provisions of the 5YS [Five year statement for the development of the transmission system, according to Chapter 51 of the SO&PE Code]; iv) undergrounding parts of the Network, or other changes in its design, in order to reduce adverse environmental impact; v) interconnection of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network with the Interconnected Network or the System; vi) amendment of the specifications for Network Meters, and installation of telemetering systems; vii) development of demand management measures; viii) principles for the surveying and installation of equipment for the improvement of the reconfiguration capabilities of the Network. Β) The setup of new Network Control Centers and changes to the area of responsibility of each Center. C) Actions for the improvement of the monitoring and control of the operation of the Network per Network Control Center, and in particular the activities relating to the installations and operation of related digital systems in such Centers, such as SCADA systems, digital supervision and distribution management networks (DMS) and geographical information systems (GIS). D) Concise description of the anticipated small-scale works for expansion, improvement and maintenance, etc, which are provided especially for the connection of new Users and the serving of existing ones. Ε) Setup of new User service premises, extension of the computerization of relevant procedures, installation of telephone service centers and other measures for the improvement of the Quality of Service extended to Users. F) Establishment of new or amendment of existing survey and implementation standards for Network development works. G) A binding detailed time schedule and budgeted cost for each Network development measure included in the Regulatory Framework for Network Development in compliance with the aforementioned. Η) Information on the programs for the aesthetic improvement of the Network in compliance with Article 22-6. 3. The time required for the design and the implementation of Network development depends on the type and scope of the necessary works, the time required to obtain the requisite permits, and the complexity of the new works, combined with the care that must be exhibited to maintain satisfactory safety and quality levels at the existing Network. 4. The Regulatory Framework for Network Development includes planning of all Network development measures, inclusive of those which were not completed during the previous Distribution Regulatory Period and those whose implementation must commence within the time frame of the Framework, independently of their time of completion.
98 Part VΙΙ: Network development
5. The Network Operator shall, when preparing its proposals on the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, take account in particular of the following: Α) the Network load and the generation capacity related to it, as well as their anticipated growth in terms of the total size and land-planning distribution, in compliance with Article 22-4, Β) the need to provide immediate access to the Network for new Users, C) the current Network Development Plan, prepared in compliance with Article 22-3, D) the current level of User’s Quality of Service and the goals set for the Distribution Regulatory Period under consideration, Ε) the views of the Network Owner, the Code Supervision and Consulting Committee, in compliance with Article 1-2, as well as relevant User views which may have been submitted. 6. The System Operator, the Network Owner and Users must provide the Network Operator with the information required for the preparation of its proposals regarding the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, in accordance with the instructions issued by the Network Operator. 7. The Network Owner shall take all necessary measures for the implementation of the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, shall ensure its implementation and the observance of the time-schedules set therein. 8. The Network Operator shall monitor the course of the implementation of Network development works, in the context of the Regulatory Framework for Network Development and shall compose relevant biannual reports which are notified to RAE and the Minister of Development.
Article 22-3 Network development plan 1. The Network Owner shall prepare by the end of October of each year a rolling Network Development Plan which shall refer to the following three calendar years. This Plan will be notified to the Network Operator and to RAE and will be posted on the Network Operator’s website. 2. The Network Development Plan shall be prepared based on the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, and details all the required actions for the implementation of the measures established in the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, according to the Plan’s time-schedule. 3. The Network Development Plant shall be prepared in such a way as to ensure the safe, reliable and efficient operation and development of the Network and the realization of the approved objectives for User’s Quality of Service. 4. The Network Development Plan shall include a time-schedule for the implementation of each measure in the Regulatory Framework for Network Development, by which the anticipated time for the completion of each implementation state for the works is set, in particular with reference to the completion of technical surveys, the submission of the folder for approvals relating to environmental issues, the completion of possible required
99 Part VΙΙ: Network development
expropriation procedures or the creation of rights in rem, the commencement of construction, the completion of construction and tests and commissioning. The works shall be categorized based on their geographical region and all effords shall be expended for their joint time-scheduling, and thus to attain synchronization and the timely achievement of the objectives set in the Regulatory Framework for Network Development. 5. The Network Operator shall post in its website, information on the planned major works for Network development, which may have considerable impact on the natural or man-made environment and particularly information regarding the layout of new overhead lines and S/Ss, as well as their general construction characteristics, in order for interested parties to take note of the subject and assess the impact of such works, in the context of the exercise of their rights under Article 1-5.
Article 22-4 Load and generation forecasts 1. The Interconnected Network Operator shall systematically prepare long-term forecasts with respect to the growth of load and the generation injected to the Network, which regard the amount and spatial distribution thereof. To that end, the Operator shall take account of particularly the following: Α) information provided by Users in compliance with CHAPTER 9, Β) issued generation authorizations and the assessment regarding the implementation of the related works, which shall be carried out by RAE, C) potential incentives granted to Users for the installation of generation units connected to the Network and RAE’s assessment of Users’ response to such incentives, D) statistical data relating to the operation of the Network, Ε) general development indexes per sector of activity, as specified in the forecast methodologies employed, in compliance with Article 22-5. 2. Statistics for load and genetarion forecasts for the Interconnected Network with a five-year scope shall be publicized by the Network Operator until the end of September for each year, pending on RAE’s approval. 3. The load and generation forecast for the Non-Interconnected Islands Network shall be elaborated by the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator, in compliance with the provisions of the Non-Interconnected Islands Operation Code.
Article 22-5 Network design instructions 1. The Network Operator shall prepare specialized Code Implementation Instructions, in compliance with Article 1-3, inclusive of all necessary principles and specification for the design of Network development works. More specifically, the following are in particular included in these Instructions on Network design: Α) standardization of typical construction and basic specifications for the materials and Network equipment used,
100 Part VΙΙ: Network development
Β) details on the elaboration of forecasts regarding the load and generation injected into the Nework, short and long term, based on reliable and generally accepted scientific methodologies, which may be differentiated with respect to the time frame of the forecasts, C) principles for the design of the Network’s structure and protection, as well as the methodologies for the evaluation of alternative solutions, D) standard costs (for investments, losses, service level, etc) which shall be taken into account for Network surveys, and information of the life-spand and the way for reducing and comparing money flows, Ε) detailed rules on the selection of the routing and the type for new lines, F) details on Network works’ planning, G) rules regarding the construction and acceptance of Network works. 2. The aforementioned Implementation Instructions on Network design establish rules for selecting the metering points for Network Voltage Disturbances and the determination of the limits that must be adhered in such, or other points of the Network, in order to ensure the observance of the Quality of Service limits for Users, in compliance with the provisions of PART III.
Article 22-6 Programs for works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network 1. Network Users as well as other interested parties, such as, in particular, the municipalities and communities in the country, may submit to the Network Operator documented applications for works on the aesthetic improvement of particular parts of the Network. 2. Regarding the works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network, the Regulatory Framework for Network Development establishes the following for the corresponding Regulatory Distribution Period: Α) the distinct programs in the context of which applications for works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network may be submitted, including in particular the following: • programs for the aesthetic improvement of the Network in aesthetically laden by overhead network urban center regions, and • programs for the aesthetic improvement of the Network in settlements characterised as traditional, or of special cultural or touristic significance. Β) the contribution percentage for the Network Owner in the construction cost of the works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network, which is fixed for each distinct aesthetic improvement program, for the whole duration of a Regulatory Distribution Period. C) The upper limit of the total cost which may ensue for the Network Owner, from its participation in every distinct program on the aesthetic improvement of the Network, per year of the Regulatory Distribution Period. 3. The aesthetic improvement works for the Network shall be approved by the Network Operator, based on the provisions of the Evaluation Regulation, established under paragraph (4). The applicant for works on the aesthetic
101 Part VΙΙ: Network development
improvement of the Network which are approved, shall assume the cost of their construction besides the Network Owner’s contribution to it, following the conclusion of a special contract with the Network Operator, where the following shall, in particular, be determined. Α) a detailed description of the works, Β) the total cost of the construction of the works and a detailed documentation thereof, as well as the amount of the total cost to be covered by the applicant, C) a detailed time-schedule for the construction of the works and the payment of the corresponding charges by the applicant, D) every other special obligation agreed between the two parties, and, in particular, the issues regarding the concession of spaces to the Network Owner and issues relating to the respective works which must be performed by the applicant or a third party. 4. The Minister of Development shall approve, following the proposals of the Network Operator and RAE’s assent, the Evaluation Regulation on the applications for works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network, on which the processing of the application and the planning of the respective works shall be based. 5. Proceeds from charges made due to works executed under the present Article shall be paid to the Network Owner
CHAPTER 23 RESEARCH AND TECHNOLOGY PROGRAMS
Article 23-1 Research and technology programs – General provisions 1. Funded Programs for Research and Technology (FPRT) introduce a mechanism for the provision of incentives to the Network Operator, in order for it to invest in the growth of knowledge relating to technological issues in the design, operation and maintenance of the Network. The principal objective of FPRTs is the long-term increase of the efficiency of operational expenses and capital expenditures of the Network. 2. FPRTs may be used for research and technology activities regarding technological advancements in the fields of the Network’s design, development and operation. Specifically, technological advancements may regard all stages of fixed assets management, such as the construction, testing and acceptance of works and equipment, their operation, maintenance, setting out of service and removal. 3. Inclusion of programs to the FPRT may be done under the following conditions: Α) so long as technological innovation in the Network is promoted by such programs, both where this regards the implementation of internationally new technologies, or with regard to technologies which have been implemented in other countries but have not been adjusted to local conditions.
102 Part VΙΙ: Network development
Β) provided that it has been estimated that the results of such programs will secure benefits, which may be economical, environmental, or regarding the safety, supply, Power Quality, Service Quality, etc. 4. FPRTs pursue principally the development of collaborations by the Network Operator on research and technology issues, as well as the purchase of specialized services and know-how by third parties, and, secondarily, the internal growth of research and technology by the Network Operator.
Article 23-2 Research and technology programs - Financing 1. The amount of financing for approved FPRTs shall be established as follows: Α) for works executed in the course of the first year of the Regulatory Distribution Period, 90% of the real expenditures, Β) for works executed in to course of the following years of the Regulatory Distribution Period, a percentage of the real expenditures reduced by 5% for each year, that is 85% of expenditures for the 2nd year of the Regulatory Distribution Period, 80% for the 3rd and so on. 2. FPRT financing shall be credited to the Network Owner, who is encumbered with the total FPRT expenditures. The management of such programs and the acceptance of their results shall be performed by the Network Operator. 3. FPRT financing is done based on the actual expenditures for each work and the time these occurred, and not based on their budget. The duration of each FPRT cannot exceed one (1) year. 4. The total sum of FPRT financing for each year cannot exceed the sum corresponding to expenditures by the Network Operator for FPRT up to 5‰ (five per mille) of the sum of the corresponding Annual Consideration for the Network Owner. RAE may approve, following the documented proposal of the Network Operator, the transfer of part of the potential difference between: (a) the aforementioned limit for FPRT expenditures for year (n); and (b) the FPRT expenditures that were actualized by the Network Operator for such year (n), only to the immediately following year (n+1) and only up to 40% of the FPRT expenditures limit for year (n). It is explicitly clarified that such transfer shall not affect the financing percentage for FPRT expenditures realized every year, as established in paragraph (1). 5. The amount of financing for each FPRT program may not exceed, for any given year, 15% of the Network Operator’s total expenditures for FPRT programs. As an exception and following RAE’s approval this sum may be increased up to 20%. 6. The Network Operator shall keep a special secondary account for FPRTs.
Article 23-3 Research and technology programs – Approval and reports 1. The incorporation of each distinct research and technology program to the FPRTs shall be effected by RAE’s decision, following the proposals by the Network Operator, which must include an expenditure budget.
103 Part VΙΙ: Network development
2. In order for each distinct program to be incorporated to the FPRT, the Network Operator must document in its aforementioned proposals that the emerging long- term economic benefits from the implementation of new technologies surpass the cost for their development and integration. Having said this, it is admissible that for some candidate for inclusion programs no valid quantitative estimation may be made of their benefits, such as, in particular, those results regarding environmental benefits or in safety matters. For such categories of emerging results and for the corresponding candidate for inclusion programs, the documentation for the advisability of the program may be qualitative. It is also admissible that, given the fact that this regards programs for technological progress and innovation, the original estimation of the emerging long-term economic benefit ensuing from the implementation of new technologies, prior to its systematic inspection in the context of the FPRTs (besides, the key results shall be apparent at the conclusion of each FPRT), shall be affected by concessions. 3. Criteria for the approval be RAE of the inclusion of programs to FPRTs shall, in particular, be the following: Α) Degree of innovation with respect to Network equipment, systems and working methods, in particular for the attainment of increased performance, cost reduction, improvement of performance in environmental and safety issues, increase in the quality of the Network and the provided services. Β) Progress-Evolution in the design of Network equipment and or devices. C) Promotion of dispersed generation. D) Implementation of mechanisms promoting energy savings. 4. The Network Operator’s proposal on the inclusion of programs to the FPRTs shall be submitted for each year’s programs by the end of September of the previous year. 5. The Network Operator shall notify RAE a detailed report of the technological conclusions drawn from each FPRT, as well as of the results anticipated to ensue from the implementation of the technologies examined, within a six-month deadline after the completion of the program. 6. The Network Operator shall publicize by the end of November each year, a list of the approved FPRTs for the coming year. The Network Operator shall publicize until the end of April each year, a concise report on the progress of the FPRTs of the previous year.
104 Part VIII: Network connection charges
PART VIII NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES
CHAPTER 24 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES TO CUSTOMERS
Article 24-1 Charges for the connection of Customer installations to the Network – General Provisions 1. Customers shall participate in the expenses for connecting their installations to the Network, by paying the Connection Charges established in compliance with the present Part of the Network Code. 2. Exceptionally, the Network Connection Charges for Customer installations inside industrial sites (under Law 2545/1997) and Agricultural Customers subsumed to rural electrification programs, in compliance with the joint Decree by the Ministers of Agriculture and Industry, Energy and Technology under number F482.1/142196/10-11-1987 (Gov. Gaz. Β΄ 738/1987), shall be established in a special manner by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. 3. The amount of the charge for LV Customers and MV Customers for the connection of their installations to the Network shall be established based on the Participation System under Article 24-2.
Article 24-2 Participation System 1. The Participation System consists of a methodology for the determination of Customer charges for the connection of their installations to the Network and is governed by the following basic principles: Α) The amount corresponding to the charge made to each Customer for the connection of its installations to the Network, save for the special cases established in the Network Code, shall be determined based on the methodology that takes into account the power of the connection for which the Customer applies and the distance of the property from the existing in operation Network installations. It is not necessarily equal to the actual cost of the installations built for the supply of electricity to the Customer. The aforementioned methodology has the following specific objectives: i) The objective determination of the charges made to Customers, by employing purely objective information for their calculation, such as, for example, the power of the connection and the distance of the property from the installations of the Network.
105 Part VIII: Network connection charges
ii) The sound construction and development of the installations of the Network, based on the rules of art and science and independently from the amount of the financial participation of each Customer. iii) The simplification of the procedure for the determination of Customer Connection Charges and the limitation of bureaucratic formalities. The calculation of the charges made to each Customer for the connection of its installations to the Network is, in most cases, simple, in order for the immediate briefing of the Customer on the estimated amount of such charges to be possible. Β) For the determination of Customer Connection Charges based on the Participation System, only the Network installations in operation shall be taken into account, in compliance with the provisions specifically of APPENDIX IV, Article AP.IV-5. Network installations foreseen to be constructed, or under construction, or already constructed but not in operation, or S/S areas not yet operating shall not be taken into account, even if such installations are built for the supply of electricity to some other User who has already paid the Connection Charges. C) Charges made to Customers for connection to the Network may differ with respect to the type of Network installations instated at a particular region of the country. For this reason, the Participation System includes parameters which depend on the geographical region of the Customer’s installations. 2. The specific terms and provisions of the Participation System shall be established in APPENDIX IV. 3. The Customer’s Participation in the cost of the connection of its installations to the Network is defined as the sum of Connection Charges made to the Customer for the realization of the aforementioned connection.
Article 24-3 Charges for the connection of Customer installations to the Network – Special Cases 1. For connection to the LV Network or the MV Network of Customer’s installations exhibiting extraordinary peculiarities, Customer charges shall be calculated in such a manner as to cover the total cost of the special works required for the connection of such Customer’s installations. The Customer’s installations shall be considered as exhibiting extraordinary peculiarities when they present obvious-evident particularities with respect to usual cases, such as in the case of ski resorts, lighthouses etc. The inclusion of Customer’ installations to this category shall be approved by the Network Operator. A corresponding manner is applied to those cases of Customer’s installations which exhibit extraordinary local conditions, such as in the case of limitations due to reasons relating to archeological findings or the protection of flights, etc. 2. For connection to the LV Network or the MV Network of Customer’s installations which are located in inaccessible area, an additional charge to the Customer has been foreseen, in order to cover fully the cost of the connection works performed in such area. The Customer’s installations shall be considered as being in an inaccessible area (e.g. lighthouses, transmitters etc) when the lines required for their connection treat an area inaccessible to the usual means of
106 Part VIII: Network connection charges
transportation, not due to the selection of such routing, but because no easier access exists. The inclusion of Customers’ installations to this category shall be approved by the Network Operator. 3. In case where a Customer requests the amendment of a Network Connection Offer, for own reasons, such as, for example, because it wishes to connect with underground lines, instead of overhead ones, an additional charge to the Customer is foreseen, in order to cover the additional cost of connection works compared to the connection which would have been build in accordance with the initial Connection Offer. 4. Implementation details for the present Article shall be established in APPENDIX IV.
CHAPTER 25 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES TO PRODUCERS
Article 25-1 Charges for the connection of Producer’s installations to the Network 1. Connection Charges made to Producers for the connection of their installations to the Network shall be determined based on the actual reinforcement works for the Network which are required for the connection and the unit charges for connection to the Network established under Article 26-1. 2. The amount of the charge made to each Producer for connection of their installations to the Network shall be calculated as the sum of the following factors:
ΣΠπα : charge for the cost of the final connection, which regards the equipment at the Network/User Connection Point and the Generation Meter. It is calculated based on unit charges for connecting to the Network established in Article 26- 1.
ΣΕΠπα : charge for the cost of extending the existing Network, which regards Network extension works necessary for the connection of the installations of such Producer. It is calculated based on the unit charges for connecting to the Network established in Article 26-1.
ΣΕΝπα : charge for the cost of the reinforcement of the Network, which regards reinforcement works on the Network, necessary for the connection of such Producer’s installations. It is calculated based on the real reinforcement works on the Network for such connection and the unit charges for connecting to the Network, established under Article 26-1, and also the degree of usage of such reinforcement works by such Producer’s installations. This degree of usage shall be determined by the ratio of the power of the Producer’s installations, which may not be accommodated without the reinforcement of the Network, to the increase of the Network capacity attained at the connection point with the reinforcement works. 3. Especially those generation authorization holders who are entitled, under Article 13-9, to build themselves the works for the connection of their installations to the
107 Part VIII: Network connection charges
Network or the System, shall not pay the cost determined in the present Article and corresponding to the construction of the works such generation authorization holders build themselves.
CHAPTER 26 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES – GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 26-1 Approval of Network connection charges’ parameters 1. The numerical values of unit charges and the other Network Connection Charges calculation factors shall be established by a decree issued by the Minister of Development, following the proposals by the Network Operator and RAE’s assent. 2. The numerical values of unit charges and the other factors involved in the calculation of the Connection Charges for the connection of Customer’s installations to the Network, shall be readjusted at the beginning of each year, in compliance with paragraph (1), exclusively where the total annual income of secondary account Λ∆ιΣΠε (under Article 26-3) for the previous year is less than 67% or greater than 73% of the total expenses for the same account and year. 3. The numerical values of unit charges and the other factors involved in the calculation of the Network Connection Charges for Producer’s installations, under Article 25-1, and of Customers in the special cases in accordance with Article 24-3 and Article 6-2 shall be readjusted in compliance with paragraph (1) at most once per annum, in order to reflect the reasonable actual cost of such works. 4. Network Charges may be paid in installments. Respective regulations are established in the decree by the Minister of Development issued under paragraph (1).
Article 26-2 Network connection charges manual All necessary details for the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code in accordance with this Section, shall be established by the Network Connection Charges Manual, laid down under Article 1-3.
Article 26-3 Accounts keeping 1. The Network Operator shall keep a special account for the expenses and income from the connection of User’s installations to the Network. In this account, the following secondary accounts shall be included: Α) Account for the Reinforcement and Expansion of the Network for the connection of Customers – Λ∆ιΣΠε,
108 Part VIII: Network connection charges
Β) Account for other income and expenses for the connection of Users – ΛΛοιπΣΧρ, to which the income and expenses which refer immediately to the connection of User’s to the Network and are not recorded in Account Λ∆ιΣΠε shall be kept. 2. The Account for the Reinforcement and Expansion of the Network for the connection of Customers – Λ∆ιΣΠε, shall regard the connection of Customer’s installations to the LV Network and the MV Network. The income entered in the Λ∆ιΣΠε account shall include those parts of the charges paid by LV Customers and MV Customers for the connection or the amendment of the connection of their installations to the LV Network or the MV Network, respectively, based on the Participation System, which regard: Α) for the LV Network, the participation in the cost of existing installations and the cost for the expansion and reinforcement of the Network, namely factors Σα and Σδ, under Article AP.IV-7, of the LV Customer charges, Β) for the MV Network, the participation in the cost of Network expansion and reinforcement, namely factors ΣΕΠ and ΣΕΝ, under Article AP.IV-24, of the MV Customer charges. 3. The expenses entered into the secondary account Λ∆ιΣΠε shall include all expenses for the expansion or reinforcement of the Network and the construction of Supplies, which are realized due to the connection, or the amendment of the connection of Customers.
Article 26-4 Network connection charges in cases of joint connection applications 1. Where joint Connection Applications are submitted for a group of Customers, in compliance with Article 13-6, the Connection Charges for each applicant shall be calculated in accordance with the provisions of the Participation System. 2. Where joint Connection Application are submitted or a group of Producers, in compliance with Article 13-6, the charges for the cost of the expansion of the existing LV Network, ΣΕΠπα , and the charges for the cost of the reinforcement of the Network, ΣΕΝπα , shall be initially calculated, in compliance with Article 25- 1. Afterwards the total charges for each part of the Network serving a specific subset of such Producers shall be portioned out to the Producers belonging to such subset, based on the Maximum Agreed Power of each Producer. Each Producer shall pay the charges for the cost of the final connection, ΣΠπα , under Article 25-1, that correspond to such Producer.
Article 26-5 Calculation of the consideration in cases of new User connections 1. The provisions of the present Article shall apply in cases where the installations of a new User are connected to part of the Network, for the construction of which a Producer or Customer falling under the special connection cases under the provisions of Article 24-3 paragraphs (1) and (2) has paid the charges for the cost of expanding the Network. 2. Specifically for new Customers who are connected to part of the Network, for the construction of which the charges for the cost of the expansion of the
109 Part VIII: Network connection charges
Network have been paid, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (1), the following shall apply: Α) the connection charges for the Customer shall be initially calculated indicatively in the following two ways: (a) in compliance with the provisions of Article 24-1, and (b) by the application of the provisions of Article 24-3 (as a special case) and the present Article. Β) the provisions of the present Article shall be applied definitively only in the case where the ensuing charges for new Customer calculated using method (b) are smaller than the charges calculated by method (a). The Customer shall pay the smallest under the above charges. 3. In the aforementioned cases the following provisions shall be applied: Α) the new User shall participate in the cost for the part of the extension to the Network which has been built by making charges in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (1) and which is used by such User too, Β) existing Producers who use part of the Network jointly with the new User shall reserve the right to consideration exclusively in the case where they have paid charges for such part of the Network, in compliance with Article 25-1 or the present Article. C) existing Customers who use part of the Network jointly with the new Users shall be entitled to consideration exclusively in the case where they have paid charges for such part of the Network, in compliance with Article 24-3 paragraphs (1) and (2).
4. For each part of the Network that the new User (denoted by Χnew) uses jointly with existing Users, who have paid charges in compliance with paragraphs (3.B) and (3.C) (denoted by X1 up to and including Xk), the following methodology shall be applicable: Α) Based on the unit Network connection charges established under Article 26-1 and in force at the time of the connection of User Χnew, the cost of the Network extension works which would have been necessary for the connection of Χnew, but are not made due to the existence of such Network extension for which Users X1 - Xk have already paid charges, shall be calculated, namely the avoided cost for extending the Network for User Χnew. Such cost is denoted as ΑπΚΕπ. Β) The amount ΠΑξΚΤ, is calculated as follows:
⎧ 5−n ⎪ ΑπΚΕπ × if n<5 ⎪ 5 ΠΑξΚΤ = ⎨ ⎪ ⎩⎪0 if n≥5
where
110 Part VIII: Network connection charges
n the number of years which have passed in full from the date of the conclusion of the connection contract for the first one of Users X1 - Xk.
C) The amount ΠΑξΚΤ shall be allocated to Users X1 - Xk and to User Χnew , based on each one’s Maximum Agreed Power. The ensuing amount for the new User is denoted by ΣΠΧρnew and constitutes the charges made to User Χnew for such part of the Network which such User jointly uses with X1 - Xk.
D) The credit corresponding to each one of Users X1 - Xk shall be calculated by allocating the amount ΣΠΧρnew to them based on each one’s Maximum Agreed Power. 5. The above methodology shall be applicable for each separate part of the existing Network which User Χnew uses jointly with a different group of existing Users X1 - Xk , while the total charges for User Χnew and the total credit to each existing User who has paid the charges under paragraph (3.B) and (3.C) are cumulatively calculated.
6. The Network Operator shall see to the payment of credits to Users X1 - Xk, immediately after the new User has paid the charges. 7. In cases of incorporation to the Network, under Article 13-9, of distribution lines and/or MV/HV S/Ss built by generation authorization holders from Renewable Energy Sources, in compliance with article 11 of Law 3468/2006, for the connection of their installations to the Network or the System, and which all outside of the boundaries of their proprietorship, or Direct Lines, without this being immediately required for the connection of new Users, the provisions of the present Article are applicable and the Network Owner immediately assumes all financial liabilities of future new Users for all those installations whose ownership has been transferred to the Network Owner. The details for the implementation of the provisions of this paragraph shall be approved on a case- by-case basis by RAE, following the proposals by the Network Operator.
111
Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
PART IX ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION AND NETWORK USE CHARGES
CHAPTER 27 ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION
Article 27-1 Regulated parameters of the annual Network consideration 1. The Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree establishes the following parameters for the Distribution Regulatory Period to which this decree refers: Α) The Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance, which reflects the acceptable annual expenses for the operation and maintenance of the Network, inclusive of indirect expenses and expenses regarding Users’ connection assets, which are accepted as reasonable. The Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance shall be established for each year of the Distribution Regulatory Period, in real values of the year immediately preceding the first year of such period, and shall henceforth be denoted by “Οref-I” when referring to year (i). Β) The Reference Return Interest Rate, which reflects the acceptable nominal interest rate of return for the Network’s employed capital before taxes. It shall be determined for each year of the Distribution Regulatory Period and is henceforth denoted by “ρref -i” when referring to year (i). C) The Annual Reference Losses, which reflect the acceptable amount of Network energy losses on an annual basis. It shall be determined for each year of the Distribution Regulatory Period and is henceforth denoted by “Lref-i” when referring to year (i). D) The Reference Unit Cost for Losses, which reflects the estimated long-term average full cost of the energy injected into the Network, based on the anticipated full cost of energy in the wholesale market, which incorporates, according to under the SO&PE Code, the cost of the daily energy market, of imbalances and of the capacity assurance mechanism as well as the cost of the System. The Reference Unit Cost for Losses shall be fixed for the whole of the Distribution Regulatory Period to which it refers, in real values of the year immediately preceding the first year of such period, and shall henceforth be denoted by “LCref”. 2. The figures above shall be determined by taking into account in particular the following: Α) financial information on the annual operating and maintenance expenses of the Network, the annual depreciation of distribution fixed assets, and the employed long-term own and debt capital, as these follow in accordance with the rules of
113 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
accounting separation, as well as the anticipated annual increase of productivity in the electricity distribution sector, Β) information on User Quality of Service, as is regulated based on the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree, C) reported information regarding the operation of the Network and the electricity generation and distribution system, and estimates on their course, D) the Regulatory Framework for Network Development for the Distribution Regulatory Period under consideration, Ε) the applied regulatory policy, F) international practice and experience.
Article 27-2 Modification of the annual Network consideration regulated parameters 1. The numerical values for Annual Reference Losses, Reference Unit Cost for Losses and the Reference Return Interest Rate, established under Article 27-1 and in force for one Distribution Regulatory Period cannot be modified during such period. 2. The numerical value of the Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance, which has been determined for a given Distribution Regulatory Period under Article 27-1, may be modified in the course of such period solely and exclusively in the case where the difference between this reference consideration and the actual annual cost for the operation and maintenance of the Network, which follows by reporting for one year, amounts to a significant percentage of the applicable Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance for such year. This modification may be effected by a decree issued by the Minister of Development, following RAE’s assent, and regards in particular those cases where external factors, which could not have been foreseen prior to the commencement of the Distribution Regulatory Period, have had a nontrivial impact on the real cost of operation and maintenance for the Network. A proposal for the modification of the Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance may be filed, besides the Competent Network Authorities, by any other interested party. 3. The actual operation and maintenance cost for the Network is calculated based on the rules of accounting separation; and for the implementation of the present Article the following shall not be included in it: Α) charges or credits resulting for the Network Operator, based on the provisions of PART III, due to deviations of Service Quality to Users from the Individual Guarantee Limits and the Total Performance Limits established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree. Β) the annual net charge or credit to the Network Operator due to deviations of the total Network losses from the Annual Reference Losses applicable for the year under consideration. 4. In case where the Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance has been modified in accordance with paragraph (2), its new
114 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
numerical value may not differ from the actual cost for the operation and maintenance of the Network by a percentage less than 10% thereof, keeping the sign of the difference that caused the modification. 5. The modification of the Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance under the present Article may also refer to past years.
Article 27-3 Annual consideration and total annual income for the Network Owner 1. The consideration that the Network Owner is entitled to for each year, henceforth referred to as “Annual Consideration for the Network Owner” and denoted by “Εi” for year (i), shall be calculated as follows:
i Ei = Oref −i ×∏()1+ I j + Ai + (Vi − Di )×ρref −i j=1
1 + []Lref −i − Lossesi × LCref × ∏()1+ I j − QCovrl−i − IAdi j=1 where:
Οref-i the Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance, as it is determined for year (i) under consideration, in compliance with Article 27-1 and Article 27-2.
Ιj the percentage change between the following figures: (a) the numerical average of prices in the Consumer Price Index for each month in the twelve month duration expiring on October of year (j) and (b) of the numerical average of prices in the Consumer Price Index for each month in the twelve month duration expiring on October for year (j-1), as these values are announced by the National Statistical Service of Greece.
i ∏() the product of factors for years from the initial year of the Distribution j=1 Regulatory Period to which year (i) belongs, up to year (i).
Αi the annual depreciations of distribution fixed assets for year (i) under consideration, as these are calculated based on the rules of accounting separation.
Vi-Di the average value of long-term employed capital, own and debt of the Network, at the beginning and end of year (i) under consideration, as obtained in compliance with accounting separation rules. More specifically:
Vi is the average initial value of the fixed assets based on acceptable valuation methods and of the working capital of the Network, for year (i),
Di is the corresponding average value of cumulative depreciations of fixed asset elements of the Network, for year (i). It is clarified that the calculations above do not include long-term capital covered by:
115 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
a) User charges for the building of assets in accordance with Connection Contracts and/or Power Quality Contracts, b) income generated in the context of upgrading works on the Network, in compliance with Article 22-6, c) subsidies convertible to assets.
ρref-i the Reference Return Interest Rate as is determined for year (i) under consideration, in compliance with Article 27-1.
Lref-i the Annual Reference Losses as are determined for year (i) under consideration, in compliance with Article 27-1.
Lossesi the actual energy losses of the Network for year (i).
LCref the Reference Unit Cost for Losses, as is determined for the Distribution Regulatory Period, in compliance with Article 27-1.
QCovrl-i the algebraic sum of the following factors: (a) the total for year (i) net charge made to the Network Operator due to a deviation of the Power Quality for Users on the Network level, from the anticipated one, QVCi , which is calculated in accordance with Article 6-8, and (b) the total annual net charge made to the Network Operator due to a deviation of the total Service Quality to Users from the anticipated one, QCCi , which is calculated in accordance with Article 7-6.
ΙAdi the total amount of other net income of the Network Owner during year (i), which is not converted into fixed assets, such as, in particular, income due to charges under Article 6-2 paragraph (5) case (G) 9, Article 12-2 paragraph (8) 10, not-refunded and not offsetted charges made under Article 13-5 paragraph (2)11, income in accordance with CHAPTER 2312, various subsidies, etc. 2. It is explicitly clarified that the calculation of the Annual Consideration for the Network Owner does not take into account expenses due to considerations and penalty clauses paid by the Network Operator to Users due to violations of quality Individual Guarantee Limits, in compliance with the provisions of Article 6-6, Article 607 and Article 7-5, as well as expenses due to compensations paid by the Network Operator to Users. 3. The total income the Network Owner is entitled to for the immediately following year, hereinafter referred to as “Total Budgeted Annual Income” and denoted by “RRi” when referring to year (i), shall be budgeted until the end of September each year, as follows:
RRii =Ε +∆Ε i-2 where:
9 From periodic charges made to Users for the provision of improved Power Quality under the Power Quality Contract. 10 From interruption and reconnection charges 11 From charges for the processing of Network connection applications 12 From FPRT financing
116 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
Εi the Annual Consideration for Network Owner for the following year (i), by application of the methodology developed in paragraph (1), taking into account reasonable assumptions on the estimated figures,
∆Εi-2 the difference, adjusted to current prices by employing the consumer price index, between: (a) the Annual Consideration for the Network Owner, determined on an as reported basis by applying the methodology of paragraph (1), for past year (i-2), and (b) of the total amount that the Network Operator has collected from Network Use Charges and which has been credited to the Network Owner, for year (i-2). 4. The calculations for the Annual Consideration for the Network Owner, under paragraph (1), and of the Total Budgeted Annual Income, in compliance with paragraph (2), shall be carried out by the Interconnected Network Operator and the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator, each one for the network falling in its competence, and shall be approved by RAE. 5. After the end of each month, the Operator of the Interconnected Network and the Operator of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network shall immediately credit the Network Owner with the total amounts of Network Connection Charges they have collected during the month, in compliance with Article 28-9, offsetted with the total charges or credits which ensued in the course of said month for each of these Operators, based on the provisions under PART III of the Network Code, for diversions of the Quality of Service provided to Users with respect to the Individual Guarantee Limits and the Total Performance Limits, as well as User’s compensations.
CHAPTER 28 NETWORK USE CHARGES
Article 28-1 Network use charges – General Provisions 1. Network Connection Charges are determined so that: Α) The Total Budgeted Annual Income to be collected. Β) The charges to each User for using the Network to reflect the comparative long-term average fixed and marginal variable cost generated for the Network by the connection to it and operation of the User’s installations. C) The way of calculation of the amount corresponding to the Network Use Charges to be simple and comprehensible to the Users and its result to sufficiently predictable. 2. The unit charges for Customer’s use of the Network are determined per Customer category and such categories are defined in such as way that Customers considered to burden the Network in a similar manner are placed in the same category, in compliance with the provisions of Article 28-4. 3. Network Use Charges are zero for LV Producers.
117 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
4. MV Producers and HV Producers shall pay Network Connection Charges, which shall be calculated individually and in compliance with the provisions of Article 28-2. 5. For the implementation of the provisions of the present CHAPTER, the Maximum Agreed Power for Customers who have concluded an Interruptible Load Contract shall be considered equal to zero. Such Customers do not pay the fixed leg of Network Use Charges. 6. All details required for the implementation of the provisions of the present CHAPTER shall be set forth in the Network Use Charges Manual, which is set down in compliance with Article 1-3.
Article 28-2 Methodology for the determination of the charges to MV and HV Producers for using the Network 1. Charges to MV Producers and HV Producers for using the Network must cover the cost of operation and maintenance of the Network installations exclusively, or almost exclusively, used by given Producer or cluster of Producers. The inclusion of Network installations in such configuration shall be approved by RAE, following the proposals by the Network Operator. 2. The calculation of the annual cost for the operation and maintenance of Network installations which fall in the scope of the provisions of paragraph (1), shall be performed on the basis of the unit prices per type of Network installations, which are approved by the Minister of Development, following the recommendations of the Network Operator and RAE’s assent. Such decree shall be in fore for at least two consecutive full calendar years and shall be issued at least four months in advance of their entry into force. 3. The annual operation and maintenance cost for the installations of the Network that fall in the scope of the provisions of paragraph (1) and are used by a cluster of more than one Producers, shall be allocated to them on the basis of the maximum generation power of the installations of each Producer, determined in the respective generation authorization. 4. The total annual operation and maintenance cost for the installations of the Network that are subsumed to the provisions of paragraph (1), shall be henceforth denoted by RR(G)i when it refers to year (i). Article 28-3 Annual income from the use of the Network by Customers 1. The total annual income that the Network Owner is entitled to during year (i), and which must be collected from Customers by means of the Network Use Charges, denoted by RR(L)i , shall be calculated as follows:
RR(L)i = RR(∆∆)i + RR(Μ∆Ν)i - RR(G)i where:
RR(∆∆)i the Total Budgeted Annual Income for year (i), for the Interconnected Network, calculated in accordance with Article 27-3, paragraph (20),
118 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
RR(Μ∆Ν)i the Total Budgeted Annual Income for year (i), for the Network of the Non-Interconnected Islands, calculated in accordance with Article 27-3, paragraph (20), and
RR(G)i the total annual operation and maintenance cost for the installations of the Network falling in the scope of the provisions of Article 28-2 paragraph (1) for year (i).
2. RR(L)i shall be divided in the following parts: (a) the annually required income from Customers for the MV Network and the HV Network , denoted by RR(L)πρωτ-i , and (b) the annually required income from Customers for the LV Network, denoted by RR(L)δευτ-i . This separation is based on accounting separation rules and information and must reflect the analogy between: (a) the total annual cost of the MV Network and the HV Network, and (b) the total annual cost of the LV Network.
Article 28-4 Customer charges categories and the allocation of the annual Network income to them 1. Customers fall under categories with respect to the unit Network Use Charges, in such a manner that each category includes Customers who, due to the basic characteristics of their installations, their indent for the use of electricity and the way the energy they absorb from the Network is measured, are reasonably anticipated to add to the Network cost in a similar manner. Such categories shall hereinafter be referred to as “Customer Categories for Network Use Charge” or “NUC Customer Categories” and shall be distinguished between them on the basis of the power they absorb from the Network, or is injected to it by User’s installations, as well as on the basis of the variation of such power, in particular during Network peak load hours, based on the measured or estimated variation curves. Indicatively the criteria for distinguishing between NUC Customer Categories may, in effect, be the following: Α) the voltage level of Customer’s connections, Β) the hourly or otherwise metering of the demand at Customer’s installations, C) the measurement or not of peak demand at Customer’s installations during a given temporal period (e.g. monthly), D) the existence of a Zone Load Meter, in order to measure the consumption of energy for various time zones in the day, Ε) Customer Categories based on the purpose of the use of electricity, in compliance with Article 12-3. 2. The annually required income from Customers for the MV Network and the HV Network, RR(L)πρωτ-i , which is determined in accordance with Article 28-3 paragraph (2), shall be allocated to: Α) the annually required income for the MV Network and the HV Network which is covered by MV Customer charges for using the Network, denoted by RR(L-ΜΤ)πρωτ-i , and
119 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
Β) the annually required income for the MV Network and the HV Network, which is covered by LV Customer charges for use of the Network, denoted by RR(L-ΧΤ)πρωτ-i . Such allocation shall be made pro rata the Average Load at the Peak for each Customer group, which is calculated in accordance with Article 28-7. 3. The unit Network Use Charges for MV Customers shall be determined so that the total annually budgeted income from such charges, denoted by RR(L-MT)tot-i , to be equal to the annually required income RR(L-ΜΤ)πρωτ-i determined above. 4. The unit Network Use Charges for LV Customers shall be determined in such a manner so that the total annually budgeted income from such charges, denoted by RR(L-ΧT)tot-i , to be equal to the sum of factors RR(L-ΧΤ)πρωτ-i (which is determined as above) and RR(L)δευτ-i (determined under Article 28-3 paragraph (2)).
5. The amount RR(L-MT)tot-i shall be allocated to those NUC Customer Categories which include exclusively MV Customers, while the amount RR(L-ΧT)tot-i shall be allocated to those NUC Customer Categories which include exclusively LV Customers. The allocation keys reflect the Average Load at the Peak for the group of Customers in each category, which is calculated in compliance with Article 28-7. These calculations result, for each NUC Customer Category (j), in the total amount of the charge made to Customers in such category for year (i), denoted by RR(L)j-i . Article 28-5 Constant-Fixed and variable Network use charge 1. The total amount of charge to the Customers falling in each NUC Customer Category (j) for year (i), RR(L)j-i which is calculated in accordance with Article 28-4, shall be broken down, for each Customer category, to the following two legs: Α) the amount of the charge intended to cover that portion of the Network’s cost which is independent of the operation of User’s installations and the amounts of energy and power such absorb from the Network, denoted by RR(L)constj-i . It includes depreciations, the cost of capital employed, and the Network Owner’s fixed operating expenses which do depend on the flow of power on the Network, such as fixed operation and maintenance expenses, fixed expenses for maintaining the capability to serve Users, measurement collection expenses and others. Β) the amount of the charge intended to cover that portion of the Network’s cost which depends of the way of operation of User’s installations and the amounts of energy and power such absorb from the Network, denoted by RR(L)varj-i . It includes the variable operating expenses of the Network Owner, such as the cost incurred in repairing faults caused to the Network by the operation of User’s installations, variable operating and maintenance expenses for Network elements, the cost of acceptable energy losses, etc. 2. For each NUC Customer Category the following components of the unit Network Use Charges shall be calculated:
120 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
Α) The Unit Fixed Charge, by which the sum RR(L)constj-i is covered, in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (3), and
Β) The Unit Variable Charge, by which the sum RR(L)varj-i is covered, in compliance with the provisions of paragraph (4).
3. The Unit Fixed Charge for NUC Customer Category (i) and year (i), ΜΠΧj-i in €/MW, is calculated as follows:
RR() L const ji− ΜΠΧji− = ∑ ()ΣΜΙk ∀∈kj where:
RR(L)constj-i as above, and
∑ ()ΣΜΙk the estimated total maximum ability of Customers belonging in ∀∈kj NUC Customer Category (j) to absorb power from the Network in year (i), which is calculated as the sum for all such Customers of the Maximum Agreed Power, which follows for each Customer from the corresponding Network Connection Contract, suitably augmented in order to include the anticipated for year (i) total increase due to the connection of new Customers belonging to the same category to the Network and due to amendments in the Network Connection Contracts of existing Customers in that category. 4. The Unit Variable Charge for each NUC Customer Category (j) and year (i), ΜΜΧj-i in €/MWh, is calculated as follows: Α) For NUC Customer Categories for which the reactive power absorbed is measured:
RR()var L ji− ΜΜΧji− = ×cosφ ji− Energy ji− where:
RR(L)varj-i as above,
Energyj-i the estimated total energy annually absorbed from the Network from Customers belonging the NUC Customer Category (j) for year (i), and
cosφ ji− the estimated weighted average value of the power factor of Customers in NUC Customer Category (j) for year (i), where the weighting factors shall be the energy consumption by each Customer. Β) For those NUC Customer Categories for which the reactive absorbed power is not measured, the calculation shall be done in compliance with the provisions
of the previous paragraph (A), taking cosφ ji− = 1.
121 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
Article 28-6 Calculation of Customer charges to for using the Network The charge to each Customer (n) for using the Network shall be calculated for each Metering Period (t). Its sum is denoted by ΧΧ∆n,t , and shall be calculated as follows: Α) For Customers falling in the scope of NUC Customer Categories for which the reactive power absorbed is measured:
days() t Energynt, ΧΧ∆nt,, =ΣΜΙ nt ×ΜΠΧ ji− × + ×ΜΜΧ ji− 365 cosφnt, where:
ΣΜΙn,t the Maximum Agreed Power of Customer (n) for Metering Period (t), as established in the corresponding Network Connection Contract,
Energyn,t the measured energy that is being absorbed from the Network by Customer (n) during Metering Period (t),
cosφnt, the average value of the power factor of Customer (n) during Metering Period (t),
ΜΠΧj-i the Unit Fixed Charge for NUC Customer Category (j) to which Customer (n) belongs and for year (i) in which Metering Period (t) is included, as established under Article 28-5. If the Metering Period spans in consecutive years, ΜΠΧj-i shall be equal to the weighted average value of the respective unit charges of the two years, the weighting factors being the number of days in the Metering Period included in each year.
ΜΜΧj-i the Unit Variable Charge for NUC Customer Category (j) to which Customer (n) belongs and for year (i) in which Metering Period (t) is included, as established under Article 28-5. If the Metering Period spans in consecutive years, ΜMΧj-i shall be equal to the weighted average value of the respective unit charges of the two years, the weighting factors being the number of days in the Metering Period included in each year. days(t) the number of days in Metering Period (t). Β) For Customers falling in the scope of NUC Customer Categories for which the reactive power absorbed is not measured, the calculation shall be carried out in compliance with the provisions of the previous paragraph (A), taking cosφn,t=1. Article 28-7 Average load at peak for a group of Customers 1. The Average Load at Peak for a group of Customers (j) and for year (i) is denoted by ΜΦΑΠj-i and calculated as the weighted average demand for all Customers belonging in such group at maximum Network load hours for the previous two years, as follows:
122 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
i−1 ∑∑()LLjk,,× totk mi=−2 ∀∈ k {}100ωρες ετουςmL , µε max tot ΜΦΑΠji− = i−1 ∑∑()Ltot, k mi=−2 ∀∈ k {}100ωρες ετουςmL , µε max tot where:
Lj,k the total load of Customers belonging to group (j) at hour (k), calculated in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (2) and (3),
Ltot,k the total Network load at hour (k), calculated as the sum of the energy injected to it from all of its supply sources during this hour, that is as the sum of concurrent measurements taken by Network Boundary Meters and Generation Meters. ∑ () the sum for 100 hours of year m, during which the total ∀∈k {}100ωρες ετουςmL , µε max tot Network load exhibited its highest value,
i−1 ∑ () the sum for years (i-2) and (i-1). mi=−2 2. The total load for Customers in group (j) during hour (k), which is calculated based on the following rules: Α) For all Customers with hourly measurement of demand, or a subset of such, their demand per hour shall be cumulatively calculated, after the load of each Customer belonging to the group at MV level has been reduced using loss factors in compliance with Article 28-10. Β) For all Customers without hourly demand measurement, their demand per hour shall be calculated as the difference between the total load of the Network at such hour, Ltot,k as calculated under paragraph (1), and the total load of Customers with hourly measurements. C) For Customers without hourly demand measurement, it is initially assumed that their load follows a single variation curve, which is common for all Customers without hourly demand measurement, and is derived by the hourly total load of such Customers, which is calculated in accordance with paragraph (B). Consequently, the load for a subset of Customers without hourly demand measurement, may be calculated for an hour as the product of the following factors: (a) the total load of all Customers without hourly demand measurement during such hour and (b) the fraction of the annual energy demand for such subset of Customers to the annual energy demand of all Customers without hourly demand measurement. D) The full methodology for determining the total load of Customers belonging to group (j) for one hour (k), may take into account: (a) the demand for Customers measured by Zone Load Meters, which can measure the absorbed energy accumulatively per time zone of an 24-hour day, and (b) the typical load variation curves per Customer category, which are established by RAE’s decision.
123 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
3. Details for the methodologies above are established in the Network Use Charges Manual.
Article 28-8 Procedure for the determination of Network use charges 1. Customer Categories for Network Use Charge are established by RAE’s decision, following the suggestions made by the Network Operator; which is in force for at least two consecutive full calendar years and issued at least four months prior to its entry into force. 2. The inclusion of Network installations to the provisions under Article 28-2 paragraph (1) shall be completed at least four months prior to the commencement of the year for which the relevant decision applies. Only for new works for the connection of MV Producers and HV Producers’ installations to the Network may there be an exceptional assessment of their inclusion to the provisions in question, during the course of one year. 3. Unit Fixed Charges and Unit Variable Charges applicable for each NUC Customer Categories for year (i) shall be approved by a decree issued by the Minister of Development, following the suggestions by the Operator of the Interconnected Network and RAE’s assent, for all NUC Customer Categories, up until November the 30th of the immediately preceding year. In such context: Α) The Network Operator for Non-Interconnected Islands shall, until the 10th of September of the previous year: i) calculate and notify to the Operator of the Interconnected Network and RAE, the total annual cost for the operation and maintenance of Network installations which fall under the scope of its competence and which are subsumed under the provisions of Article 28-2, paragraph (1) for year (i), ii) provide to the Operator of the Interconnected Network the information required for the calculation of the Average Load at Perak for each NUC Customer Category, under Article 28-7, at the Non-Interconnected Islands. Β) The Interconnected Network Operator must calculate and notify to RAE until the 15th of September of the previous year: i) the total annual cost for the operation and maintenance of Network installations falling under the scope of its competence and which are subsumed to the provisions of Article 28-2, paragraph (1) for year (i), ii) the Average Load at Peak for each NUC Customer Category, under Article 28-7, for all Customers in the country which are included in each category. C) RAE shall by the 5th of October each year: i) determine, in compliance with Article 28-3 paragraph (2), the key for the allocation of the total annual income the Network Owner is entitled to, for the following year (i), and which must be collected by Customers, RR(L)i , to: (a) the annually required income from Customers for the MV Network and the HV Network, RR(L)πρωτ-i , and (b) the annually required income from Customers for the LV Network, RR(L)δευτ-i .
124 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
ii) determine, in compliance with Article 28-4 paragraph (2), the key for the allocation of the total annual income from Customers for the MV Network and the HV Network, RR(L)πρωτ-i , to (a) the annually required income covered by charges made to MV Customer for Network use, RR(L-ΜΤ)πρωτ-i , and (b) the required income covered by HV Customer charges for Netowrk use, RR(L-ΧΤ)πρωτ-i . iii) establish, in compliance with Article 28-5 paragraph (1), the keys for the allocation of the total charge to Customers in each NUC Customer Category (j) for year (i), RR(L)j-i to: (a) the amount of the charge intended to cover part of the Network cost which is independent of the operation of Users installations and the amounts of energy and power which such installations absorb from the Network, RR(L)constj-i and (b) the amount of the charge intended to cover that part of the Network cost, which depends on the way of operation of Users’ installations and the amount of energy and power such installations absorb from the Network, RR(L)varj-i . iv) approve the information submitted by the Network Operators in accordance with paragraphs (A) and (B) above. D) The Operator of the Interconnected Network shall, until the 20th of October, submit its proposals regarding the amount of the Unit Fixed Charges and the Unit Variable Charges for each NUC Customer Category for year (i), in compliance with the provisions of Article 28-5 and based on the foregoing information established by RAE. Ε) RAE shall by the 10th of November deliver its opinion on the amount corresponding to the Unit Fixed Charges and the Unit Variable Charges for each NUC Customer Category for year (i).
Article 28-9 Payment of charges made to Customers for Network Use 1. Liable for the payment of the Network Use Charges of a Customer shall be the Supplier representing such Customer by the highest percentage. In cases where this rule cannot be applied due to the equality in the Customer’s representation percentages by more than one Suppliers, the Network Operator shall determine the Supplier to whom such charges will be imposed, out of those Suppliers who hold the highest representation percentage for such Customer, taking account of the opinion of such Suppliers. 2. The Network Operator shall calculate and notify to the liable Supplier, in compliance with paragraph (1), immediately after the collection of the measurements for a Customer, the Network Use Charge of said Customer for the respective Metering Period, under Article 28-6, inclusive of possible charges made in compliance with Article 6-2 paragraph (5) case (G). 3. Suppliers may lodge a documented objection against such information notified to them within three (3) working days from its receipt. In cases where objections are lodged, the Network Operator must consider the objection, carry out the relevant calculations anew, where deemed necessary, and in any case notify the relevant decision to the Suppliers within three (3) working days from the receipt
125 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
of the objection, providing documentation for its actions to the Supplier who lodged the objection. 4. In any case, Suppliers must pay to the Network Operator the Network Use Charges for those Customers for whom they are liable under paragraph (1) and which shall be determined in compliance with paragraphs (2) and (3), within eight (8) working days from its notification by the Network Operator, in compliance with paragraph (2). 5. Suppliers must clearly indicate on the invoices of Customers they represent, the charges they impose on them for using the Network. The amount of such charges must be equal, for each Customer, with the amount of the corresponding charges imposed by the Network Operator to the Supplier.
Article 28-10 Network loss factors 1. Network loss factors established under the present Article, shall be approved by RAE and shall enter into force from the beginning of the following calendar year and for at least two (2) consecutive years. 2. Network loss factors are established based on a special survey, which calculates average losses based on statistical data on the operation of the Network in the previous two years. This survey shall be prepared by the Network Operator by the end of June, and the loss factors shall be approved until the end of August of the year preceding the first year that such factors shall enter into force. 3. More specifically, the following loss factors are determined: Α) downstream loss factor for the MV Network and the HV Network, denoted by DFL_MV and expressed per unit; the product of the multiplication of such factor with the total amount of energy coming into the MV Network shall be the average energy losses for the MV Network. Β) downstream loss factor for the LV Network, denoted by DFL_LV and expressed per unit; the production of multiplying such factor with the total amount of energy coming into the LV Network shall be the average energy losses for the LV Network. 4. Based on the above factors, the following are also determined: Α) the upstream loss factor for the MV Network and the HV Network, denoted by ULF_MV and expressed per unit; the product of multiplying such factor with the amount of energy measured at the MV Network exits to MV Customers and to the LV Network, shall be the average energy losses for the MV Network and the HV Network. Β) the upstream loss factor for the LV Network, denoted by ULF_LV and expressed per unit; the product of multiplying such factor with the measured amount of the energy consumed by LV Customers, shall be the energy losses for the LV Network. C) the load increment factor for the MV Network as a result of losses, denoted by LIF_MV and expressed per unit; the product of multiplying such factor with the measured energy consumption by MV Customers, shall give the total
126 Part IΧ: Annual Network consideration and Network use charges
energy which must be injected into the Network, including its losses, for the supply of such Customers. It is calculated using the following formula: LIF_ΜV = (1+ ULF_ΜV) D) the load increment factor for the LV Network as a result of losses, denoted by LIF_LV and expressed per unit; the product of multiplying such factor with the measured energy consumption by LV Customers, shall give the total energy which must be injected into the Network, including its losses, for the supply of such Customers. It is calculated using the following formula: LIF_LV = (1+ ULF_LV) x (1+ ULF_ΜV) 5. The numerical value of each of the above Network loss factors shall be constant for all hours of each month. 6. The as above determined Network loss factors shall be used also for the implementation of the SO&PE Code, in compliance with the provisions therein.
127
Part Χ: Other Charges and Accounts
PART X OTHER CHARGES AND ACCOUNTS
CHAPTER 29 OTHER CHARGES AND ACCOUNTS
Article 29-1 Charges for Operating expenses of the Network Operator 1. The annual income for covering the operating expenses of the Interconnected Network Operator and the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator, shall be established in compliance with the provisions of the Network Operation Authorization and the operation authorization for Non-Interconnected Islands. 2. The unit charge to Customers for covering of the Network Operator’s operation expenses, shall be established in a single manner for all Customers throughout the country, in Euros per MWh of electricity consumed, to cover the total operational expenses of the Interconnected Network Operator and the Non- Interconnected Islands Operator. The unit charge shall each year be approved by the Minister of Development, until the 30th of September of the previous year, following the proposals made by the Network Operator and RAE’s assent. 3. The charges under the present Article are imposed and collected together with Network Use Charges, following the procedure set forth for lodging and assessing objection in compliance with Article 28-9. For such objections, the Network Operator shall keep separate accounts. 4. Each Supplier shall collect from the Customers it represents the amounts to cover the charges imposed upon the former under the present Article. Suppliers must clearly record on the invoices issued to the Customers they represent the amounts charged to them in order to cover for their charges under the present Article. The amount of such charges must be equal to the amount of the charges imposed by the Network Operator to the Supplier for each such Customer. 5. After the end of each year: Α) either the Interconnected Network Operator shall cover any under-recovered amounts for the operating expenses of the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator, or the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator shall pay to the Interconnected Network Operator any over-recovered amounts for its operating expenses account, so that the operating expenses account of the Non- Interconnected Islands Operator is always balanced. Β) the Interconnected Network Operator shall carry the total deficit or surplus of its operating expenses account forward to the account for the next year.
129 Part Χ: Other Charges and Accounts
Article 29-2 Charges in favor of third parties 1. The Network Operator shall calculate and impose charges for municipal dues, municipal taxes, Real Estate dues, fees in favor of the Hellenic Broadcasting Corporation, and charges made due to Public Utility Services, to Suppliers as follows: Α) to the Dominant Supplier for Customers whose meters are fully or partially represented by it, Β) to the Alternative Supplier who represents a Customer by the highest percentage, in accordance with the Table of Correspondence of Load Meters and Alternative Suppliers, for the remaining Customers. In cases where this rule cannot be applied due to an equality in the Customer representation percentages for more than one Alternative Suppliers, the Network Operator shall determine the Alternative Supplier to whom the charges in questions shall be imposed, from among those Suppliers who represent the Customer with the highest representation percentages, taking into account the opinion of such Suppliers. 2. The imposition, clearance and payment of the amounts of paragraph (1) to their beneficiaries shall be effected in accordance with the provisions of the applicable legislation, and particularly of Laws 25/75, 1080/1980, 1730/87. 3. The Network Owner shall provide the Network Operator with the necessary information for the calculation of the charges above, in compliance with the instructions issued by the Network Operator. For the charges under consideration, the Network Operator shall keep separate accounts and issue special invoices for each Supplier, with detailed, itemized charges per Customer. 4. Each Supplier shall collect from the Customers it represents amounts intended to cover the charges imposed on the former under the present Article. Suppliers shall clearly state on the invoices issued to the Customers they represent the amounts imposed on the later to cover each of the charges made under the present Article. The amounts of the charges made to Customers must be equal to the amount of the charges imposed by the Network Operator to the Supplier for each Customer.
130 Part ΧΙ: Final Provisions
PART XI FINAL PROVISIONS
CHAPTER 30 FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 30-1 Contracts between the Network Operator and the Network Owner 1. The Network Operator and the Network Owner are obliged within one month from the publication of the Network Code in the Government Gazette to conclude a contract for the execution of the development and maintenance works on the Network. 2. For the development of the Network the above contract shall establish the following: Α) that both contracting parties must fulfill the obligations deriving from the Network Code and particularly from the Regulatory Framework for Network Development. Β) that in case of the non-timely and good execution of the Network development works established in the Regulatory Framework for Network Development the consequences determined in the later shall apply. C) that the Network Operator shall monitor the course-progress for the implementation of Network development works and the observance of the detailed time-schedule established by the Regulatory Framework for Network Development. 3. Regarding Network maintenance, the aforementioned contract establishes that both contracting parties must fulfill the obligations deriving from the Network Code.
Article 30-2 Exemptions 1. An exemption from the obligation to observe the provisions of the Network Code shall be granted by a decree of the Minister of Development, issued upon the Network Operator’s proposals and RAE’s opinion. Such exemption shall have a definite and reasonable period of validity and may regard only technical failure on the part of the party liable to observe the provisions of the Network Code. For such an exemption to be granted, the party interested may submit a relevant application to the Minister of Development. The conditions for the issuance of an exemption are the following: Α) The exemption must not lead to a direct or indirect violation of any term of the interested party’s authorization. Β) All monetary sums imposed in accordance with the Network Code must have been paid in full.
131 Part ΧΙ: Final Provisions
C) No violation, which could be remedied by the interested party, may be pending 2. The interested party’s application to be granted an exemption shall also include a declaration by such party regarding the date on which the conditions of the aforementioned paragraph are met. 3. The decree by the Minister of Development, by which the exemption is granted shall determine the time of commencement and expiry of such exemption. 4. In any case, the person to whom the exemption was granted shall continue to be liable, in compliance with the provisions of the Network Code, for: Α) any monetary amounts due, regulated under the Network Code and which regard the time period prior to the entry into force of the exemption, and Β) violations of the Network Code which occurred prior to the exemption entering into force and which were not remedied. 5. RAE shall keep a special record, where the details and terms of effect of the exemptions granted shall be kept. Each User may have access to this record upon request.
Article 30-3 Milestones for the implementation of the Network Code 1. The following reference dates are defined: Α) First Reference Day, the 31st of December 2009, Β) Second Reference Day, the 31st of December 2010, C) Third Reference Day, the 31st of December 2011. 2. As First Distribution Regulatory Period is defined the time period commencing on the morrow of the First Reference Day and lasting until the Third Reference Day. 3. For the First Distribution Regulatory Period no Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree shall be issued, and the provisions of the Appendixes to the Network Code instituted by the decree for the Network Code’s approval shall be in force and applicable. 4. Until the Second Reference Day the following shall be issued: Α) the Implementation Manuals established by the Network Code in compliance with Article 1-3, Β) the Instructions to Users for Access, in compliance with Article 13-4, C) the decision on the procedures for informing third parties and publicizing the information relating to the monitoring of the Network, in compliance with Article 2-2, D) the decree regarding the principles and criteria based on which the Customers who are not be subject to load shedding shall be determined, as well as the priority set for the implementation of load shedding per Customer category, in compliance with Article 10-3, Ε) Implementation Instructions for the design of the Network, in compliance with Article 1-3,
132 Part ΧΙ: Final Provisions
F) the decision on the Evaluation Regulation for applications for works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network, in compliance with Article 22-6. 5. From the date of publication of the present in the Government Gazette: Α) the terms and provisions of the existing, at the time of publication of the present, contracts between PPC S.A. and Network Users which are contrary to the provisions of the present shall not apply, Β) the validity of the provisions set forth in the Metering Management and Periodical Settlement for Network Suppliers Manual (Gov. Gaz. Β΄ 1188/12- 07-2007), shall be terminated, C) the System Operator’s obligation for keeping a Matrix on Correspondence between Load Meters and Representatives, under Article 156 of the System Operation and Power Exchange Code For Electricity, ceases for the Customers supplied by the Network, D) Article 327 of the System Operation and Power Exchange Code For Electricity ceases to be in force. 6. Until the issuance of the decree by the Minister of Development which establishes the unit charges and other factors for the calculation of Network Connection Charges, in compliance with Article 26-1, the Connection Charges for the connection of Users’ installations to the Network shall be determined based on the unit prices and parameters in force at the time of publication of the present13. 7. Until the Third Reference Day the following special provisions for the calculation of the charges for connection to the Network of Customer installations shall be applicable: Α) for Customer installations inside industrial sites (under Law 2545/1997), the “Framework Agreement for the supply of electric power to the industrial sites of the Hellenic Industrial Development Bank [ETBA]” concluded on the 9th of October 1979, between PPC and ETBA. Β) for Customer installations subsumed to rural electrification programs in compliance with the joint Decree by the Ministers of Agriculture and Industry, Energy and Technology under number F482.1/142196/10-11-1987 (Gov. Gaz. Β΄ 738/1987), this Joint Ministerial Decree. 8. Until the Third Reference Day the provisions of the decision taken by the Board of Directors of PPC numbered 5/10-01-1974 under the title “Electrification of Customer Group”, as applicable at the time of publication of the Network Code in the Government Gazette, shall be taken into account for the calculation of the Network Connection Charges. The relevant details shall be approved by RAE upon the Network Operator’s proposals.
Article 30-4 Network connection contracts for existing Users’ installations 1. Drafts for the Network Connection Contract, for all User installations operating in parallel to the Network shall be prepared, care and supervision of the Network
13 cf. Article E.I-4 note (10)
133 Part ΧΙ: Final Provisions
Operator, in compliance with the provisions of Article 13-1 and Article 13-2, and according to the applicable operation characteristics of the installations of each User and their connection to the Network, which must be forwarded by the corresponding Users as soon as possible and certainly until the Third Reference Day. 2. In case of the non-dispute of the aforementioned draft of the Contract by the corresponding User within a deadline of fifteen (15) working days from its receipt, it shall be considered that the Users proceeds with the Contract without any reservations and that the Contract may be now recognized as binding both the Network Operator and said User. In case where the User wishes the amendment of fundamental terms of the Connection Contract draft, the procedures set forth for the submission of the application for the amendment of the connection under Article 13-5 shall be followed. 3. For those Network Connection Contract which are concluded in the framework of the provisions of the present Article, the Minister of Development, upon the documented proposals made by the Network Operator and RAE’s opinion on the matter, may establish special deadlines for the fulfillment of the obligations of the Network Operator for the cases of submission of Connection Applications under Article 13-5. In any case the Network Operator must show all diligence for the gradual and timely processing of the provisions under the present Article.
Article 30-5 Other provisions 1. Where the Network Code establishes a specific obligation for the Network Operator, it is understood that both the Interconnected Network Operator and the Operator for Non-Interconnected Islands shall bear this obligation, each for the part of the Network that falls into the scope of its competence. 2. Footnotes in the text of the Network Code serve an exclusively informational purpose and are not binding, nor do they constitute provisions of the present Code. They are updated care of RAE.
134 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
APPENDIX I QUALITY OF SERVICE DURING THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD
CHAPTER AP.I - 1 POWER QUALITY
Article AP.I-1 Power quality measurements 1. The Network Operator must, until the Third Reference Day, have put into operation: Α) an information recording and centralized collection system for Long Unplanned Supply Interruptions and Planned Supply Interruptions suffered individually by each MV User and HV Producer, and Β) an information recording and centralized collection system for the main Power Quality dimensions, selectively at a sufficient number of selected Network points, so that data relating to the Power Quality that is accorded to Users in total, and the compliance with the Total Performance Limits, which may be determined in accordance, are recorded. 2. The specifications for the systems of paragraph (1) shall be pending RAE’s approval. 3. In all other cases, and also for MV Users and HV Producers until the installation of the aforementioned in paragraph (1.A) system, the individual verification of the Power Quality of a User’s installations shall be done following such User’s application, submitted to the Network Operator in compliance with Article 6-4.
Article AP.I-2 Power quality contracts 1. RAE shall approve until the Second Reference Day, the general provisions of Power Quality Contracts, in compliance with Article 6-2, following public consultation. The Network Operator shall submit its relevant proposals, in compliance with Article 6-2, at least two months in advance. 2. Users may enter Power Quality Contracts under Article 6-2 which shall enter into force from the morrow of the Second Reference Day and henceforth. 3. The Network Operator shall ensure and supervise the preparation and conclusion, as soon as possible and certainly by the Third Reference Day, of the Power Quality Contracts for all User’s installations which until the aforementioned approval of the general terms of Power Quality Contracts operate in synchronization with the Network, and for which there are special requirements in terms of their Power Quality, on the basis of which the Network Operator has designed, built, operates and maintains such connection. The Users who possess such installations must enter the as above Power Quality Contract
135 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
as soon as possible after the relevant draft has been notified to them by the Network Operator.
Article AP.I-3 Penatly clauses and considerations in favor of Users for power quality – General provisions 1. For each Network User the total annual amount of penalty clauses and considerations in its favor, based on the provisions under the present Article as a result of the violation of Individual Guarantee Limits, may not exceed 80% of the total annual Network Use Charge for such User. 2. The respective settlement shall be care of the Network Operator immediately after the end of the respective year. 3. No consequences incur the violation of Individual Guarantee Limits or Total Performance Limits of the present Article until the Second Reference Day.
Article AP.I-4 Voltage quality – Limits and consequences of their non observance 1. For every dimension of Voltage Quality, the Individual Guarantee Limits shall be defined as the corresponding voltage disturbance limits, established under the Standard EN 50160. 2. For Users who are beneficiaries for penalty clauses under Article 6-6, a penalty clause shall be paid in cases of the violation of the following Individual Guarantee Limits: Α) Limit on Supply Voltage Magnitude Variations over ten minute intervals: a penalty clause is payable to the User for each ten minute interval during which a violation occurred. The amount of such penalty clause is equal to the ratio of the Network Use Charge made to the User for the Metering Period to which such ten minute interval is included, over the total number of ten minute intervals of the Metering Period. Β) Limit on the percentage of ten minute intervals in a week during which Supply Voltage Magnitude Variations are excessive. a penalty clause will be paid to the User for each week for which there has been a violation. The amount of such penalty clause is equal to 50% of the ratio of the Network Use Charge for such User and for the Metering Period to which said week is included, over the number of weeks in the Metering Period. 3. For Users entitled to receive a consideration upon their request under Article 6-8, the provisions the provisions of the present Article shall apply. 4. In cases of violation of the remaining Individual Guarantee Limits for Power Quality, no penalty clauses or considerations shall be paid. 5. There are no Total Performance Limits for Voltage Quality.
136 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
Article AP.I-5 Planned supply interruptions – Time and manner for informing Users 1. The advance notification of Users shall be recognized as timely, in order for a Supply Interruption to be characterized as Planned under Article 5-3, only if such notification has been concluded prior to the beginning of the interruption by at least a temporal period which is determined in hours as follows: LV Users MV Users and HV Producers Time zones Time zones Supply 07:00 – 23:00 23:00 – 07:00 07:00 – 23:00 23:00 – 07:00 Interruption Excluding Including Excluding Including Duration Saturdays, Saturdays, Saturdays, Saturdays, (hours) Sundays and Sundays and Sundays and Sundays and statutory statutory statutory statutory holidays holidays holidays holidays < 3 24 24 48 48 3 – 6 48 24 72 48 > 6 72 48 120 72 Minimum time for the advance notification of Users about a planned Supply Interruption (in hours)
2. Where a planned Supply Interruption extends over more than one time zones, the minimum required time for the advance notification of Users shall be calculated as the weighted average of the time required should the Interruption had taken place in each time zone, the weighting factors being the hours during which the planned Interruption is found in each zone14. 3. Notification of Users in advance shall be considered as adequate in order for a Supply Interruption to be regarded as Planned under Article 5-3, only if the following ways of informing have been applied: Α) For LV Users: • where the interruption regards less than 1000 Users, a notice must be posted in a visible place next to the entrance of each affected property in the area where the interruption will occur, • where the interruption regards more than 1000 and less than 5000 Users, on the one hand a notice must be posted on a widely accessible point of the area where the interruption will occur, at least one such notice for every 50 Users and, on the other hand, there must be an announcement published in locally circulating press, • where the interruption regards more than 5000 Users, there must be an announcement in at least two widely circulating newspapers and by radio or television broadcasting stations. Β) For MV Users and HV Producers, each such User must be informed individually, by fax, the receipt of which must be confirmed for interruptions with duration over 1,5 hours.
14 cf. Article E.I-5 example 2
137 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
4. In case where the provisions of paragraph (3) are not complied with, the interruption shall be considered as Unplanned for the calculation of statistical indexes for Supply Continuity and the control on the adherence to the Individual Guarantee Limits, for Users who were not adequately informed under the above about the planned Supply Interruption. 5. The provisions of the present Article shall not be amended by the provisions made in the Power Quality Manual with regard to the First Distribution Regulatory Period.
Article AP.I-6 Continuity of supply – Individual guarantee limits and consequences of the non observance thereof 1. The following Individual Guarantee Limits are set for the Supply Continuity of Users during the First Distribution Regulatory Period.: Α) Maximum duration of Supply Interruptions: i) For Planned Supply Interruptions: 12 hours. ii) For Unplanned Supply Interruptions: 12 hours. Β) Maximum annual number of Supply Interruptions for one User, with a duration exceeding four hours each: i) For MV Users and HV Producers of the Interconnected Network: 5 ii) For LV Users of the Interconnected Network: 6 iii) For MV Users and HV Producers of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 715 iv) For HV Users of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 816 2. The Network Operator shall prepare-draw up a list, up to two months prior of the Second Reference Day, which shall be approved by RAE, of the regions exhibiting a seasonal only operation of User’s installations, and also of the particularly remote regions, which fall under the scope of the provisions of Article 6-1 paragraph (4). For Users whose installations are located in such regions: (a) the above limits for the maximum duration of Supply Interruptions shall be augmented by 6 hours, and (b) the above limits for the maximum annual number of major Supply Interruptions for one User shall be augmented by 2 Interruptions. 3. For Users who are beneficiaries of penalty clauses under Article 6-6, each case of violation of the above Individual Guarantee Limits from the morrow of the Second Reference Day and thereafter, shall bear the following consequences: Α) For each violation of the maximum duration of Supply Interruptions a penalty clause shall be forfeit to the User and by the Network Operator, the amount of which shall be determined as follows: i) For domestic Customers: 5€ for every hour in which the limit is exceeded
15 cf. Article E.I.-4 note 4 16 cf. Article E.I.-4 note 4
138 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
ii) For other Users: 15€ for every hour in which the limit is exceeded Β) For each violation of the maximum annual number of Supply Interruptions for one User, with a duration exceeding four hours each, a penalty clause shall be forfeit to the User and by the Network Operator, the amount of which shall be determined as follows: i) For domestic Customers: 15€ for each Supply Interruption with a duration exceeding four hours in excess of the maximum number for such Interruptions. ii) For other Users: 50€ for each Supply Interruption with a duration exceeding four hours in excess of the maximum number for such Interruptions. 4. For Users entitled to receive a consideration upon their request under Article 6-8, the provisions under Article 6-7 shall apply. 5. The violation of the Individual Guarantee Limits under the present Article shall bear no consequences until the Second Reference Day.
Article AP.I-7 Continuity of supply – Total performance limits and consequences of the non observance thereof 1. The provisions of the present Article shall enter into force on the morrow of the Second Reference Day. 2. The following Total Performance Limits for Supply Continuity provided by the Network are set: Α) The maximum numerical value for System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI) – f∆(Χ), calculated for both Planned Supply Interruptions and Long Unplanned Supply Interruptions: i) For all MV Users and HV Producers of the Interconnected Network: 3.4 interruptions per annum ii) For all LV Users of the Interconnected Network: 3.9 interruptions per annum. iii) For all MV Users and HV Producers of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 4.4 interruptions per annum17 iv) For all LV Users of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 4.9 interruptions per annum18 Β) The maximum numerical value for System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI) – t∆(X), calculated in toto for Planned Supply Interruptions and Long Unplanned Supply Interruptions, as their sum with weighting factors of 0.5 and 1.0 respectively: i) For all MV Users and HV Producers of the Interconnected Network: 290 minutes of the hour per annum
17 cf. Article E.I.-4 note 4 18 cf. Article E.I.-4 note 4
139 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
ii) For all LV Users of the Interconnected Network: 320 minutes of the hour per annum iii) For all MV Users and HV Producers of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 380 minutes of the hour per annum iv) For all LV Users of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 410 minutes of the hour per annum 3. For each one hundredth unit by which each one of the above Total Performance Limits is exceeded on the morrow of the Second Reference Day and thereafter, a charge equal to 0.1‰ (ten per mille) of the Annual Consideration for the Network Owner established under Article 27-3 shall apply. 4. The following Anticipated Quality Limits for the numerical value of the Customer Average Interruption Duration Index (CAIDI) – t∆(X), calculated in toto for all Planned Supply Interruptions and Long Unplanned Supply Interruptions, as their sum with weighting factors of 0.5 and 1.0 respectively: i) For all MV Users and HV Producers of the Interconnected Network: 230 minutes of the hour per annum. ii) For all LV Users of the Interconnected Network: 255 minutes of the hour per annum. iii) For all MV Users and HV Producers of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 300 minutes of the hour per annum. iv) For all LV Users of the Non-Interconnected Islands Network: 330 minutes of the hour per annum. 5. For each one hundredth unit of excess (to smaller numerical values) for each one of the above Anticipated Quality Limits on the morrow of the Second Reference Day and thereafter, a credit equal to 0.1‰ (ten per mille) of the Annual Consideration for the Network Owner established under Article 27-3 shall apply. 6. The maximum total charge or credit under the provisions of the present Article shall be determined as the percentage of the consideration paid to the Network Owner to cover the annual cost of the Network, equal to 0.6%.
CHAPTER AP.I - 2 SERVICE QUALITY
Article AP.I-8 Service quality measurements 1. The Network Owner must by the Second Reference Day have set in operation a system for the recording and centralized collection of information on the main Service Quality dimensions, so that data on the compliance to the Total Performance Limits are collected. The specifications of such systems shall be subject to RAE’s approval following the proposals made by the Network Owner and the Network Operator’s opinion.
140 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
2. By a decree issued by RAE following the proposals made by the Network Operator, the regions of the country where the above systems for the recording and centralized collection of information relating to Service Quality dimensions shall not be installed. Such regions must be characterized by very low density and/or number of Users, due to which the de facto supply of adequate Service Quality may be reasonably anticipated without the need for such quality to be measured.
Article AP.I-9 Service Quality – Individual guarantee limits and consequences of the non observance thereof 1. The following Individual Guarantee Limits for Service Quality to Users during the First Distribution Regulatory Period are set: Α) Maximum time of intervention for the restoration of supply in cases of a meter fuse melt-down: 4 hours. Β) Maximum time for providing a Network Connection Offer: as established in Article AP.I-11. C) Maximum time for the construction of a new connection: as established in Article AP.I-11. D) Maximum time for reconnection following an interruption due to unsettled debts: on the same day if the User settles such debts by 10:00 am, otherwise one day. Ε) Maximum time for reconnection following an interruption made upon the respective User’s request: 2 working days. F) Maximum time for response to written complaints or requests of a User: i) where autopsy is required: 10 working days, ii) where autopsy is not required: 7 working days. G) Compliance with agreed meetings: The agreed meetings (prior arrangements) for the execution of works on User’ installations shall be set within a time period not exceeding 3 hours, and shall be consistently observed. Η) Informing Users on the applicable Individual Guarantee Limits on Power Quality and Service Quality: once annually, as well as on every occasion of changes thereof. I) Informing Users on the applicable Network User Charges, as well as the other charges imposed under Article 28-9, Article 29-1 and Article 29-2: once annually, as well as on every occasion of changes thereof. J) Informing Users on other applicable charges imposed in special cases: provision of detailed and informative printed material upon first demand. 2. Where any of the above Individual Guarantee Limits are exceeded, with the exception of the Limits of paragraph 1.(C), on the morrow of the Second Reference Day and thereafter, a penalty clause shall be paid to the User by the Network Operator, the amount of which is established at 15€ for LV Users and 50€ for MV Users and HV Producers.
141 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
3. Where any of the above Individual Guarantee Limits set in paragraph 1.(C) are exceeded on the morrow of the Second Reference Day and thereafter, a discount on the Network Connection Charges shall be offered to the User, the amount of which shall be determined for each working day past the deadline set each time, as the product of the division of the charges made to such User for the connection in question, divided by twice the number of days of the applicable deadline set above19. The amount of the total discount shall be refunded to the User immediately following the activation of the connection. 4. There are no consequences for the violation of Individual Guarantee Limits under the present Article until the Second Reference Day.
Article AP.I-10 Service quality – Total performance limits and consequences of the non observance thereof 1. The following Total Performance Limits on Service Quality to the Users during the First Distribution Regulatory Period are set: Α) Minimum percentage of immediately responding to telephone calls, without the need for the User to call again due to long waiting times: 70% at all times and days. Β) Minimum percentage of Users who visit the Network Operator’s service centers and are served within 50 minutes of the hour (total waiting and service time): 95%. C) Minimum percentage of Users for whom a new connection is constructed and a meter is installed without the construction of Network extensions, within 12 working days for LV Users and 24 working days for MV Users: 90%. 2. For each one hundredth unit by which the attained performance falls short of the above Total Performance Limits from the morrow of the Second Reference Day and thereafter, a charge equal to 0,1‰ (one tenth per mille) of the Annual Consideration for the Network Owner established under Article 27-3 shall apply. 3. The above Total Performance Limits on Service Quality shall not be applicable for the regions established under Article AP.I-8 paragraph (2). 4. The maximum total charge under the provisions of the present Article shall be established as a percentage of the consideration the Network Owner receives to cover the annual cost of the Network, equal to 0.3%. 5. There are no consequences for the violation of the Total Performance Limits of the present Article until the Second Reference Day.
Article AP.I-11 Deadlines for Network connection 1. The provisions of the present Article shall be applicable for the First Distribution Regulatory Period.
19 cf. Article E.I.-5 example 3
142 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
2. The Network Operator shall draw up and forward to the Users the Network Connection Offer, with an attached draft for the Network Connection Contract, as soon as possible and in any case within: Α) For a plain connection without building Network extensions: • 10 working days for LV • 17 working days for MV Β) For a connection which requires building of Network extensions: • 20 working days for the building of extensions to the LV Network • 30 working days for the building of extensions to the LV Network • 50 working days where the construction of a large extension to the Nework is required or for the connection to the Network of certain small Non- Interconnected Islands, the catalogue of which shall be approved by RAE following the proposals by the Network Operator. 3. For Network connections using an underground cable, the deadlines for the preparation of the Connection Offer shall be determined based on the above under paragraph (2.B), save for the case where the construction of Network extensions is required. 4. The deadlines set in paragraphs (2) and (3) shall be set starting on the date of submission of the respective application by the User for connection to the Network and the payment of the charges under Article 13-5 paragraph (2). 5. The maximum time for the construction of a new connection and the installation of a meter20 shall be established as follows: Α) For a plain connection without building Network extensions: • 15 working days for LV • 30 working days for MV Β) For connection requiring the construction of Network extensions: • 30 working days for LV • 75 working days for LV in cases where the construction of a major LV Network extension is required, or the construction or reinforcement of overhead S/S. • 100 working days for LV in cases where the construction of a major LV Network extension and works on the MV Network, or the construction or reinforcement of indoor S/S are required. • 50 working days for MV • 100 working days for MV in cases where the construction of a major Network extension is required. • 100 working days for the connection to the Network of small Non- Interconnected Islands established under paragraph (2.B)
20 cf. Article E.I.-4 note 5
143 Appendix Ι: Quality of Service during the First Distribution Regulatory Period
6. For Nework connections by underground cable, the deadlines for the construction of a new connection and meter installations shall be established based on the above under paragraph (5.B) as if the construction of Network extensions is required. 7. The deadlines of paragraphs (5) and (6) shall be defined-established as beginning on the acceptance date, on behalf of the User, of the respective Network Connection Offer and the fulfillment of the corresponding financial obligations. 8. For the implementation of the provisions of the present Article as large extension of the Network shall be considered the building of an overhead Network of length greater than 400 meters, or of an underground Network of length greater than 200 meters, or of a combination thereof.
144 Appendix ΙΙ: Regulatory framework for Network development during the first Distribution Regularoty Period
APPENDIX II REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR NETWORK DEVELOPMENT DURING THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD
CHAPTER AP.II - 1 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR NETWORK DEVELOPMENT DURING THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD
Article AP.II-1 Network development during the first distribution regulatory periods 1. The Regulatory Framework for Network Development for the First Distribution Regulatory Period shall be approved by the First Reference Day, by the procedure established for the amendment of the Network Code. 2. Up to three months prior of the commencement of the First Distribution Regulatory Period, the Network Operator shall submit relevant proposals, under the provisions of Article 1-4, focusing on the following development axis for the Network: Α) the setup of Network Control Centers until the Third Reference Day, and the establishment of the sphere of competence for each one, Β) the elaboration of feasibility studies for the installation in Network Control Centers of electronic systems for the monitoring and control of the Network (GIS, SCADA, DMS, etc), aiming, by the Third Reference Day, to have finalized the relevant specification and to have promulgated the relevant competitions. C) the elaboration of studies for the mass installations of Hourly LV Load Meters, aiming, by the Third Reference Day, to have finalized the corresponding specification and to have promulgated-enunciated the relevant competitions for the replacement of Non-Hourly Load Meters until 2013, at least with respect to urban areas. D) a full feasibility study for the certification of the systems employed for the monitoring of Power Quality and Service Quality, in compliance with Article 6-5 and Article 7-4. Ε) other measures for the improvement of the monitoring and control of the operation of the Network, in compliance with Article 22-2 and Article AP.I-1. F) information on the works for the aesthetic improvement of the Network, in compliance with Article 22-6, emphasizing on works for making Network lines underground. G) installation of the required systems for the recording and centralized collection of information regarding Service Quality, in compliance with Article AP.I-8.
145
Appedinx IΙΙ: Annual Network consideration for the first Distribution Regulatory Period
APPENDIX III ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION FOR THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD
CHAPTER AP.III - 1 ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION FOR THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD
Article AP.III-1 Regulated parameters of the annual Network consideration 1. The following shall apply for the First Distribution Regulatory Period: Α) The Annual Reference Consideration for Operation and Maintenance shall be: i) Χ1 million € for the year 2009, ii) Χ2 million € for the year 2010. Β) The Reference Return Interest Rate shall be: i) Χ3% for the year 2009, ii) Χ4% for the year 2010. C The Annual Reference Losses shall be: i) Χ5 MWh for the year 2009. ii) Χ6 MWh for the year 2010. D The Unit Reference Cost for Losses shall be Χ7 €/MWh of losses. 2. For each year (i) in the First Distribution Regulatory Period, the numerical value of the difference ∆Εi-2 under Article 27-3 paragraph (2), shall be set equal to zero. This value may not be modified by RAE’s decision.
147
Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
APPENDIX IV CONNECTION OF CUSTOMER INSTALLATIONS AND PARTICIPATION SYSTEM
CHAPTER AP.IV - 1 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONNECTION OF CUSTOMER INSTALLATIONS
Article AP.IV-1 LV Supply Types 1. LV Customer Supply is defined as the connecting line and other equipment of the Network used exclusively for the supply of such Customer and located between the corresponding Network/User Connection Point and the corresponding LV Network Point or MV Network Point. A LV Supply corresponds to a Load Meter, which may be supplemented by a verification meter. 2. LV Supplies are build in a standardized manner and are codified as follows: • Single-phase LV Supplies: No 03 and No 05, • Three-phase LV Supplies: No 1, No 2, Νο 3, Νο 4, Νο 5, Νο 6 and Νο 7. 3. The standardized technical characteristics of LV Supplies are established in the following table:
149 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Supply Single-Phase Three-Phase Type Νο 03 Νο 05 Νο 1 Νο 2 Νο 3 Νο 4 Νο 5 Νο 6 Νο 7 Maximum Agreed 8 12 15 25 35 55 85 135 250 Power (kVA) Participation Power 10 10 10 21 30 45 70 110 170 Meter Type 3×1/6 3×1/6 10/40 10/40 3x10/40 3×10/60 3×20/100 3×1,5/6 3×1,5/6 15/60 15/60 3×10/60 3×20/60 3×50/100 T/R 200/5 T/R 400/5 Supply Cable (mm2) 95 * 150 ** 2×6 2×16 4×6 4×16 4×25 4×50 [Cu] [Cu] Meter switchboard line 3×10 3×16 5×6 5×10 5×16 3×25+16+16 3×50+25+25 3×120+70+70 150 (mm2) Meter fuse (Α) 3×400 (Network/User 1×40 1×63 3×25 3×40 3×63 3×100 3×160 3×250 Connection Point) Switchboard fuse (Α) 1×35 1×50 3×25 3×35 3×50 3×80 3×125 3×200 3×355
* For No 6 Supplies a single-phase Supply [Αl ] 150 or X-LPE 3 × 150Al + 50Cu cable may also be used ** For No 7 Supplies a X-LPE 2(3×150Al + 50 Cu) cable may also be used
150 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Article AP.IV-2 Number of LV Supplies 1. Each LV Customer who possesses a unified space, or independent spaces which communicate internally, shall be supplied with electric power with one Supply (and, consequently, with one Load Meter). Examples of such categories are specifically: • A company housed on two adjacent spaces or in all spaces on the same floor of an apartment building, • A company housed in two or three adjacent floors or adjacent parts thereof, or all the floors of a multi-storey building with a common entrance, • A military camp or airport, • An industry with independent buildings located inside a unified pale or not, etc. 2. If inside the unified space operate secondary operations of third parties, these shall be supplied with electric power either by independent Supplies or by the Supply of the main operation under the conditions set by the Network Operator and in accordance with the will of the interested Customers. 3. An exception to the above may occur in cases where a Power Quality Contract has been concluded in compliance with Article 6-2. 4. If an LV Customer possesses independent spaces without internal communication between them and applies for the supply of electric power thereof, the case shall be treated as if regarding equal in number single Customers and shall be supplied with electric power by separate Supplies. Examples of such category are in particular: • Non adjacent spaces on the same floor, • Non adjacent floors of an apartment building.
Article AP.IV-3 Limitations on the selection of LV Supply 1. For LV Customers of all Categories set forth under Article 12-3, all types of LV Supplies may be used for the connection of their installations. As an exception the Supply No 1 is not used for the connection of the installations of Domestic Customers. 2. In the following regions LV Customer installations are connected to the Network using No 6 Supply as maximum: Limitation area the administrative boundaries of the Municipality or Community:
Attica Agios Dimitrios Kallithea Palaio Faliro Agios Ioannis Renti Moschato Piraeus Mun. of Athens Nea Ionia Tavros Egaleo Nea Smyrni Ymittos
151 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Galatsi Nea Filadelfeia Filothei Dafni Nea Chalkidona Psychico Drapetsona Neo Psychico
Limitation area the “Urban Plan” of the Municipality or Community:
Attica Agia Varvara Eleusina Megara Agia Paraskevi Elliniko Metamorfosi Agioi Anargiroi Zografos Nea Liosia Alimos Ilioupoli Nikea Maroussi Iraklio Papago Argyroupoli Kessariani Perama Voula Keratsini Peristeri Vouliagmeni Kifissia Chaidari Vyronas Korydallos Chalandri Glyfada Lykovrisi Cholargos
Macedonia – Thrace Agios Pavlos (Thessaloniki) Kozani Ptolemaida Alexandroupolis Komotini Polichni (Thessaloniki) Ampelokipoi (Thessaloniki) Menemeni Alexandria (Imathia) Veria Neapoli (Thessaloniki) Orestiada Drama Xanthi Ionia (ex. Community of Diavata – Reg, of Western Thessaloniki) Edessa Serres Florina Evosmos Stavroupolis Kilkis Mun. of Thessaloniki Sikees (Thessaloniki) Pylaia Kavala Triandria (Thessaloniki) Mun. District of Thermi Kalamaria (Thessaloniki) Eleftherio-Kordelio Mun. District of Peraia – N. (Thessaloniki) Epivates – Ag. Triada Kastoria Naousa Katerini Giannitsa
Peloponnese – Epirus – Ionian Islands Agrinio Ioannina Nafplion Aigio Kalamata Xylokastro Amaliada Corfu Patra Argostoli Kiato Preveza Argos Korinthos Pyrgos Arta Lefkada Sparti Gytheio Loutraki (Korinthos) Tripoli Zakynthos Messolonghi Messini Igoumenitsa Naupactus Kato Achaia
Central Greece Volos Livadeia Delphi
152 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Thiva Nea Ionia (Volos) Skiathos Karditsa Trikala Skopelos Lamia Chalkida Psachna Larisa Kalabaka Edipsos Baths
Remaining Island Country Agios Nikolaos Hersonissos Sitia Ermoupoli Mykonos* Chania Heraklion Mytilene Chios** Ierapetra Rethymno Settlements of the Prefecture Kos Rhodes of Chania: Kastell, Kissamos, Souda, Ag. Marina, Platania, Gerani, Maleme, Kalyvia, Georgioupoli – Kavros and Palaiochora - Panorama Areas outside of “Urban Plan” Kanoni (City of Corfu)
* The city with boundaries the ring road from the Archeological Museum up to the turn to Ornos ** The city including all areas inside the “Urban Plan” and the areas of Frourio and Commercial Centre.
3. New areas where the immediate development of underground networks is anticipated shall be included in the above table following the proposals made by the Network Operator and RAE’s approval. 4. In the remaining regions of the country LV Customer installations may be connected to the Network also by a No 7 Supply. 5. As an exception an LV Customer installation inside the regions established under paragraph (2) may be connected to the Network by a No 7 Supply under the following conditions: Α) in case of a temporary connection under Article 13-8, if, following a study conducted by the Network Operator it follows that for the supply of the Customer’s installation with electric power from the LV Network using a No 7 Supply the power of a standardized T/R (250, 400, 500 or 630 kVA per case applicable) is sufficient, possibly als with metering at the MV. Β) in case of permanent connection, if following the study conducted by the Network Operator it follows that the following conditions are simultaneously met: i) The actual length of the LV cable from the switchboard of the MV/LV S/S where the supply with electric power will be done from, to the Customer’s meter is less than 80 meters. ii) The maximum load of the MV/LV S/S from where the supply with electric power will be done, as this is estimated to be altered based, on the one hand, on the maximum load which has been recorded or is anticipated for the near future (due, for example, to new buildings under
153 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
construction) and, on the other hand, the Maximum Agreed Power of such Customer (as this will be altered), are less than 70% of the nominal power of the T/R which has been foreseen during the original design of the MV/LV S/S. iii) The technical capability for the installation of underground LV cables from the MV/LV S/S to the Customer’s Building exists. 6. Exceptionally, a Customer installation with maximum power less than 250 kVA may be connected to the LV Network provided that: (a) such connection is explicitly requested by the Customer, and (b) from the special study conducted by the Network Operator, where the capability and way for constructing such a connection to the LV Network are detailed, it follows that the need for such exemption is justified.
Article AP.IV-4 Indicative establishment of Supply type 1. The present Article is exclusively and purely informational in nature, in order for LV Customers to determine more efficiently the maximum power of their installations and the indicated type of Supply. 2. The type of Supply for each LV Customer is established by the installed power determined by the Customer in the Connection Application, or by the electrician- installer in the Installer Solemn Declaration (I.S.D.), from load diversity or concurrency factor estimated and declared by such, and from other potential operating conditions deemed to affect the required maximum power supply of the installations. 3. The Installed Capacity is defined as the sum of the power of installed devices and machines of an LV Customer. 4. If the power of the motors is expressed on the Connection Application or the Installer Solemn Declaration in HP or kW, it must be converted to kVA by multiplying the HP or kW number with constant factors of 0.86 or 1.17 respectively. The decimal numbers which follow from the reduction of HP and kW to kVA shall be rounded off by approximation of the first decimal (e.g. 8.14 = 8.1, 8.16 = 8.2 etc). 5. For determining the load diversity factor the following table may be employed: Customer Category Load Diversity Factor Domestic: 0,6 Commercial: Hotels 0,6 Cleaning Shops 0,8 Hairdresser’s Salons 0,9 Food product Shops 0,9 Other Shops 0,9 Agricultural: Pumping stations 1,0 except in the case where there is a reservoir Industrial: Determined in accordance with the estimation made by the competent electrician-installer
154 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
6. In order to determine the required maximum power for each particular case, the Installed Capacity will be multiplied by the load diversity factor valid for such case. The product gives the required maximum power and from this the indicated Supply type21 shall be selected, based on the table of Supply types under Article AP.IV-1.
CHAPTER AP.IV - 2 PARTICIPATION SYSTEM FOR LV CUSTOMERS
Article AP.IV-5 Distances of LV Customer buildings from Network points 1. LV Network Points or MV Network Points shall be defined as the operating installations of the LV Network or the MV Network respectively, where Supplies of Customer22 installations may be connected. Specifically: Α) LV Network Points are: • every pylon bearing phase conductors and neutral. Pylons without phase conductors but serving only Street and Square Lighting (SSL) purposes, shall be considered as LV Network Points provided that the installation of phase conductors does not require their replacement and, in addition, that the neutering from the S/S fusebox condition is met. Supply pylons smaller than 10 meters, or Supply columns or anti-drag-head columns are not considered as LV Network Points, • every wall-mounted LV Network point, • every underground LV Network point, • the fusebox of the MV/LV S/S (overhead, ground or closed space) or the terminals of the MV/LV T/R if no such fusebox exists. Β) MV Network Points are: • every pylon bearing MV conductors, • each point of the underground MV Network. C) Not considered as LV Network Points or MV Network Points are the LV or MV lines for the exclusive serving of existing Customers under Power Quality Contracts, the LV or MV lines constructed for the serving of Customers who have been included in the categories of the special cases for the calculation of Connection Charges, in compliance with the provisions of Article 24-3 paragraphs (1) and (2) and the LV or MV lines which have been built exclusively for the connection of electricity generating stations with the MV/LV or the HV/MV S/Ss. 2. Customer’s Building is defined as: • the building of the Customer, or
21 cf. example in Article E.I-5 paragraph 4 22 cf. note in Article E.I-4 paragraph 9
155 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
• each legal building, in case where the Customer possesses a complex of building in a single space, or • the Supply column, provided the meter is installed at the same point to such, and that this point lies on the boundary of the plot on the side of the access road. 3. For the calculation of the distances between the Customer Building and the LV Network Point or the MV Network Point, the following shall be applicable: Α) The length (in meters) of the shortest imaginable straight line connecting the Customer’s Building with the nearest to it LV Network Point or MV Network Point is calculated. Β) For this calculation the following shall not be taken into account: • possible in-between natural or artificial obstacles (hills, buildings, etc), • balconies, ledges and the such of the Customer’s Building, • the actual length of the network that will be constructed or its routing. C) Where building including residencies or offices and shops are to be connected and for which the meter will be installed in the space of a shop, the distance is measured from the nearest point in the shop, while should it be installed in the general configuration of the meter complex, the distance is measured from the nearest point of the buildings or apartment buildings. 4. In case where a single Network Connection Application is filed by a LV Customer, the following distances are set: Α) Distance L of the Installations of a LV Customer from the Network is defined as the distance (in meters) between the Customer’s Building and the nearest to it LV Network Point. Β) Distance R of the Installations of a LV Customer from the Network is defined as the distance (in meters) between the Customer’s Building and the nearest to it existing LV/MV S/S. C) Distance Lκ of the Installations of a LV Customer from the Network is defined as the distance (in meters) between the Customer’s Building and the nearest to it MV Network Point. 5. In case where a joint Network Connection Application is filed by a group of more than one LV Customers, under Article 13-6 paragraph 5, the following distances are defined: Α) Distnace Lπ of the Installations of a Group of LV Customers from the Network is defined as the length (in meters) of the nearest crooked line connecting points in each Customer’s Building of such group of LV Customers and terminating or traversing the nearest LV Network Point. In cases of a group of LV Customers where more than one existing LV Network Points interfere or are neighboring to the Buildings of such Customers, the crooked line may not be continuous, but, depending on the configuration of the Customers’ Buildings and the LV Network Points to consist of individual crooked lines or straight segments. In such case the
156 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
distance Lπ shall be calculated as the sum of the lengths of the individual crooked lines and possible straight segments. The selection of the existing LV Network Point(s) shall be done in such a manner as to ensure that the ensuing crooked lines and straight segments are of the shortest possible length. When the group of LV Customers refers to an apartment building, then distance Lπ is the distance (in meters) from such apartment building to the nearest to it LV Network Point. Β) Distance Rπ of the Installations of a Group of LV Customers from the Network is defined as the length (in meters) of the nearest crooked line connecting points in each Customer’s Building of the group of LV Customers and terminating or traversing the nearest existing LV/MV S/S. In cases of Installations of a Group of LV Customers with more than one existing LV/MV S/Ss, the crooked line may not be continuous, but depending on the configuration of the Customers’ Buildings and the LV/MV S/Ss may consist of individual crooked lines or/and straight segments. In such case distance Rπ shall be the sum of the individual crooked lines and possible straight segments. The selection of the existing MV/LV S/S(s) shall be done in such a manner as to ensure that the ensuing crooked lines and straight segments, are of the shortest possible length. When the group of LV Customers refers to an apartment building, then distance Rπ is the distance (in meters) of such apartment building from the nearest to it existing MV/LV S/S. C) Distance Lκπ of the Installations of a Group of LV Customers from the Network is defined as the length (in meters) of the shortest crooked line connecting a point in each Customer Building belonging to the Group of LV Customers and terminating or traversing the nearest existing MV Network Point. In the special case where the existing MV Network Points are placed around the space of a group of LV Customers, or surround such space, the aforementioned crooked line may not be continuous, but may consist of individual crooked lines or straight segments. In such case the distance Lκπ is the sum of the lengths of such individual crooked lines and possible straight segments. The selection of the existing MV Network Point(s) shall be done in such a manner as to ensure that the ensuing crooked lines and straight segments are of the shortest length possible. When the group of LV Customers refers to an apartment building, then distance Lκπ is the distance (in meters) of such apartment building from the nearest to it existing MV Network Point.
157 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Article AP.IV-6 LV Customer connection charge Districts 1. In order to implement the Participation System for LV Customers, the country shall be subdivided into three Districts for LV Connection Charge. 2. LV Connection Charge District A shall include the areas inside the administrative boundaries of the following municipalities and communities in the Prefecture of Attica: Agia Varvara Ekali Nea Chalkidona Agia Paraskevi Eleusina Neo Psychico Agios Dimitrios Elliniko Nea Liosia Agios Ioannis Renti Zografos Nikea Agioi Anargyroi Ilioupoli Peania Mun. of Athens Iraklio Palaio Faliro Egaleo Kessariani Papago Alimos Kallithea Mun. of Piraeus Maroussi Keratsini Penteli Argyroupoli Kifissia Perama Aspropyrgos Korydallos Peristeri Vari Lykovrisi Pefki Voula Mandra Pikermi Vouliagmeni Melissia Tavros Vrilissia Metamorfosi Ymittos Vyronas Moschato Filothei Galatsi Nea Erythrea Chaidari Glyfada Nea Ionia Chalandri Dafni Nea Penteli Cholargos Drapetsona Nea Smyrni Psychico Drosia Nea Filadelfeia
3. LV Connection Charge District B shall include the areas inside of the “Urban Plan” of the following municipalities and communities where underground networks exist or are anticipated to be developed in the immediate future: Attica Megara Macedonia – Thrace Agios Pavlos Stavroupolis (Thessaloniki) Alexandroupolis Sikees (Thessaloniki) Ampelokipoi Triandria (Thessaloniki) (Thessaloniki) Veria Eleftherio-Kordelio (Thessaloniki) Drama Naousa Edessa Giannitsa Evosmos Ptolemaida Mun. of Thessaloniki Polichni (Thessaloniki) Kavala Alexandria (Imathia)
158 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Kalamaria (Thessaloniki) Orestiada Kastoria Ionia (ex. Community of Diavata) Katerini Florina Komotini Kilkis Menemeni Pylaia Neapoli (Thessaloniki) Mun. District of Thermi Xanthi Mun. District of Peraia – N. Epivates – Ag. Triada Serres (Thessaloniki) Peloponnese – Epirus – Islands of the Ionian Sea Agrinio Lefkada Aigio Loutraki (Korinthos) Amaliada Messolonghi Argostoli Naupactus Argos Nafplion Arta Xylokastro Gytheio Patra Zakynthos Preveza Igoumenitsa Pyrgos Ioannina Sparti Kalamata Tripoli Corfu Messini Kiato Kato Achaia Korinthos Central Greece Volos Trikala Thiva Chalkida Karditsa Kalabaka Lamia Delphi Larisa Skiathos Livadeia Skopelos Nea Ionia (Volos) Psachna Edipsos Baths Remaining Island Country Agios Nikolaos Mytilene Ermoupoli Rethymno Heraklion Rhodes Ierapetra Sitia Kos Chania Hersonissos Chios** Mykonos* Settlements of the Prefecture of Chania: Kastell, Kissamos, Souda, Ag. Marina, Platania, Gerani, Maleme, Kalyvia, Georgioupoli – Kavros and Palaiochora – Panorama
* The city with boundaries the ring road from the Archeological Museum up to the turn to Ornos ** The city including all areas inside the “Urban Plan” and the areas of Frourio and Commercial Centre.
159 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
4. LV Connection Charge District B also includes the area (outside of the Urban Plan) Canoni of the Municipality of Corfu. New areas where the immediate development of underground networks is foreseen, shall be included in the LV Connection Charge District B, following the proposals made by the Network Operator and RAE’s approval 5. LV Connection Charge District C includes the remaining areas of the country.
Article AP.IV-7 General formula for the calculation of LV Customer Participation 1. The amount of charges to each LV Customer (Σ) for the connection of its installations to the LV Network, that is the Participation of such Customer to the connection cost, shall be calculated as follows:
Σ = Σπ + Σα + Σδ where:
Σπ : the individual-allocated participation in the cost of the Supply which is build for the connection of the Customer’s installations, calculated under Article AP.IV-8.
Σα : the individual participation in the cost of existing Network installations, which are anticipated to be utilized to supply the installations of the Customer under consideration, calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-9.
Σδ : the individual participation of the Customer in the cost for the extension and reinforcement of LV, MV lines and MV/LV S/Ss, which regards the extension and reinforcement works for the Network necessary for the supply of such Customer’s installations. Its amount is calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-10 in case of a Connection Application submitted by a single Customer or in compliance with Article AP.IV-11 in case of a joint Connection Application by a group of more than one Customers. This individual participation Σδ shall also be borne by LV Customers whose connection required the construction of reinforcement of the LV, MV Network or MV/LV S/Ss, as well as the LV Customers whose connection directly or indirectly initiates the construction of Network works. 2. In the aforementioned calculation of the Connection Charges for an LV Customer only the individual participations corresponding to the particular case shall be taken into account, while the amount of the remaining23 shall be set to zero. 3. The parameters for the calculation of the Participation of LV Customers for every cost element under the above, are established under Article 26-1.
23 cf. example in Article E.I-5 paragraph 5
160 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Article AP.IV-8
Calculation of individual participation in the cost of Supply - Σπ 1. All Customers for the supply of electric power to whose installations a Supply is constructed, shall bear the individual participation in the cost of the Σπ Supply, based on the approved in Article 26-1 unit prices. 2. Where: (a) the LV Customer’s Installation Distance from the Network is greater than 30m. (L>30), (b) the connection is feasible with a simple Supply and a Supply cable over 30m. and up to 60m. long, and (c) the extension of the LV Network is not possible, a participation surcharge on the cost of Supply Σπ will be paid, in compliance with Article AP.IV-16.
Article AP.IV-9 Calculation of individual participation in the cost of existing installations - Σα 1. All LV Customers must pay their individual participation to the cost of the existing installations Σα .
2. Exceptionally, the participation to the cost of the existing installations Σα is zero (0) in the cases of Extraordinary Temporary Connections to the Network, in compliance with Article 13-8 paragraph 2(C).
3. Individual participation Σα is calculated based on the following information: Α) Customer Category, Β) Supply type, under Article AP.IV-1, and C) LV Connection Charge District in which the Customer Building is located, in compliance with Article AP.IV-6.
4. Individual participation Σα is calculated as follows:
Σα = α × (Ν - 10) where α parameter (in €/kVA) determined under Article 26-1, Ν the Participation Power.
Article AP.IV-10 Calculation of individual participation of a single LV Customer in the Network extension and reinforcement cost - Σδ
1. The individual participation Σδ for single LV Customers submitting a Network Connection Application shall be calculated under the present Article based on continuous (not gradual) first degree functions, taking into account the distances from the existing LV or MV network or from an existing MV/LV S/S established in accordance with Article AP.IV-5 (the symbols for distances of that Article shall be followed). 2. For LV Customers with a No 03, 05, 1, 2 or 3 Supply, their individual participation Σδ is calculated as follows: Α) if 0 < L ≤ 30m, then
161 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System
Σδ = 0, Β) if 30m < L ≤ 200m, then
Σδ = Α1 × (L - 30) where Α1 parameter (in €/m) determined in accordance with Article 26-1. C) if 200m < L, then
Σδ = Α1 × 170 + 1,5 × A1 × (L - 200) where Α1 the above parameter (in €/m).
D) if 350m < L, an alternative calculation of individual participation Σδ based on the relation that follows is assessed and the smaller Σδ for the Customer is selected:
Σδ = Υ + δ × Lκ where Υ (in €) and δ (in €/m)are parameters established under Article 26-1. The value of parameter δ is differentiated in the cases where the nearest MV Network is overhead or underground.
3. For LV Customers with a No 4, 5 or 6 Supply, the individual participation Σδ is calculated as follows:
Α) Σδ = Α2 ×R where parameter A2 (in €/m) is established in accordance with Article 26-1.
Β) if 400m Σδ = Υ + δ × Lκ where Υ (in €) and δ (in €/m) the parameters determined above. 4. For LV Customers with a No 7 Supply, the individual participation Σδ is calculated as follows: Α) for LV Customers inside regions where they may connect to the Network using a No 7 Supply, in compliance with Article AP.IV-3: Σδ = Υ + δ × Lκ where Υ (in €) and δ (in €/m) the parameters determined above. Β) For LV Customers inside regions where the connection to the Network is done in accordance with Article AP.IV-3 with a No 6 Supply maximum and No 7 Supply is offered only exceptionally, the individual participation Σδ is determined as the total of the real expenses incurred for the necessary extension and reinforcement works on the LV, MV Network and the MV/LV S/S. C) Specifically for closed space MV/LV S/Ss, the cost of paragraph (B) also includes the value of the space of the S/S and the expenses for its configuration. The value of the space is regarded as: i) In the case of the purchase of such space by the Network Owner: 162 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System (1) where such purchase is realized for the connection of a particular Customer, the actual total cost of the purchase of the space, augmented by the transfer tax, notary expenses etc. (2) where such purchase has been completed (by declaration or under Law 4483/65) prior to the appearance of this particular Customer, the current value of the space based on the system for the objective determination of real-estate value, and where such system has not been applied, based on the evaluation made by the competent Public Finance Department. Should the value of the space calculated in accordance with the present paragraph be less than the actual total cost incurred for the purchase of such space (including the above augmentations) the actual total cost for the purchase of the space shall be taken into account. ii) In case where the Network Owner rents the space, as value of the space shall be regarded the current value of the space based on the system for the objective determination of real estate value, and where this System has not been applied, on the evaluation made by the competed Public Finance Department, independently from the time of the leasehold (prior or after the appearance of the particular Customer). In case where an LV Customer who applies to be connected by a No 7 Supply, in a region where such Supply is offered only exceptionally, grants to the Network Owner a free space for the installation of a closed space MV/LV S/S, the Customer in question shall pay only for the actual expenses of the works, excluding the value of the space. Article AP.IV-11 Calculation of the individual participation of a group of LV Customers in the cost for the extension and reinforcement of the Network - Σδ 1. The individual participation Σδ for group of LV Customers submitting a joint Network Connection Application, shall be calculated in accordance with the present Article, taking into account the distances from the existing LV or MV Network or from an existing MV/LV S/S, established under Article AP.IV-5 (the symbols for distances of said Article are applicable). 2. The total individual participation Σδ-Α for the subset of Customers in said group with a No 03, 05, 1, 2 or 3 Supply, is calculated as follows: Α) if Lπ ≤ 30µ, Σδ-Α = 0, Β) if 30m < Lπ ≤ 200m, then Σδ-Α = Α1 × (Lπ - 30) where parameter A1 (in €/µ) is determined under Article 26-1 C) if 200 < Lπ, then Σδ-Α = Α1 × 170 + 1,5 × A1 × (Lπ - 200) where A1 the above parameter (in €/µ) 163 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System C) if 350m < Lπ, an alternative calculation of the individual participation Σδ-Α under the following relation is assessed and the smaller Σδ-Α for the subset of Customers is selected: Σδ-Α = Υ + δ × Lκπ where Υ (in €) and δ (in €/m) are parameters established under Article 26-1. The value of parameter δ is differentiated with respect to cases where the nearest MV Network is overhead or underground. 3. The individual participation Σδ for each LV Customer of the group connected with a Νο 03, 05, 1, 2 or 3 Supply, is calculated as follows: Σδ = Σδ-Α / πΑ where πΑ the number of LV Customers in the group connected with a Νο 03, 05, 1, 2 or 3 Supply. 4. The total individual participation Σδ-Β for the subset of Customers in the group with a No 4, 5 or 6 Supply is calculated as follows: Α) Σδ-Β = Α2 ×Rπ where A2 is a parameter (in €/m) determined under Article 26-1. Β) if 400 m < R, an alternative calculation of the participation Σδ-Β under the following relation is assessed and the smaller Σδ-Β for such subset of Customers is selected: Σδ-Β = Υ + δ × Lκπ where Υ (in €) and δ (in €/m) the parameters determined above. 5. The individual participation Σδ for each LV Customer belonging to the group and who is connected with a Νο 4, 5 or 6 Supply, is calculated as follows: Σδ = Σδ-Β / πΒ where πΒ the number of LV Customers in the group who are connected with a Νο 4, 5 or 6 Supply. 6. The individual participation Σδ of Customers in the group with a No 7 Supply is calculated as if regarding the Connection Application of a single Customer, in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-10 paragraph 4. 7. Where more than one MV/LV S/S are required for the connection to the Network of a group of LV Customers submitting a joint Connection Application, the in the calculation instead of value (Y), value (n × Υ) must be taken into account, where (n) the number of required MV/LV S/Ss. Article AP.IV-12 Calculation of the Participation of LV Customers for cases of connection power increase up to a No 6 Supply 1. The calculation of the Participation of LV Customers in cases of increase of the connection power by the modification of a Supply up to No 6, shall be done in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. The amount of the charge made to each LV Customer (Σ) in such cases is calculated as follows: Σ = Σα + Σδ 164 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System 2. The individual participation Σα is calculated as follows: Σα = α × (Ν΄ - Ν) where: α parameter (in €/kVA) established under Article 26-1. Especially for cases of the increase of domestic three-phase Customer connections, the values of this parameter are gradual. Ν΄ the Participation Power of the new Supply, Ν the Participation Power of the existing Supply. It is clarified that in order for participation Σα to be calculated with respect to domestic Customers, power N shall be considered as covering the first N kVA, while the remaining shall follow from the difference Ν΄ - Ν. 3. The individual participation Σδ is calculated as follows: Α) Where both the existing Supply and the new Supply are Νο 03 or 05 or 1 or 2 or 3, participation Σδ shall be equal to zero (0). Β) Where both the existing Supply and the new Supply are No 4 or 5 or 6, participation Σδ shall be equal to zero (0). C) Where the existing Supply is Νο 03 or 05 or 1 or 2 or 3, and the new Supply is Νο 4 or 5 or 6, participation Σδ is calculated in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-10 and Article AP.IV-11. Article AP.IV-13 Calculation of the Participation of LV Customers for cases of connection power increase up to a No 7 Supply 1. The calculation of the Participation of LV Customers in cases of increase of the connection power by the modification of the Supply to No 7 is done in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. The amount of the charge to each LV Customer (Σ) in such cases is the sum of the following factors: Α) the individual participation Σα corresponding to the power increase and is calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-12 paragraph 2, Β) the individual participation Σδ calculated as the sum of expenses required for the extension and reinforcement of the MV Network and the LV Network. as well as for the necessary MV/LV S/S and the respective equipment. Included is also the value of the space for the MV/LV S/S, which is calculated in compliance with the provisions under of Article AP.IV-10 paragraph 4(C). 2. In areas where there exists the possibility of connected LV Customer’s installations to the Network also by a No7 Supply, under Article AP.IV-3, a maximum limit will be set for the amount of individual participation Σδ, and equal to the contribution Σδ corresponding to new LV Customer and calculated under Article AP.IV-10 paragraph 4. 165 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-14 Calculation of LV Customer Participation in cases of connection power reduction 1. The calculation of the participation of LV Customers in cases of connection power reduction is done in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. The amount of the charge to each LV Customer (Σ) in such cases is the sum of expenses incurred for the modification of the Supply, based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices. 2. The Connection Charges paid by LV Customers in the past are not refundable in the cases of the present Article. Article AP.IV-15 Calculation of LV Customer’s Participation in cases of connections consolidation 1. Connection consolidation shall mean the shutting off of all existing Supplies for the same LV Customer except one, and the potential power increase for the remaining Supply, following the Customer’s suggestion. 2. The consolidation of the connections of an LV Customer shall be done expenses of the Network Owner, provided that the Participation Power of the final Supply does not exceed the sum of the Participation Power of the originally existing Supplies. In the opposite case, the calculation of the Participation of such LV Customer shall be done in compliance with Article AP.IV-12 and Article AP.IV- 13 taking into account the originally existing Supplies and the sum of the Participation Power thereof. 3. Possible negative charges (credits) ensuing in the cases of the present Article are not refundable to LV Customers. Article AP.IV-16 Calculation of additional charges to LV Customer in special cases of connection works 1. In special cases where for the connection of a LV Customer’s installations Network works are constructed which are different from those that would have been constructed under normal circumstances based on the standardizations applicable under the Network Code, either following the LV Customer’s request or because such works are necessitated by special provisions (regarding, for example, archeological spaces, HCAA regulations, etc), the Customer shall be borne with the additional to the calculated as above Connection Charges, in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. 2. In cases where an underground Supply, instead of an overhead one, is constructed, the additional cost for the LV Customer is calculated as the difference between the construction cost of the two connections, based on the approved, under Article 26-1, unit prices. 3. LV Customer installations where L>30m. may be connected to the Network without extending the LV Network, but by supporting the Supply cable on an intermediate building, provided that the length of electric lines from the 166 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Network’s LV pillar up to said Customer’s meter does not exceed 60m. In such case: Α) if the Supply cable is less than 30m. long, there are not additional charges made to the Customer. Β) if the Supply cable is greater than 30m. long, the individual participation Σπ is increased by an amount which is calculated based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices, separately for single-phase and three-phase connections. 4. The following are clarified for the cases of paragraph (4): Α) the construction of Supplies with cable supported on buildings owned by third parties is exceptional and applicable only to those cases where it is fully justified by local conditions (for example, on the outskirts of small settlements where the subsequent erection of a new building is not probable and, consequently, neither is the further extension of the LV Network), and provided that the intermediate building has already been supplied with electric power or there is well-grounded speculation that it will be supplied. Β) should for the connection of the LV Customer’s installations be required that the Supply cable by which the intermediate building is supplied with electric power be replaced, then in order to determine the length of the cable, if, that is, it is larger or shorter than 30m, and to determine the additional charge under the above, the whole of the cable from the LV Network pylon to the Customer meter will be included. 5. In cases where the location of an LV Customer’s meter, of a connection configuration for a group of Customers (for example the supply configuration for an apartment block) must change, the additional surcharge for the LV Customers is calculated as follows: Α) for transferring the meter’s or connection configuration’s location prior to the commencement of the construction of the respective connection works by the Network Owner and up to 1m. maximum from the location initially determined by the Network Owner, LV Customers shall not be subject to additional surcharges. Β) for shifting the location of the meter of an individual LV Customer prior to the commencement of the respective connection works by the Network Owner and provided that the additional length of the required cable does not exceed 10m., the Customer shall be subject to an additional surcharge approved under Article 26-1, separately for single-phase or three-phase connections (without current T/R). 6. In cases where there is a transfer of the location of the meter or the connection configuration for an LV Customer after the commencement of the construction of the respective connection works by the Network Owner, an additional surcharge is made to the Customer, which is the sum of the following factors: Α) the difference in the connection charges which follows the realization of the connection in the way suggested by the Customer against the way originally planned for by the Network Owner, with a minimum amount approved under Article 26-1. 167 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Β) the expenses incurred by the Network Owner for the construction of works which are no longer necessary for the connection of the Customer’s installations. 7. Where following a request by an LV Customer under Article 13-6 paragraph (6) the connection works are constructed in such as manner as to provide with the capability of a future increase of the Maximum Agreed Power or and of the number of meters or Supplies, an additional surcharge shall be made to Customers, corresponding to the actual additional expenses for the installation of the reinforced connection cable or other equipment. Article AP.IV-17 Calculation of LV Customer’s Participation for temporary connections to the Network 1. Customer Participation for temporary Network connections under Article 13-8 is established in compliance with the provisions of the Participation System applicable for permanent connections and the specific provisions of the present Article. 2. If the duration of the Network connection for not exceed one (1) year, then half of factor Σα shall be taken into account for the determination of Participation Σ. The corresponding connections will be terminated upon the completion of the year and the Supply is removed, unless the LV Customer timely and legally applies for the extension or finalization of the connection, whereupon it is charged with the remaining half of Σα factor, in accordance with the approved unit charges applicable at the time of the extensions or finalization. 3. In cases of extraordinary temporary supply of electric power under Article 13-8, the charge made to LV Customers must initially cover the budgeted actual cost of the connection, which at the expiry of the activation time of the connection, is compensated for with the outturn calculated total expenses incurred by the Network Owner for the works regarding the installation and removal of the connection equipment which were carried out, with the minimum set equal to the amount of the individual participation calculated for a simple Supply (Σπ). Article AP.IV-18 Calculation of LV Customer’s Participation for connections exceeding the power limit In the extraordinary cases of LV Network connections where the Maximum Agreed Power needs to be greater then that corresponding to a No 7 Supply, for permanent or temporary connections, the Connection Charge for Customers shall be equal to the Participation following from the Participation System for MV Customers. For the implementation of these provisions for this particular case, the MV Supply includes all Network installations from the point of arrival on the MV/LV S/S of the conductor or MV cable and up to the LV meter installation. Installation cost includes ownership cost for the MV/LV S/S space, established under Article AP.IV-10 paragraph (4.C), the provisions of said Article proportionately implemented also in the case of open S/S. 168 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-19 Calculation of additional charges made to LV Customers for connections exhibiting extraordinary specifications 1. In the cases of the connection of LV Customer’s installations exhibiting extraordinary specification, under Article 24-3, such LV Customers are subject to additional charges, in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. 2. In the aforementioned cases, the following are calculated: Σδ in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-7, ∆ the actual cost for the extension and reinforcement of LV, MV lines and MV/LV S/Ss, which regards the Network extension and reinforcement works necessary for the supply of the installations of the LV Customer in question, calculated based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices. 3. Where ∆ > Σδ , LV Customer shall be additionally charged with the difference (∆ - Σδ), and pay a budgeted price of such, which will be settled ex post based on the actual quantities and characteristics as they ensued for the work. Article AP.IV-20 Calculation of additional charges made to LV Customers for connections in inaccessible regions 1. In cases of the connection of LV Customer’s installations located in inaccessible regions, under Article 24-3, such LV Customers are subject to additional charges, in compliance with the provisions of the present Article. 2. In the aforementioned cases, the following are calculated: Σπ in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-7, Σδ in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-7, ∆ the actual cost of the Supply and the extension and reinforcement of LV, MV lines and MV/LV S/Ss, which regards the Network extension and reinforcement works necessary for the supply of the installations of the LV Customer in question, calculated based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices. 3. where (∆ > Σπ + Σδ), LV Customer is charged with the difference [∆ – (Σπ+Σδ) ], and pays its budgeted price, ex post settled based on the actual quantities and characteristics as they ensued for the work. 4. If a part of the installations constructed for the connection of a LV Customer is located in an inaccessible region, the Participation for such Customer is determined as follows: Α) for the part of the installations located in an inaccessible region based on the aforementioned provisions of the present Article. Β) for the remainder of the installations, based on the provisions applicable under ordinary circumstances. 169 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-21 Additional charges made to a group of LV Customers in special connection cases The provisions under Article AP.IV-16 up to Article AP.IV-20 are proportionately implemented in cases of the submission of a joint Connection Application by a group of LV Customers, and for those Customers in such group for whom they are applicable. Article AP.IV-22 Calculation of the Participation of Municipalities and Communities for Street and Square Lighting (SSL) 1. The Participation of a Municipality or Community applying for the connection of exclusively Street and Square Lighting (SSL) installations is calculated based on the provisions of the Participation System for cases of individual Customers. 2. In the general formula of Article AP.IV-7 the parameters which do not regard the specific case of SSL connection shall be set equal to zero (0). For example: (a) where no Supply is constructed, Σπ and Σα are set to zero (Σπ = Σα = 0), (b) where lighting objects are installed in an existing LV Network, Participation is set to zero (Σ = 0). 3. In case where the Network Owner proceeds with Network arrangements and there is a need to construct a new SSL Supply, no Participation will be paid by the Municipality or Community. On the contrary, the Municipality or Community will encumber participation Σπ under Article AP.IV-7, if the construction of the new SSL Supply is called for due to an increase in the SSL load. 4. The value of parameter Σδ includes the participation based on the number of installed LV pylons, based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices, without taking into account the buttresses and the anti-drag-head pylons and independently of whether lighting fixtures are installed on all pylons. The per pylon surcharge is not applicable for the new Network necessary for the new SSL Supply or for the increase of the existing one covered by participation Σδ. 5. The as above determined participation per pylon, covers only the expenses for the extension of the SSL network and does not include the expense for the installation of the lighting fixtures (arms, lighting fixtures and lamps). The replacement of an existing LV pylon with another larger or more powerful one, in order for a lighting fixture to be installed on this new pylon, will be considered as an installation of a new pylon when calculating the Participation. Similarly for the cases of transposition of a pylon of the existing LV Network, independent of whether a lighting fixture will be installed on said pylon or not, as well as in the case where the anti-drag head of the pylon is replaced, in order for a lighting fixture to be installed or for the existing SSL network to be extended. 6. In cases of a wall-mounted Network, the value of parameter Σδ is determined as the product of the length (in meters) of the wall-mounted cable installed and the corresponding under Article 26-1 unit cost. The cable length is equal to the length of its route and inclusive of the aerial part of the cable, between the pylon and the wall-mounted suspension hook, the aerial part of the cable between two 170 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System wall-mounted suspension hooks and the wall-mounted part up to the routing box to which the cable of the wall-mounted lighting fixture is connected. 7. The cost of each additional MV pylon, inclusive of its equipment, based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices, shall be borne by the Municipality or Community. Consequently, in case where a Municipality or Community applies for the condensing of a new or/and existing MV Network line, in order for lighting fixtures to be installed on it, the individual participation Σδ is augmented with the cost of the additional pylons required for the condensing. In case where the Municipality or Community requesting the deviation of the new MV Network line in order for a SSL network to be installed on such, the individual participation Σδ is augmented by the difference in the expenses for the MV lines. In the case of the installation of new lighting fixtures on existing MV Network, should the replacement of a MV pylon by another larger or more powerful one be required, the Municipality or Community shall encumber the respective charges, based on the approved under Article 26-1 unit prices. 8. Municipalities and Communities are not subject to charges for the supply conductors of the new lighting fixtures installed on the existing MV Network. The Network Owner must make an effort to install as many lighting fixtures as possible, for the fullest utilization of the works for which Municipalities and Communities pay Participation. 9. For connection to the LV Network of private SSL networks of Municipalities, Communities, national and county roads, roundabouts, ports ext. the aforementioned provisions of the present Article are in force and applicable. Article AP.IV-23 Participation calculation for the connection of mixed installations of buildings and SSL 1. In case where a Municipality or Community requests the combined supply of electric power to buildings and SSL, the Participation of such Municipality of Community is determined as the sum of two individual participations, that is: Α) the allocated participation ensuing for the supply of electric power only to the buildings (without SSL) and Β) the allocated participation ensuing for the installation of the lighting fixtures, considering that the Network necessary for the supply of electric power to the buildings exists. 2. For the determination of the individual participation of a Municipality or Community in the expenses for the supply of electric power to the building, the provisions of the Participation System in force for an individual LV Customer shall be applicable, if this regards one building, or for a group of LV Customers if it regards more than one buildings. 171 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System CHAPTER AP.IV - 3 CONNECTION AND PARTICIPATION SYSTEM FOR MV CUSTOMERS Article AP.IV-24 MV Supplies – definitions and calculation parameters 1. MV Supplies are manufactured in a standardized manner and codified as follows: (a) type A, where the metering device is installed within the boundaries of MV Customer’s installations on a Network pylon, and (b) type B, where the metering device is installed within the boundaries of the MV Customer’s installations. 2. MV Customer’s Supply is defined: Α) the metering device and coupling and protection means installed for the exclusive serving of the installations of MV Customer, where such metering device is installed within the boundaries of the MV Customer’s installations and on a Network pylon, Β) all Network installations from the MV Supply Limit to the Network/User Connection Point, inclusive of coupling, protection and metering installations in the cases where the metering device is installed within the boundaries of the MV Customer’s installations. 3. MV Supply Limit is defined as: Α) for type A MV Supplies it is identified with the Network/User Connection Point. Β) for type B MV Supplies it is the section point of the line following the supply cable for the installations of MV Customer and the outline of the Customer’s plot. If the supply cable for the installations of the Customer begins at an overhead Network line pylon, which resides inside of the Customer’s plot, the MV Supply Limits is the connection point between the cable and the overhead line. 4. A Network Extension shall be defined as the part of the Network of the minimum possible actualised route from the MV Supply Limit to the nearest point of the MV Network, independent of the voltage and sufficiency of such point. 5. The Areas for the Development of Underground Networks are established by the Network Operator, publicized by it and notified to RAE. The remaining regions of the country will be considered as “Areas for the Development of Overhead Network”. 6. The reinforcement of all Network installations is considered to be Installations Reinforcement to the degree that it is necessary for serving the demands for power supply of MV Customer. 7. In the calculations under the present CHAPTER of the Network Code, the following parameters are employed: ∆Π the reviewed actual installation expenditures for MV Supply 172 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System LΕΠ the length of Network Extension, in meters (m) ℓ the geometrical distance between the MV Supply Limit and the MV busbars in operation in the nearest MV/LV S/S of the Network, or the Autonomous Generation Station in Non-Interconnected Islands, if such are located in a shorter distance, in km. Ν the Maximum Agreed Power of the installations of MV Customer, in kVA Σ the total MV Customer Participation, in € ΣΠ the individual participation of MV Customer due to MV Supply in € ΣΕΠ the individual participation of MV Customer due to the Extension of the Network, in € ΣΕΝ the individual participation of MV Customer due to the Reinforcement of the Network, in € δ the average price of the cost of Network lines, in €/µ, approved under Article 26-1 Article AP.IV-25 Calculation of MV Customer’s Participation in usual cases of permanent connection 1. The provisions of the present Article are applicable for the calculation of the total Participation by MV Customers when the following conditions are concurrently met: Α) a new connection for MV Customer’s installations to the Network is built, Β) the aforementioned connection is permanent, C) the aforementioned connection is not subsumed to the extraordinary cases of Article AP.IV-27, D) the installations of MV Customer are not subsumed to the provisions of Article AP.IV-4. 2. In the cases of paragraph (1), the amount of Participation (Σ) of MV Customers is calculated as follows: Σ = ΣΠ + ΣΕΠ + ΣΕΝ where: Α) ΣΠ = ∆Π Β) ΣΕΠ = δ × LEΠ C) ΣΕΝ = Σ1 + Σ2 Factor Σ1 is determined based on the Maximum Agreed Power (Ν), under Article 26-1. Factor Σ2 is determined based on the product (Ν×ℓ), in compliance with Article 26-1. 173 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-26 Calculation of MV Customer’s Participation in cases of Maximum Agreed Power increase 1. The calculation of Customer’s Participation (Σ) in cases of increase in the Maximum Agreed Power, following the request by such Customer, by the modification of the Supply and connection to the MV Network, shall be done based on the provisions of Article AP.IV-25, as amended by the specific provisions of the present Article. 2. The numerical value of factor ∆Π is established as follows: Α) in the case of change in the connection voltage (from MV to MV or from LV to MV), as equal to the cost of the new Supply reduced by the cost (in current prices) of a new Supply identical with a old one. Β) in the case where the connection voltage remains unchanged, as follows: ∆Π = Κα + Κτ - Απ where: Κα the removal expenses Κτ the installation expenses (inclusive of the value of the materials) Απ the value of the collected materials 3. ΣΕΠ is taken to be equal to zero (ΣΕΠ = 0). 4. Factor ΣΕΝ is calculated as the difference between ΣΕΝ corresponding to the final Maximum Agreed Power (after the increase) and ΣΕΝ corresponding to the existing Maximum Agreed Power (prior to the increase). Factor ΣΕΝ corresponding to the existing Maximum Agreed Power is calculated as follows: Α) where the existing connection is to the MV Network, in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-25, Β) where the existing connection is to the LV Network, ΣΕΝ is set equal to Σδ (ΣΕΝ = Σδ) , where Σδ is established in compliance with the provisions of CHAPTER AP.IV-2. Article AP.IV-27 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers for connections with special conditions for the supply of electric power 1. The provisions of the present Article are applicable for the calculation of the total Participation (Σ) of MV Customers when there are special conditions for the supply of electric power, that is in cases where: Α) a Power Quality Contract has been concluded, in compliance with Article 6-2, Β) the operating characteristics of the installations of MV Customer lie outside of the boundaries established under CHAPTER 15, and due to this reason their connection to the Network in a manner different from the usual one is necessitated, 174 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System C) for Customer’s installations exhibiting extraordinary specifications or located in an inaccessible area, in compliance with the provisions of Article 24-3. 2. In the cases of paragraph (1), Participation (Σ) of MV Customers is calculated as follows: ⎧ΣΠ + ΣΕΠ + Σ1 + Σ2 αν ΣΕΠ + Σ2 ≥ ∆ΕΠ Σ = ⎨ ⎩ΣΠ + ∆ΕΠ + Σ1 αν ΣΕΠ + Σ2 <∆ΕΠ where ∆ΕΠ the expenditure of the actual Network work required for the connection of such MV Customer’s installations, Σ1 and Σ2 as in Article AP.IV-25 Article AP.IV-28 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers for temporary connections 1. The Participation of MV Customers in cases of temporary connections under Article 13-8 is established by applying the provisions under Article AP.IV-25 up to and including Article AP.IV-27, taking into account the half of factor Σ1 where the duration of the connection is less than 12 months. 2. In cases of the modification of a temporary MV connection, for which the Customer participated with a reduced factor Σ1, in compliance with paragraph (1), such Customer shall be subjected to the additional half of factor Σ1, as this is calculated in compliance with the prices of the parameters of the Participation System, as these are in force and applicable at the time of the modification. CHAPTER AP.IV - 4 PARTICIPATION SYSTEM FOR THE CONNECTION OF PUMPING STATIONS TO THE MV NETWORK Article AP.IV-29 Scope of application The provisions of the present CHAPTER are applicable for the calculation of Customer Participation for connection to the MV Network of pumping stations not included in the agricultural electrification programs (AEP, under the joint Decree by the Ministers of Agriculture and Industry, Energy and Technology under number F482.1/142196/10-11- 1987 (Gov. Gaz. Β΄ 738/1987). 175 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-30 Calculation of the Participation by MV Customers for the connection of drainage pumping stations 1. For the connection of individual drainage pumping stations to the MV Network, Customer’s Participation is calculated as follows: Σ = ∆Π + ∆ΕΠ + ΣΕΝ where: ∆ΕΠ the actual expense for extending the Network for the connection of the pump room, ΣΕΝ is calculated as follows: ⎧Σ1 + Σ 2 − ∆ ΕΠ if Σ 2 ≥ ∆ ΕΠ Σ EN = ⎨ ⎩Σ1 if Σ 2 < ∆ ΕΠ where Σ1 and Σ2 as in Article AP.IV-25. 2. For the connection to the MV Network of a group of drainage pumping stations by the same entity, which entity submits a single Connection Application, the Customer’s Participation is calculated as follows: Σ = ∆Π + ∆ΕΠ + ΣΕΝ-ισοδ. where: ∆Π is calculated as follows: ∆= ∆ ΠΠ∑ i ∀i where ∆ is the ∆Π of pump room (i), and the sum for all pumping Πi ∑ ∀i stations included in the Network Connection Application. ∆ΕΠ the actual Network extension expenditure for the connection of the pumping stations, ΣΕΝ-ισοδ. is calculated as follows: ⎧Σ1−ισοδ . + Σ 2−ισοδ . − ∆ ΕΠ if Σ 2−ισοδ . ≥ ∆ ΕΠ Σ EN −ισοδ . = ⎨ ⎩Σ1−ισοδ . if Σ 2−ισοδ . < ∆ ΕΠ where Σ1-ισοδ.and Σ2-ισοδ. the individual participations, calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-25, for “comparable Customer” with the following characteristics (Ni, ℓi the characteristics of pump room -i-): NN=×0,8 ∑∑iii NN ×=ll( ×) ∀∀ii 176 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-31 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers for the connection of pumping stations belonging to other categories 1. For the connection of single pumping stations to the LV Network, with the exception of drainage pumping stations, Customer’s Participation is calculated in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-25. 2. For the connection to the MV Network of a group of pumping stations, except drainage pumping stations, by the same entity submitting a uniform Connection Application, Customer’s Participation is calculated in compliance with the provisions of Article AP.IV-25, for the application of which such group of pumping stations shall be considered as “comparable MV Customer” with the following characteristics ( ∑ sum for all pumping stations included in the ∀i Network Connection Application): Α) ∆= ∆ ΠΠ∑ i ∀i where ∆ is the ∆Π of pump room (i), Πi Β) LL= ΕΠ∑ ΕΠi ∀i where L is the LΕΠ of pump room (i), ΕΠi ∑ Nii×l C) l= ∀i N where Ni, ℓi the characteristic of pump room (i), D) NN=×0,8 ∑ i ∀i where Ni factor Ν of pump room (i). Article AP.IV-32 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers to the increase of the agreed power of pumping stations For the calculation of the Participation of MV Customers to the increase of the agreed power of the pump room, the provisions of Article AP.IV-30 and Article AP.IV-31 shall be applicable, amended with respect to the provisions of Article AP.IV-26 with respect to the differentiation of the calculation of the Participation of MV Customer in cases of power increases against cases of new connections. 177 Appendix ΙV: Connection of Customer installations and Participation System Article AP.IV-33 Calculation of MV Customer’s Participation for the connection of pumping stations exhibiting special conditions for their supply with electric power 1. The provisions of the present Article are applicable in the calculation of the Participation (Σ) for the connection of pumping stations to the MV Network, where there apply the special conditions for the supply of electric power established under Article AP.IV-27 paragraph (1). 2. For the connection of drainage pumping stations to the LV Network, Customer Participation is calculated as follows: Σ = ∆Π + ∆ΕΠ + Σ1 + Σ2 where ∆ΕΠ , Σ1 and Σ2 as in Article AP.IV-27. 3. For the connection to the MV Network of pumping stations belonging to other categories, that is except drainage pumping stations, the Customer’s Participation is calculated by the application of the provisions of Article AP.IV- 27. CHAPTER AP.IV - 5 OTHER CHARGES BESIDES THE PARTICIPATION SYSTEM Article AP.IV-34 Charges for the processing of Network connection applications The amount of charges imposed on Customers under Article 13-5 paragraph (2), in order for their Network Connection Applications to be processed, are established for the First Distribution Regulatory Period as follows: Α) 30 €, for the connection of Customer’s installations to the LV Network, Β) 100 €, for the connection of Customer’s installations to the MV Network, C) 200 €, for the connection of Customer’s installations to the HV Network. 178 Appendix V: Measurements management APPENDIX V MEASUREMENT MANAGEMENT CHAPTER AP.V - 1 EX ANTE CALCULATIONS Article AP.V-1 En ante estimation of the representation percentages for Network load 1. Until the Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations, for each Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to such for supply to its m′ Customers for the following month (m), ΚΕ_ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: Α) for each Alternative Supplier (j): m′ ΚΕ_ Πρ j = ⎛⎞ ⎜⎟ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦmmm′ + ΚΕ ΩΜΦΜΤ′′ ×ΠΕ ⎜⎟∑∑( iiji) ( , ) ⎜⎟∀∈ΜΤii,( , ∀∈ΜΤ ii ,( , ⎝⎠iij∈ΜΩΜΦ,) ∈ iij ∈ΩΜΦ ,) ∈ ×ΣΠΑΜΤ_ ⎛⎞ +⎜⎟ ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦmm′′ + ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ ⎜⎟∑∑( ii) ( ) ⎜⎟∀∈ΧΤii,( , ∀∈ΧΤ ii ,( , ⎝⎠iij∈ΜΩΜΦ,) ∈ iij ∈ΩΜΦ ,) ∈ ×ΣΠΑΧΤ_ where: m′ ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the monthly consumption of electrical energy corresponding to the Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), for month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-14, m′ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤi the monthly consumption of electrical energy corresponding to the Hourly MV Load Meter (i), for month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-15, m′ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi the monthly consumption of electrical energy corresponding to the Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.IV-15, m ′ ΠΕ ji, the percentage of representation for Hourly MV Load Meter (i) by Alternative Supplier (j) which shall apply on the 15th day of month (m), in compliance with the Load Meter Representation Declarations submitted. 179 Appendix V: Measurements management ΣΠΑ_ ΜΤ, ΣΠΑ_ ΧΤ the load increase factors for the MV Network and the LV Network respectively, due to losses, as established in Article 28-10 and applicable for month (m), ∑ , ∑ the sum for all Non-Hourly Load Meters that are ∀∈ΜΤii,( , ∀∈ΧΤii,( , iij∈ΜΩΜΦ,) ∈ iij∈ΜΩΜΦ,) ∈ represented on the 15th day of month (m) by the Alternative Supplier (j), and which measure the consumption of MV Customers or LV Customers respectively, ∑ the sum for all Hourly LV Load Meters that are represented on the ∀∈ΧΤii,( , iij∈ΩΜΦ,) ∈ 15th day of month (m) by Alternative Supplier (j), ∑ the sum for all Hourly MV Load Meters that are represented on the ∀∈ΜΤii,( , iij∈ΩΜΦ,) ∈ 15th day of month (m), fully or partially, by Alternative Supplier (j). Β) For the Dominant Supplier: ΚΕ__ Πρ mm′′ = ΕΕ ∆∆ − ΚΕ _ Πρ m ′ ∆ tot∑ ( j ) ∀≠∆j where: m ′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected to the Network, for month (m) calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-13, m′ ΚΕ_ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) to be supplied to the Customers such Supplier represents, for following month (m), calculated in compliance with paragraph (1.A), ∑ the sum for all Alternative Suppliers (j). ∀≠∆j 2. After the Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations, for each Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to such Supplier for the m′ supply of the Customers it represents, for the following month (m), ΚΕ_ Πρ j , is calculated in the following two stages: ′′ m′ Α) Stage 1: for each Supplier ΚΕ_ Πρ j is calculated using the formula of paragraph (1.A). Β) Stage 2: For all Suppliers: ′′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆m ′ ΚΕ__ Πρρmm′′ = ΚΕ Π × tot jj ′′ m′ ∑ ΚΕ_ Πρ j ∀j where: 180 Appendix V: Measurements management m ′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, for month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-13, ∑ the sum for all Suppliers (j). ∀j 3. For each Supplier (j), the ex ante determined percentage of representation of the m′ Network load, for following month (m), ΠΕexante _ Πρ j , expressed as a percentage (%), is calculated as follows: ΚΕ_ Πρ m′ m′ j ΠΕexante _ Πρ j = × 100 m ′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot where: m′ ΚΕ_ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) to be supplied to the Customers such Supplier represents, for month (m), calculated in accordance with paragraphs (1) and (2), m ′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electricity injected into the Network, for month (m), calculated in accordance with Article AP.V-13. CHAPTER AP.V - 2 EX POST CALCULATIONS Article AP.V-2 Ex post calculation of the per Supplier attributed energy for Customers with hourly LV or MV load meters 1. For each Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to it and corresponding to its Customers with an Hourly LV Load Meter, for time (k) in km∈ month (m), ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: km∈∈ km ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤ Πρ ji =∑ ( ΚΚΕ _ ΩΜΦΧΤ) ×ΣΠΑ _ ΧΤ ∀∈ij where: km∈ ΚΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi the electrical energy consumption measured by Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for hour (k) in month (m), ΣΠΑ_ ΧΤ the load increase factor for the LV Network due to losses, as established under Article 28-10 and in force for month (m), ∑ the sum for all Hourly LV Load Meters which were represented during ∀∈ij month (m) by Supplier (j). 181 Appendix V: Measurements management 2. For each Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to it and corresponding to its Customers with an Hourly MV Load Meter, for hour (k) in km∈ month (m), ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΜΤ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: km∈∈∈ km km ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΜΤ Πρ jiji =∑ ( ΚΚΕ _ ΩΜΦΜΤ ×ΠΕ, ) ×ΣΠΑ _ ΜΤ ∀∈ij where: km∈ ΚΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤi the electrical energy consumption measured by Hourly MV Load Meter (i), for hour (k) in month (m), km∈ ΠΕ ji, the representation percentage of Hourly MV Load Meter (i) by Supplier (j) for hour (k) in month (m), ΣΠΑ_ ΜΤ the load increase factor for the MV Network due to losses, as established under Article 28-10 and in force for month (m), ∑ the sum for all Hourly MV Load Meters which were represented during ∀∈ij month (m), fully or partially, by Supplier (j). Article AP.V-3 Ex post calculation of the per Supplier attributed energy for Customers with zone load meters 1. The vector of the variation is calculated for the total energy injected into the Network, ∆ΕΕ∆1m, which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meters. Element (k) m m of vector ∆ΕΕ∆1 , ∆ΕΕ∆1k , corresponds to hour (k) in month (m) and is calculated as follows: mkmkm∈∈ ∆ΕΕ∆1_ktottot = ΕΕ ∆∆ − ΚΕ _ ΩΜΦ where: km∈ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electricity injected into the Network, for hour (k) in month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-7, km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the electricity consumption which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past hour (k) in month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-11. 2. For each Zone Load Meter (i) the amount of energy which corresponds to it for km∈ hour (k), which belongs to time zone (λ) of previous month (m), ΚΕ_ ΜΦΖi , is calculated as follows: m km∈ m⎛⎞ m,λ ∆ΕΕ∆1k ΚΕ__ ΜΦΖiii = ΚΕ ΜΩΜΦ ×⎜⎟ ΚΕ _(%) ΜΦΖk∈λ, × m ⎝⎠λ⊂m ∑ ∆ΕΕ∆1k ∀∈k λ where: 182 Appendix V: Measurements management m ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the monthly consumption of electrical energy corresponding to Zone Load Meter (i), for month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-8, m,λ ΚΕ_(%) ΜΦΖ i k∈λ, the percentage of the monthly consumption of electrical λ⊂m energy corresponding to Zone Load Meter (i) in time zone (λ) of the day, for month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-9, m ∆ΕΕ∆1k element (k) of the vector of fluctuation of the total energy injected to the Network, ∆ΕΕ∆1m, which corresponds to hour (k) in month (m), calculated under paragraph (1), ∑ the sum for all hours of the month (m) falling in time zone (λ). ∀∈k λ 3. For each Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to it for the supply of its Customers with a Zone Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m), km∈ ΚΕ__ ΜΦΖ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: km∈∈ km ΚΕΜΦΖΠ__ρ ji =∑ ( ΚΕΜΦΖ×ΣΠΑΜΤ _) _ ∀∈ΜΤii,( , ij∈ ) km∈ +ΚΕΜΦΖ×ΣΠΑΧΤ∑ ()__i ∀∈ΧΤii,( , ij∈ ) where: km∈ ΚΕ_ ΜΦΖi the energy calculated to have been consumed by Customer with Zone Load Meter (i) at hour (k) of past month (m), calculated under paragraph (2), ΣΠΑ_ ΜΤ, ΣΠΑ_ ΧΤ the load increase factors for the MV Network and the LV Network respectively, due to losses, as established under Article 28- 10 and in force for month (m), ∑ , ∑ the sum for all Zone Load Meters which were represented ∀∈ΜΤii,( , ∀∈ΧΤii,( , ij∈ ) ij∈ ) during month (m) by Supplier (j) and which measure the consumption of LV Customers or MV Customers respectively. Article AP.V-4 Ex post calculation of the per Supplier attributed energy for Customers with simple load meters 1. The vector of the variation is calculated for the total energy injected into the Network, ∆ΕΕ∆2m, which corresponds to Simple Load Meters. Element (k) of m m vector ∆ΕΕ∆2 , ∆ΕΕ∆2k , corresponds to hour (k) in month (m), and is calculated as follows: mkmkm∈∈ km ∈ ∆ΕΕ∆2_ktottot = ΕΕ ∆∆ − ΚΕ _ ΩΜΦ −∑ ΚΕ __ ΜΦΖ Πρ j ∀j 183 Appendix V: Measurements management where: km∈ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Interconnected Network, for hour (k) in month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-7, km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past hour (k) in month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-11, km∈ ΚΕ__ ΜΦΖ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply of its Customers with a Zone Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-3, ∑ the sum for all Suppliers. ∀j 2. For each Alternative Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to it and which was supplied to its Customers with a Simple Load Meter for hour (k) in km∈ month (m), ΚΕ__ ΑΜΦ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: ⎛ ΚΕ__ ΑΜΦ Πρ km∈ =⎜ ΚΕ _ ΜΩΜΦ m ×ΣΠΑ _ ΜΤ + ji⎜ ∑ () ⎜ ∀∈ΜΤii,( , ⎝ ij∈ ) ⎞ ∆ΕΕ∆2m ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦm ×ΣΠΑ ΧΤ⎟ × k ∑ ()i ⎟ m ∀∈ΧΤii,( , ⎟ ∑ ∆ΕΕ∆2k ij∈ ) ⎠ ∀∈km where: m ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption corresponding to Simple Load Meter (i) for month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-8, ΣΠΑ_ ΜΤ, ΣΠΑ_ ΧΤ the load increase factors for the MV Network and the LV Network respectively, due to losses, as established under Article 28- 10 and in force and applicable for month (m), ∑ , ∑ the sum for all Simple Load Meters which were represented ∀∈ΜΤii,( , ∀∈ΧΤii,( ij∈ ) ij∈ ) during month (m) by Alternative Supplier (j), which measure the consumption of MV Customers or LV Customers respectively, m ∆ΕΕ∆2k element (k) of the vector of fluctuation of the total energy injected into the Network, ∆ΕΕ∆2m, which corresponds to hour (k) in month (m), established under paragraph (1). 184 Appendix V: Measurements management Article AP.V-5 Ex post calculation of the total energy attributed per Supplier for the Customers it represents 1. Until the Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations, for each Supplier (j) the total amount of energy attributed to it for the supply of its km∈ Customers, for hour (k) in past month (m), ΚΕ_ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: Α) For each Alternative Supplier (j): km∈∈∈ km km ΚΕ_____ Πρρρjjj = ΚΕ ΩΜΦΜΤ Π + ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ Π + km∈∈ km ΚΕ__ ΜΦΖ Πρρjj + ΚΕ __ ΑΜΦ Π where: km∈ ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΜΤ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) for supply to its Customers with an Hourly MV Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m), as calculated under Article AP.V-2, km∈ ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) for supply to its Customers with an Hourly LV Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m), as calculated under Article AP.V-2, km∈ ΚΕ__ ΜΦΖ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) for supply to its Customers with a Zone Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m), as calculated under Article AP.V-3, km∈ ΚΕ__ ΑΜΦ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) for supply to its Customers with a Simple Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m), as calculated under Article AP.V-4, Β) For the Dominant Supplier: km∈∈ km km ∈ ΚΕ__ Πρρ∆ = ΕΕ ∆∆tot −∑ ( ΚΕ _ Π j ) ∀≠∆j where: km∈ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, for hour (k) in month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-7, km∈ ΚΕ_ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) for supply of its Customers, for hour (k) of past month (m), as calculated under paragraph (A), ∑ the sum for all Alternative Suppliers (j). ∀≠∆j 2. After the Day of Commencement of Detailed Measurement Calculations, for each Supplier (j), the total amount of energy attributed to it for supply of its km∈ Customers, for hour (k) of past month (m), ΚΕ_ Πρ j , shall be calculated in two stages: 185 Appendix V: Measurements management km∈ ′′ Α) Stage 1: for each Supplier ΚΕ_ Πρ j is calculated by the application of the formula under paragraph (1.A). Β) Stage 2: For all Suppliers: km∈ km∈∈ km′′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot ΚΕ__ Πρρjj = ΚΕ Π × km∈ ′′ ∑ ΚΕ_ Πρ j ∀j where: km∈ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electricity injected into the Network, for hour (k) in month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-7, ∑ the sum for all Suppliers (j). ∀j CHAPTER AP.V - 3 INDIVIDUAL DETAILED CALCULATIONS Article AP.V-6 Hourly difference of the ex ante and ex post consumption attributed per Supplier For each Supplier (j), the difference between the ex ante and the ex post attributed amounts of energy corresponding to its Customers, for hour (k) in month (m), km∈ ∆ΚΕ_ Πρ j , is calculated as follows: km∈ m′ km∈∈ km ∆ΚΕ____ Πρρjjtotj = ΠΕexante Π ×ΕΕ ∆∆ − ΚΕ Π ρ where: m′ ΠΕexante _ Πρ j the ex ante detemined under Article AP.V-1 percentage of representation of the Network load by Supplier (j), for month (m), km∈ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, for hour (k) in month (m), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-7, km∈ ΚΕ_ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply of its Customers, for hour (k) of past month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-5. Article AP.V-7 Injection of energy into the Network – Past period energy calculations 1. The total amount of electricity injected into the Network during month (m) is m denoted by ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot , the total amount of energy injected during time period 186 Appendix V: Measurements management dd12− (d1,d2) from day d1 up to and including day d2 is denoted by ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot , and km∈ the total injection at hour (k) in month (m) is denoted by ΕΕ∆∆ _ tot . 2. For past months or time periods or hours, the total amount of energy injected into the Network by generation units connected to it and/or by the System, is calculated as the sum of the hourly measurements of the following Network Meters: a) Hourly MV Generation Meters, b) Hourly LV Generation Meters, and c) Network Boundary Meters for the Interconnected Network, for all such meters and for all hours of the month or time period. Article AP.V-8 Non-hourly load meters – Past period energy consumption calculations 1. Where for past time period (d1, d2) from day d1 up to and including day d2, the Metering Period (M) of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) is identified with time period (d1, d2), (M ≡ (d1,d2)), the electricity consumption which corresponds to Meter dd12− (i) for time period (d1,d2), ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi , is equal to the electricity consumption measured by Meter (i) during the Metering Period, namely: dd12− ΠΚ M ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi = ΚΚΕ _ ΜΩΜΦi where: ΠΚM ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption which was measured by Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), during Metering Period (M). 2. Where for Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) a past period (d1,d2), from day d1 up to and including day d2, is fully included in a Metering Period (M), the consumption of electricity which corresponds to meter (i) for time period dd12− (d1,d2), ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi , is calculated as follows: dd12− ΠΚM ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦii = ΚΚΕ ΜΩΜΦ × dd12−− dd 12 ΕΕ__ ∆∆tot − ΚΕ ΩΜΦ tot dM_1−− dM _2 dM _1 dM _2 ΕΕ__ ∆∆tot − ΚΕ ΩΜΦ tot where: dM_1 the starting day for Metering Period (M), dM_2 the day on which Metering Period (M) ended, ΠΚM ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption which was measured by Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) during Metering Period (M), dd12− dM_1− dM _2 ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot , ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total amount of electrical energy injected into the Network for time period (d1, d2) and time period (dM_1, dM_2) respectively, calculated under Article AP.V-7, dd12− dM_1− dM _2 ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot , ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the total electricity consumption which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for time period (d1, d2) and for time period (dM_1, dM_2) respectively, calculated under Article AP.V-11. 187 Appendix V: Measurements management 3. Where for Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) in past time period (d1,d2), from day d1 up to and including day d2, one or more measurement collections have been performed, and, consequently, the electricity consumption corresponding to meter (i) for time period (d1, d2) has been included in the measurements of two or more Metering Periods (M1), (M2), up to and including (MN), where (N-1) is the number of meter readings for meter (i) in time period (d1, d2) and M2 is posterior to M2, etc., the consumption which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load dd12− Meter (i) for time period (d1, d2), ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi , is calculated as follows: dd12− ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi = __ddM11_2−− ddM 11_2 ΠΚM 1 ΕΕ ∆∆tot − ΚΕ ΩΜΦ tot ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi ×dM1_11_2−− dM dM 1_11_2 dM + ΕΕ__ ∆∆tot − ΚΕ ΩΜΦ tot ΠΚMj ∑ ()ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi + ∀> ΠΚM 1 ΠΚMN ΠΚMj ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi ,_ΚΚΕ ΜΩΜΦi , ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption measured by Non-Hourl Load Meter (i) for past Metering Periods (M1), (MN) and (Mj) respectively, dX− dY ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total amount of electrical energy injected into the Network, for time period (dX, dY) from day (dX) up to and including day (dY), calculated under Article AP.V-7, dX− dY ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the total electrical energy consumption corresponding to all Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for time period (dX, dY), calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-11, ∑ the sum for all Metering Periods (Mj), which start and end inside ∀> 188 Appendix V: Measurements management 4. The total electricity consumption which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meter m (i) for month (m), ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi , is calculated by the application of the provisions of paragraphs (1) up to and including (3), replacing in the formulas the days of commencement and end of time period (d1, d2) with the days of commencement and end of month (m) respectively, and time period (d1, d2) with time period of month (m). Article AP.V-9 Zone load meters – Calculating consumption percentages per zone For each Zone Load Meter (i), for month (m) the percentage of the monthly electricity m,λ consumption which corresponds to each time zone (λ) of the day, ΚΕ_(%) ΜΦΖ i , is calculated as follows: Α) Where for Zone Load Meter (i) past month (m) is fully integrated in Metering Period (M) or is identified with it ( mM⊆ ), the percentage of the monthly electrical energy consumption which corresponds to time zone (λ) of the day, m,λ ΚΕ_(%) ΜΦΖ i is identified with the percentage of the consumption inside such zone as was measured for the entire Metering Period (M) by meter (i), to the total energy consumption as was measured for the same Metering Period by the same meter. Β) Where for Zone Load Meter (i) in past month (m) its measurements were collected and, consequently, the electrical energy consumption corresponding to meter (i) for month (m) was included in the measurements of two or more Metering Periods (M1), (M2), up to and including (MN), where (N-1) the number of meter readings for meter (i) inside time period (d1, d2) and M2 being posterior to M1 etc, the percentage of monthly electricity consumption which corresponds to time zone (λ) m,λ of the day, ΚΕ_(%) ΜΦΖ i , is calculated as the weighted average of the percentages of electricity consumption which corresponds to time zone (λ) of the day, which are calculated for Metering Periods (M1) up to and including (MN) under the previous paragraph (A), weighted over the number of days in month (m) which are included in each Metering Period (M1) up to and including (MN). Article AP.V-10 Hourly MV or LV load meters – Past period energy consumption calculations 1. The electrical energy consumption for Hourly MV Load Meter or Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for past time period (d1, d2), from day (d1) up to and including dd12− dd12− day (d2), ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤi or ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi , respectively, follows as the sum of the hourly measurements of the meter for all hours in time period (d1, d2). 2. The monthly electricity consumption for Hourly MV Load Meter or Hourly LV m m Load Meter (i) for past month (m), ΚΕ _ ΩΜΦΜΤi ή ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi , respectively, follows as the sum of the hourly measurements of the meter for all hours in such month. 189 Appendix V: Measurements management 3. Where a Customer’s Non-Hourly Load Meter has been replaced by an Hourly MV Load Meter or an Hourly LV Load Meter (i), the consumption of electricity of hourly meter (i), for past time period (d1, d2), from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) or for month (m) prior to the installation of hourly meter (i), is equal to the consumption for such period of the Non-Hourly Load Meter, which is calculated in compliance with Article AP.V-8. Article AP.V-11 Hourly MV and/or LV load meters – Past period total energy consumption calculations 1. The consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past time period (d1, d2) dd12− from day (d1) up to and including day (d2), ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤtot , is calculated as follows: dd12−− dd 12 ΚΕ___ ΩΜΦΜΤtot =∑ ( ΚΕ ΩΜΦΜΤ i ) ×ΣΠΑ ΜΤ ∀∈ΩΜΦΜΤi () where: dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤi the consumption of electricity measured by the Hourly MV Load Meter (i) during time period (d1, d2), calculated under Article AP.V-10, ΣΠΑ_ ΜΤ the load increase factor for the MV Network, due to losses, as established under Article 28-10 and in force and applicable for time period (d1, d2), ∑ the sum for all Hourly MV Load Meters. ∀∈ΩΜΦΜΤi () 2. Respectively, the following are calculated: (a) the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of m the respective Network losses, for past month (m), ΚΕ _ ΩΜΦΜΤtot , and (b) the electrical energy consumption which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past hour (k) in month km∈ (m), ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤtot . 3. The consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past time period (d1, d2) dd12− from day (d1) up to and including day (d2), ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot , is calculated as follows: dd12−− dd 12 ΚΕ___ ΩΜΦΧΤtot =∑ ( ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ i ) ×ΣΠΑ ΧΤ ∀∈ΩΜΦΧΤi () where: dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi the consumption of electrical energy measured by Hourly LV Load Meter (i), during time period (d1, d2), calculated under Article AP.V-10, 190 Appendix V: Measurements management ΣΠΑ_ ΧΤ the load increase factor for the LV Network due to losses, as established under Article 28-10 and in force and applicable for time period (d1, d2), ∑ the sum for all Hourly LV Load Meters. ∀∈ΩΜΦΧΤi () 4. Respectively, the following are calculated: (a) the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of m the respective Network losses, for past month (m), ΚΕΩΜΦΧΤ _ tot , and (b) the electrical energy consumption which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past hour (k) in month (m), km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot . 5. The monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for past time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including dd12− day (d2), ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot , follows as the sum of the following: (a) the electrical energy consumption which corresponds to the totality of Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for time period (d1, d2), dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤtot , calculated under paragraph (1), and (b) the consumption of electrical energy whch corresponds to the totality of Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for time period (d1, d2), dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot , calculated under paragraph (3). Correspondingly the consumption of electrical energy corresponding to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, is m calculated for past month (m), ΚΕΩΜΦ_ tot , and for hour (k) in month (m), km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot . Article AP.V-12 Non-hourly load meters – Calculations of the total past period energy consumption 1. The consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Non-Hourly Load Meters of the Network, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for part time dd12− period (d1, d2), ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot , is calculated as follows: dd12−− dd 12 dd 12 − ΚΕ___ ΜΩΜΦtot = ΕΕ ∆∆ tot −ΚΕ ΩΜΦ tot where: dd12− ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, for time period (d1, d2), calculated under Article AP.V-7, dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the total electrical energy consumption which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters and Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for time period (d1, d2), calculated under Article AP.V-11. 191 Appendix V: Measurements management 2. Respectively, the consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Non-Hourly Load Meters of the Network, inclusive of the respective Network m losses, is calculated for past month (m), ΚΕΜΩΜΦ_ tot , and for hour (k) in km∈ month (m), ΚΕ _ ΜΩΜΦtot . Article AP.V-13 Total energy injection into the Network – Future period energy estimation The monthly total injection of electrical energy into the Network, for future month (m), m ′ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot , is calculated as follows: ΕΕ__ ∆∆mm−−23 + ΕΕ ∆∆ mm′ −12 tot tot ΕΕ__ ∆∆tot = ΕΕ ∆∆ tot × mm−−14 15 ΕΕ__ ∆∆tot + ΕΕ ∆∆ tot where: (m-Χ) month X preceding future month (m) mX− ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electricity injected into the Network, for month (m-X), calculated under Article AP.V-7. Article AP.V-14 Non-hourly load meters – Future period energy consumption estimation 1. The monthly consumption of electrical energy corresponding to Non-Hourly m′ Load Meter (i), for future month (m), ΚΕΜΩΜΦ _ i , is calculated as follows: ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦΠΚMlast mm′ −12 i ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦii = ΚΕ ΜΩΜΦ × (_1)(_2)dMlast−− year dMlast − year ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi where: (m-12) the past month preceding month (m) by one year, (Mlast) the last past Metering Period of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), (dMlast_1-year) the day preceding by one year the commencement day of the last past Metering Period of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), (dMlast_2-year) the day preceding by one year the day on which the last past Metering Period of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) ended, m−12 ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) for month (m-12), calculated under Article AP.V-8, ΠΚMlast ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption measured by Non- Hourly Load Meter (i), during Metering Period (Mlast), (_1)(_2)dMlast−− year dMlast − year ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) for time period (dMlast_1- 192 Appendix V: Measurements management year, dMlast_2-year) from day (dMlast_1-year) until day (dMlast_2- year), calculated under Article AP.V-8. 2. In the calculations under paragraph (1) above no account is taken of any changes to the representative of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), or to the Customer to which it corresponds. 3. Where the historical measurement data for Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), required for calculations under paragraph (1) are unavailable, and at least one collection of the readings of such meter for Metering Period (Mlast) has been performed, the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Non-Hourly m′ Load Meter (i), for future month (m), ΚΕΜΩΜΦ _ i , is calculated as follows: m′ ΠΚMlast ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦii = ΚΚΕ ΜΩΜΦ × ΚΕ__ ΜΩΜΦdMlast_1−− dMlast _2 ×ΚΕ ΜΩΜΦ m year Ν tot tot × ΜΩΜΦ() Μlast − year (_1)(_2)dMlast−− year dMlast − year 2 Ν ()ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot ΜΩΜΦ() Μlast where: (Mlast) the last past Metering Period of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), (dMlast _1) the commencement day of Metering Period (Mlast), (dMlast _2) the day on which Metering Period (Mlast) ended, (dMlast_1-year) the day preceding by one year the commencement day for the last past Metering Period of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), (dMlast_2-year) the day preceding by one year the day on which the last past Metering Period of Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) ended, (dm_1-year) the day preceding by one year the commencement day of month (m), (dm_2-year) the day preceding by one year the day on which month (m) ends, ΠΚMlast ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption measured by Non- Hourly Load Meter (i) during Metering Period (Mlast), dX− dY ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot the total consumption of electrical energy by all Customers with Non-Hourly Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for time period from day (dX) until day (dY), calculated under Article AP.V-12. myear− ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot the total monthly electrical energy consumption for all Customers with Non-Hourly Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for the month preceding by one year month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-12, ΝΜΩΜΦ(Μlast) the number of activated Non-Hourly Load Meters during Metering Period (Mlast), as the average value for such period, ΝΜΩΜΦ(Μlast-year) the number of activated Non-Hourly Load Meters for time period (dMlast_1-year, dMlast_2-year), from day (dMlast_1-year) until day (dMlast_2-year), as the average value for such period. 193 Appendix V: Measurements management 4. Where the historical measurement data for Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), required for calculations under paragraph (3) are unavailable, the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), for future m′ month (m), ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi , is calculated as the average of the monthly consumption of electricity which corresponds to the remaining Non-Hourly Load Meters of the same subcategory as meter (i), in compliance with Article 17-1, for future month (m). 5. The Network Operator in the special cases where it deems that the calculation of the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meter for a future month as per the above, is not valid due to extraordinary conditions, such as, for example, intense seasonal variations or intense change over time of the load for the respective Customer, may alter the results of such calculations, provided that such alteration is justified. In such cases, the Network Operator must inform the Suppliers of the respective Customer and take account of their opinions in the final calculation. Article AP.V-15 LV or MV Hourly load meters – Future period energy consumption estimation 1. The monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Hourly LV m′ Load Meter (i), for future month (m), ΚΕΩΜΦΧΤ _ i , is calculated as follows: ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤmm−−23 + ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ mm′ −12 ii ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤii = ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ × mm−−14 15 ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤii + ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ where: (m-Χ) month X preceding month (m), mX− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi electricity consumption which correspond to Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for month (m-X), calculated under Article AP.V-10. 2. In the calculations under paragraph (1) above no account is taken of any changes to the representative of Hourly LV Load Meter (i), or to the Customer to which it corresponds. 3. Where the historical measurement data for Hourly LV Load Meter (i), required for calculations under paragraph (1) are unavailable, and the measurements for the meter for the second month prior to month (m), the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for future m′ month (m), ΚΕ _ ΩΜΦΧΤi , is calculated as follows: ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤm−12 Ν mm′ −2 tot ΩΜΦΧΤ(14)m − ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤii = ΚΕ ΩΜΦΧΤ ×m−14 × ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot ΝΩΜΦΧΤ(12) m − where: (m-Χ) month X preceding month (m), 194 Appendix V: Measurements management m−2 ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi the monthly consumption of electrical energy which correspond to Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for the second month prior to month (m), calculated under Article AP.V-10. mX− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for month (m-X), calculated under Article AP.V-11, ΝΩΜΦΧΤ(m-Χ) the number of activated Hourly LV Load Meters during month (m-X), as the average value for such month. 4. Where the historical measurement data for Hourly LV Load Meter (i), required for calculations under paragraph (3) are unavailable, the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to meter (i), for future month (m), m′ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi , is calculated as the average of the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to the remaining Hourly LV Load Meters, for future month (m). 5. The Network Operator in the special cases where it deems that the calculation of the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Hourly LV Load Meter for a future month as per the above, is not valid due to extraordinary conditions, such as, for example, intense seasonal fluctuations or intense change over time of the load for the respective Customer, may alter the results of such calculations, provided that such alteration is justified. In such cases, the Network Operator must inform the Suppliers of the respective Customer and take account of their opinions in the final calculation. 6. The provisions of the present Article are accordingly applicable also in the calculation of the monthly consumption of electricity which correspond to the m′ Hourly LV Load Meter (i), for future month (m), ΚΕ _ ΩΜΦΜΤi . Article AP.V-16 Synopsis of symbols used 1. The present Appendix employs the symbols which are cited below. Their citation is aimed exclusively to facilitate its ease of use: km∈ ∆ΚΕ_ Πρ j the difference between the ex ante and the ex post amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j), for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-6 km∈ ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-7 m ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, during month (m) – Article AP.V-7 & Article AP.V-13 dd12− ΕΕ_ ∆∆tot the total electrical energy injected into the Network, during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-7 km∈ ΚΕ__ ΑΜΦ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Alternative Supplier (j) for the supply of those Customers it represents with a Simple Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-4 195 Appendix V: Measurements management km∈ ΚΕ__ ΜΦΖ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply to the Customers it represents with a Zone Load Meter, for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-3 m,λ ΚΕ_(%) ΜΦΖ i the amount of the monthly consumption of electrical energy corresponding to Zone Load Meter (i) in time zone (λ) of the day, for month (m) – Article AP.V-9 m ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption which corresponds to Non-Hourly Load Meter (i), for month (m) – Article AP.V-8 & Article AP.V-14 dd12− ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption corresponding to Non-Hourly Load Meter (i) during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-8 km∈ ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot the hourly consumption of electrical energy by all Customers with Non-Hourly Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-12 m ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot the total electricity consumption by all Customers with Non- Hourly Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for month (m) – Article AP.V-12 dd12− ΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦtot the total consumption of electrical energy by all Customers with Non-Hourly Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-12 m ΚΕ_ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply of those Customers it represents for month (m) – Article AP.V-1 km∈ ΚΕ_ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply of the Customers it represents, for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-5 km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the hourly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-11 m ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the total electrical energy consumption corresponding to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for month (m) – Article AP.V-11 dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦtot the total electrical energy consumption which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters and Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-11 m ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤi the monthly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to Hourly MV Load Meter (i), for month (m) – Article AP.V-10 & Article AP.V-15 196 Appendix V: Measurements management dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤi the consumption of electrical energy corresponding to Hourly MV Load Meter (i), for time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-10 km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤtot the hourly electrical energy consumption which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-11 m ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤtot the total consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for month (m) – Article AP.V-11 dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤtot the total consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly MV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-11 km∈ ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΜΤ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply of those Customers it represents with an Hourly MV Load Meter, during hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-2 m ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi the month consumption of electrical energy corresponding to Hourly LV Load Meter (i) for month (m) – Article AP.V-10 & Article AP.V-15 dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤi the electrical energy consumption corresponding to Hourly LV Load Meter (i) during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-10 km∈ ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot the hourly consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-11 m ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot the total consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, for month (m) – Article AP.V-11 dd12− ΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤtot the total consumption of electrical energy which corresponds to all Hourly LV Load Meters, inclusive of the respective Network losses, during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) – Article AP.V-11 km∈ ΚΕ__ ΩΜΦΧΤ Πρ j the total amount of energy attributed to Supplier (j) for the supply of those Customers it represents with Hourly LV Load Meters, for hour (k) in month (m) – Article AP.V-2 ΠΚM ΚΚΕ_ ΜΩΜΦi the electrical energy consumption measured by Non- Hourly Load Meter (i) for Metering Period (M) ΚΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΜΤkm∈ i the electrical energy consumption measured by Hourly ΜV Load Meter (i), during hour (k) in month (m) 197 Appendix V: Measurements management ΚΚΕ_ ΩΜΦΧΤkm∈ i the electrical energy consumption measured by Hourly LV Load Meter (i), during hour (k) of month (m) m ΜΠΧΠ_ Πρ j the corresponding amount of credit or charge for Supplier (j) and for month (m) as ensuing from the procedure of the periodic settlement of measurements – Article 21-1 km∈ ΠΕ ji, the percentage of representation of load meter (i) by Supplier (j) during hour (k) in month (m) m ΠΕ ji, the percentage of representation of load meter (i) by Supplier (j) during month (m) dd12− ΠΕ ji, the percentage of representation of load meter (i) by Supplier (j) during time period (d1, d2) from day (d1) up to and including day (d2) m′ ΠΕexante _ Πρ j the ex post determined percentage of representation for Network load by Supplier (j), for month (m) – Article AP.V-1 ΣΠΑ_ ΜΤ the load increase factor for the MV Network due to losses, as established under Article 28-10 ΣΠΑ_ ΧΤ the load increase factor for the LV Network due to losses, as established under Article 28-10 2. Proportions referring to future time periods are denoted by accent, in order to be distinguished from corresponding proportions which refer to past time periods. 3. The definitions and the interpretation of symbols established in the other Articles of this Network Code, shall prevail over the provisions of the present Article. 198 Appendix VI: Terms of Network Connection Contracts APPENDIX VI TERMS OF NETWORK CONNECTION CONTRACTS CHAPTER AP.VI - 1 TERMS OF CUSTOMER CONNECTION CONTRACTS Article AP.VI-1 General terms of Customer Connection Contracts CHAPTER AP.VI - 2 TYPE OF CONTRACT FOR THE CONNECTION OF GENERATION UNITS TO THE NETWORK Article AP.VI-2 Type of contracts for the connection of generation units to the LV Network Article AP.VI-3 Type of contracts for the connection of generation units to the MV Network Article AP.VI-4 Type of contracts for the connection of generation units to the HV Network 199 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code MANUAL I AUXILIARY TEXTS FOR USING THE NETWORK OPERATION CODE CHAPTER Ε.I - 1 GENERAL Article Ε.I - 1 General 1. The present Network Code Implementation Manual is purely informational. It includes a concise presentation, to facilitate ease of use of the Network Code, of the following: Α) summary of the abbreviations used, Β) definitions, C) clarifications and examples, D) Table of Contents of the Network Code. 2. The definitions, as well as the interpretation of terms, abbreviations and symbols established in the Network Code, as well as all express provisions of such code shall prevail over what is set forth in the present Manual. 3. The present Implementation Manual shall be supplemented and amended in compliance with the provisions of Article 1-3 of the Network Code. CHAPTER Ε.I - 2 Definitions of Terms and Abbreviations Article Ε.I - 2 Synopsis of abbreviations used Abbreviation Corresponding term RES Renewable Energy Sources f∆(Χ) System Average Interruption Frequency Index – SAIFI t∆(Χ) System Average Interruption Duration Index SAIDI t(∆Χ) Customer Average Interruption Duration Index – CAIDI LV Network All parts of the Network operating under LV MV Network All parts of the Network operating under MV HV Network All parts of the Network operating under HV LV Customer Customer whose installations are connected to the LV Network MV Customer Customer whose installations are connected to the MV Network SO&PE CODE System Operation and Power Exchange Code For Electricity 1 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code TSDS Transmission System Development Study under Chapter 51 of the GC&PE Code ENS Energy Not Supplied T/R Transformer T/R HV/MV HV to MV Transformer T/R MV/LV MV to LV Transformer MV Medium Voltage LV Producer Producer whose installations are connected to the LV Network MV Producer Producer whose installations are connected to the MV Network HV Producer Producer whose installations are connected to the HV Network RAE The Regulatory Authority for Energy HV High Voltage S/S Substation S/S HV/MV HV to MV Substation S/S MV/LV MV to LV Substation SSL Street and Square Lighting FPRT Funded Programs for Research and Technology LV User User whose installations are connected to the LV Network MV User User whose installations are connected to the MV Network LV Low Voltage SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition system 2 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Article Ε.I - 3 Definitions Term Reference * Definition No. Network Operation Law 2773/1999, The applicable in each case Network Operation Authorizations under Articles 22 and 23a of Law 1 Authorization Article 22 2773/1999 Exclusive Network Law 2773/1999, The exclusive Network Ownership Authorization provided for under Article 21 of Law 2773/1999 Ownership Article 21 2 Authorization Network Connection Article 13-6 An application submitted to the Network Owner by those Users who wish their installations to be Application (Connection connected to the Network, or the amendment of an existing connection 3 Application) Flicker EN 50160 Network Voltage disruption category 4 Standard Renewable Energy Law 2773/1999, cf. Law 2773/1999, Article.2 5 Sources Article 2 Force Majeure Article 4-5 The conditions following the occurance of extraordinary events of great magnitude, the tackling of which cannot be anticipated and planned for in a technically and financially rational manner by the Network Operator. Included are particularly the interventions by public authorities (police, fire department), strikes, damages caused by third parties which cannot be avoided, such as plane crashes, 6 terrorist acts, uprisings and the like. Not included are events occurring in the Network’s equipment or its surroundings, which are due to their normal or rationally anticipated operation of which equipment and normal weather conditions, such as, for example, fires in substations, damages caused by third parties to inadequately guarded installations, etc. Direct Line Law 2773/1999, cf. Law 2773/1999, Article.2 7 Article 2 Simple Load Meter Article 17-1 Network Meter, measuring the energy absorbed by Customer, cumulatively and without the capacity of 8 distinguishing between energy absorption per hour or other time zone * Non exhaustive reference to passages in the Network Code, or the Law, or the Standards principally containing information regarding the definition of the term 3 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Electricity Distribution Article 1-4 Decree by the Minister of Development issued upon the proposals made by the Interconnected Regulation Decree Network Operator and the Operator of Non-Interconnected Islands and RAE’s assent, and which 9 establishes the key strategic parameters for the implementation of the Network Code in the following Distribution Regulatory Period. Competent Network Article 1-1 The Operator of the Interconnected Network, the Operator of Non-Interconnected Islands and the 11 Entities Network Owner, jointly referred to. Harmonic Voltage EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 12 Standard Voltage unbalance EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 13 Standard Short Interruption Article 5-3 Unplanned Interruption the duration of which does not exceed 3 minutes 14 Voltage Dip EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 16 Standard Measurement Data Article 18-3 The final measurement data which follow from the procedure by which the readings collected from Load Meters and Hourly LV Generation Meters are subjected by the Network Operator to automatic 17 check, as well as to correction or estimation, if necessary. Dominant Supplier Article 19-1 The holder of a supply permit who supplies over seventy percent (70%) of all electricity absorbed 19 annually by Customers Second Reference Day Article 30-3 The reference date for the implementation of the transitory provisions of the Network Code 20 Load Meter Article 19-3 Supplier’s declaration on the representation of a Load Meter Representation 21 Declaration Supply Interruption Article 5-3 The state at which the voltage at the Network/User Connection Point is less than 1% of the Nominal 22 Voltage LV Connection Charge Article AP.IV-5 Subdivision of the country for the implementation needs of the Participation System for LV Customers 23 District User’s Quality of Article 5-3, Characteristics of voltage, Supply Interruptions and the transactions between a Network User and the 24 Service Dimensions Article 7-1 Network Operator which are perceived and evaluated by the User Interconnected Network Article 1-1 The part of the Network which is electrically connected to the System 25 4 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Voltage disturbances Article 5-3 The types of deviation of Network voltage from a specific ideal sinusoidal form 26 Non-Interconnected Law 2773/1999, cf. Law 2773/1999, Article.23a 27 Islands Operator Article 23a Network Operator Law 2773/1999, The Network Operator for the Interconnected Network and the Non-Interconnected Islands Operator Article 22 and for the Non-Interconnected Islands Network under Law 2773/1999 Article 22 28 Article 23a System Operator Law 2773/1999, The operator defined under Law 2773/1999, Article14 29 Article 14 Network Law 2773/1999, cf. Law 2773/1999, Article.2 Article 2, 30 Article 1-1 Implementation Manual Article 1-3 Manuals for the implementation of the Network Code, which establish in particular details and calculation methodologies required for the implementation of the present Code. They are prepared by 31 the Network Operator and approved by RAE. Quality of Service Article 4-3 Network Code Implementation Manual regarding Quality of Service issues 32 Manual Power Quality Manual Article 4-3 Network Code Implementation Manual regarding Power Quality issues 33 Network Access Manual Article 13-4 Network Code Implementation Manual regarding Network User access 34 Network Connection Article 26-2 Network Code Implementation Manual which establishes the necessary details with respect to the 35 Charges Manual Network Connection Charges Network Use Charges Article 28-1 Network Code Implementation Manual which establishes the necessary details in respect of the charges 36 Manual applicable for using the Network Alternative Supplier Article 19-1 Every Supplier except the Dominant Supplier 37 Interharmonic Voltage EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 38 Standard Eligible Customer Law 2773/1999, The under Law 2773/1999, Article 2 Eligible Customer, whose installations are connected to the 41 Article 2 Network 5 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Reference Return Article 27-1 Established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree for each year in the Distribution Interest Rate Regulatory Period and reflecting the acceptable nominal return interest rate on the Network employed 42 capital, before taxes Annual Reference Article 27-1 Established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree for each year in the Distribution Consideration for Regulatory Period and reflecting the acceptable annual operation and maintenance expenses for the 43 Operation and Network, inclusive of indirect expenses and expenses for the maintenance of assets involved in Maintenance connecting Users which are recognized as reasonable. Network Owner Annual Article 27-3 The consideration to which the Network Owner is entitled to for each year 44 Consideration Annual Reference Article 27-1 Established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree for each year in the Distribution 45 Losses Regulatory Period and reflecting the acceptable amount of Network energy losses Anticipated Quality Article 4-4 A range of values of the corresponding quality index, between a lower Total Performance Limit and an 46 Zone upper Anticipated Quality Limit. Commencement Day of Article 19-1 Such day corresponds to either the time at which a Dominant Supplier ceases to exist, or the time at Detailed Measurement which the Network Operator may demonstratively comply with all procedures established in PART VI 47 Calculations in a uniform and single manner for all Suppliers, the Dominant Supplier included Participation Power Article AP.IV-1 The power which is unambiguously established for each type of LV Connection, under Article AP.IV-1 48 and taken into account for the calculation of the Network Connection Charges Customer Article 1-1 The entity whose installations are connected to the Network in order to absorb electrical energy 49 State of Emergency Article 10-1 A state where for a significant number of Users there has been or is foreseen to come about a Supply Interruption or significant reduction of the reliability of their supply or significant deviation of the 50 Network characteristics from their nominal values of the Network/User Connection Points Customer Category Article 12-3 Categorization of Customers based on the intended use of electrical energy in their installations 51 Customer Categories for Article 28-4 The Categories under which Customers fall in terms of the unit Network Use Charges, so that each the Network Use Charge category includes Customers who, due to the main characteristics of their installations and the way in 52 (NUC Customer which the energy they absorb from the Network is measured, it is reasonably anticipated that they shall Categories) accordingly generate a similar average cost for the Network. Network Control Center Article 8-2 Units which monitor and control the operation of certain parts of the Network, within a specific 53 geographical region and which plan for its short-term operation 6 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Customer’s Building Article AP.IV-5 The Customer’s building or any legal building, in the case where the Customer possesses a complex of buildings in a single space, or the Supply pylon, provided the meter is installed in the same point 54 thereof and such point in located on the boundary of the plot on the side of the access road. Network Owner Law 2773/1999, The Owner of the Network under Law 2773/1999, Article21. 55 Article 21 Operation Code for Non- Law 2773/1999, The Code instituted under Article 23a of Law 2773/1999 56 Interconnected Islands Article 23a Distribution Network Law 2773/1999, The present Code, instituted under Article 23 of Law 2773/1999 Operation Code Article 23 57 (Network Code) System Operation Code Law 2773/1999, The Code instituted under Article 19 of Law 2773/1999 58 Article19 System Operation and Gov. Gazette issue Β΄ 655/2005, as in force and applicable Power Exchange 59 (SO&PE) Code for Electricity Power Exchange Code Law 2773/1999, The Code instituted under Article 20 of Law 2773/1999 60 for Electricity Article20 Long Interruption Article 5-3 Unplanned Supply Interruption, the duration of which exceeds 3 minutes of the hour 61 Customer Average Article 5-4 The average time required to resume supplying a User, following the interruption of such supply. Interruption Duration 63 Index System Average Article 5-4 The total temporal period per annum in which, as an average, an User faces Supply Interruptions Interruption Duration 64 Index System Average Article 5-4 The average annual number of Supply Interruptions per User Interruption Frequency 65 Index Medium Voltage Article 3-1 Voltage values greater than 1000V and less than 35kV. 66 7 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Average Load at Peak Article 28-7 The Average Load at Peak for a Customer is calculated as the weighted average demand of such Customer during peak Network load hours in the two previous years. Respectively, an Average Load at 67 Peak for a group of Customers is calculated by taking account of the total load of the Customers in such group Transitory Overvoltage EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 68 Standard Change in the Supply EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 69 Voltage Standard Network Meter Article 17-1 Every meter measuring the injection of energy into the Network or the absorption of energy from it 70 Network Boundary Article 17-1 Network Meter which measures the amount of energy trafficked from the System to the Interconnected 71 Meter Network Generation Meters Article 17-1 Hourly MV Generation Meters and Hourly LV Generation Meters 72 Load Meters Article 17-1 Hourly MV Load Meters, Hourly LV Load Meters, Simple Load Meters and Zone Load Meters 73 Zone Load Meter Article 17-1 Network Meter measuring the energy absorbed by Customers, cumulatively per zone in the 24 hour 74 day, without, though, the ability to distinguish energy absorption per hour Energy Not Supplied Article 5-4 The energy demanded by Customers but not supplied due to Supply Interruptions 75 Non-Interconnected Law 2773/1999, cf. Law 2773/1999, Article.2 76 Island Article2 Non-Eligible Customer Law 2773/1999, The under Law 2773/1999, Article 2 Non-Eligible Customer, whose installations are connected to the 77 Article2 Network Unplanned Supply Article 5-3 A Supply Interruption regarding which the affected Users have not been timely and adequately Interruption informed, and which is caused, as a rule, by Network faults due to external events, failures of the 78 Network equipment or interventions by third parties. Non-Hourly Load Article 17-1 Simple Load Meters and Zone Load Meters 79 Meters Reference Unit Cost for Article 27-1 Established by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree as constant throughout the entire Losses Distribution Regulatory Period and reflecting the estimated long-term average full cost of the energy 80 injected into the Network 8 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Implementation Written instructions published by the Network Operator in order to ensure the immediate and effective Instructions implementation of the provisions of the Network Code in the decisions and regulations issued under the Article 1-3 81 authority granted by Law 2773/1999. They are addressed to the Network Owner or internally to the Network Operator’s personnel, and are notified to RAE User Instructions for Article 13-4 Instructions to Users issued and publicized by the Network Operator, which establish the fixed general Access regulations and the procedures for Network connections and the operation of Customers and Producers 82 installations, as well as technical information on the limits of operation of such installations Nominal Network Article 3-1 The active value of the reference voltage fundamental frequency waveform characterizing the Network 83 Voltage equipment Individual Guarantee Article 4-4 Voltage Quality or Supply Continuity or Service Quality Limits which regard the quality individually Limits enjoyed by each User and the violation of which for a specific User may entail the immediate payment 84 of consideration by the Network Operator to the affected User Network/User Article 1-1 The connection point for User installations and the installations owner by the Network Owner 85 Connection Point Total Performance Article 4-4 Voltage Quality or Supply Continuity or Service Quality Limits which regard the quality enjoyed by Limits Users as a whole or by a specific group thereof, and the violation of which for a specific User group 86 may entail financial consequences for the Network Operator, but does not necessitate the immediate payment of consideration by the Network Operator to some User MV Supply Limit Article AP.IV-24 For type A MV Supplies is it identified with the Network/User Connection Point. For type B MV Supplies it is the section point of the line following the supply cable for the installations of MV Customer and the outline of the Customer’s plot. If the supply cable for the installations of the 87 Customer begins at an over-head Network line pylon, which resides inside of the Customer’s plot, the MV Supply Limits is the connection point between the cable and the overhead line. Anticipated Quality Article 4-4 Where a Total Performance Limit is set in the form of an Anticipated Quality Zone, such Limit shall be Limit the high quality limit for the Zone, and if exceeded it shows that in terms of the relevant quality 88 dimension the actual Service Quality to Users is above the minimum acceptable one. Producer Article 1-1 Every holder of a generation authorization or of an exemption from the obligation to receive a 89 generation authorization, whose installations for electricity generation are connected to the Network 9 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Supply Article AP.IV-1 For LV Customers the line and other Network equipment between the Network/User Connection Point for LV, Article and the corresponding LV Network Point or MV Network Point exclusively used for the supply of the AP.IV-24 for MV respective Customer. For MV Customers: (a) for type A Supplies, the metering device and coupling 90 and protection means installed for the exclusive serving of such MV Customer’s installations, (b) for type B Supplies, all Network installations from the MV Supply Limit to the Network/User Connection Point, inclusive of coupling, protection and metering installations. Metering Period Article 18-1 Defined for an Non-Hourly Load Meter as the time period between two consecutive measurement 91 collections Matrix on Article 19-2 A table where at least one Alternative Supplier is recorded as the representative for each Customer’s Correspondence between Load Meter, where the Customer procures energy, fully or partially, from Alternative Suppliers 92 Load Meters and Alternative Suppliers Power Quality Article 4-1 Voltage Quality and Supply Continuity 94 Quality of Service Article 4-1 Power Quality and Service Quality for Users 95 Voltage Quality Article 4-1 The extent to which voltage deviations from its rated value and the fully sinusoidal waveform of the 96 rated frequency are absent Service Quality Article 4-1, Regards the level of serving for Users with respect of their transactions with the Network Operator. Article 7-1 Included are both the transactions prior to the conclusion of the contract for the connection of User’s installations to the Network and its use, as well as the transactions during the period where such a 97 contract is in force. The notion of Service Quality does not include technical issues relating to Power Quality Charge Refund Article AP.I-1 A percentage of the average daily Network Use Charge for a User, which is paid to the User as a Percentage penalty clause in case the Power Quality Individual Guarantee Limits are not adhered to. The Charge 98 Refund Percentage is determined for each violation case Network Development Article 22-3 A rolling, three year program for Network development, prepared by the Network Owner based on the Program Network Development Regulatory Plan and which includes in detail all the necessary actions for the 99 fulfillment of the objectives established in the Network Development Regulatory Plan, based on the time-schedule of the Plan for each Network development measure. 10 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Planned Supply Article 5-3 A Supply Interruption where the Users affected have been timely and adequately informed in advance Interruption and which are, as a rule, caused by scheduled interruptions in the operation of the Network due to 100 works Supplier Article 1-1 Each holder of a supply authorization or an exemption from the obligation for a supply authorization, 101 who supplies electrical energy to Customers whose installations are connected to the Network Network Connection Article 13-6 The offer prepared and notified to a Network User by the Network Operator in response to the User’s 102 Offer application for a new connection, or the amendment of an existing connection Temporary Industrial EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 103 Frequency Overvoltage Standard ΕΝ 50160 Standard European Standard ΕΝ 50160 “Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public distribution 104 systems” (CENELEC 1999), as has been integrated as national regulation (ELOT: 2000) ELOT-384 Standard ELOT-384 standard on “Electrical Installations Requirements” 105 First Distribution Article 30-3 The first Distribution Regulatory Period for the implementation of the provisions of the Network Code 106 Regulatory Period First Reference Day Article 30-3 The reference day for the implementation of the transitory provisions of the Network Code 107 Distribution Regulatory Article 1-4 The time period lasting from three up to five years, to which each Electricity Distribution Regulation 108 Period Decree refers Network Development Article 22-2 Refers to a Distribution Regulatory Period and establishes all key axis for the development of the Regulatory Plan Network during such period. It is approved by the Electricity Distribution Regulation Decree referring 109 to this Distribution Regulatory Period MV Network Point Appendix. IV-5 The operating installations of the MV Network to which Supplies for Customer’s installations may be 110 connected LV Network Point Appendix IV-5 The operating installations of the LV Network to which Supplies for Customer’s installations may be 111 connected Common Connection Article 1-1 It is defined as the point of the Network nearest to the Connection Point for Network/User; which is Point for User located upstream from the Connection Point for Network/User and which is run by electricity towards 112 Installations (Common installations by other Users as well. Connection Point) 11 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Interruptible Load Article 6-3 A Contract between the Customer and the Network Operator by virtue of which the Customer accedes Contract to the interruption of the supply to their installations up to a maximum of 200 hours annually, during high loading periods for the Network or the System, without advance notice and as an initiative of the 113 Network Operator and for which they are not liable for the fixed leg of the Network Connection Charges Power Quality Contract Article 6-2 A contract drawn up between the Network User and the Network Operator by which individual Power Quality standards for such User are established, as well as considerations for the cases where such 114 standards are not observed. Network Connection Article 12-1 A contract entered into by and between a User and the Network Operator, which is a prerequisite for Contract the User’s installations to be connected to the Network and their electrical operation in synchronization 115 with the Network. Customer Participation Article 24-2 The total charges imposed on the Customer in order for the realization of the connection of its (in the Network installations to the Network. 116 connection cost) Maximum Agreed Article 13-1 The maximum power, which the Customer may absorb from the Network or the Producer may inject Power (for User into it, and the Network Operator must ensure its movement through the Network; 117 installations) Supply Continuity Article 4-1 The extent to which breakers are present either in respect of electricity supply to the installations of Customers that connect to the Network or in respect of electricity injection into the Network from the 118 installations of Producers that connect to it, due to events not related to the operation of the installations of the aforementioned Customers or Producers. Total Budgeted Annual Article 27-3 The total income the Network Owner is entitled to for the immediately following year. 119 Income User Density Factor Article 5-5 § 7 A factor used to calculate the Supply Continuity indexes defined as average values per Network User, such as, for example, SAIFI and SAIDI, where there are no accurate measurements per User, and for the purpose of estimating for each interruption the number of Users affected and the extent to which 121 they were affected, as well as the categories of affected Users. User Density Factors have a single arithmetic value for Network lines and geographical regions with similar characteristics. System Law 2773/1999, cf. Law 2773/1999, Article.2 122 Article.2 12 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Term Reference * Definition No. Participation System Article 24-2 Methodology for the determination of charges made to Customers for the connection of their 123 installations to the Network Network Frequency Article 3-2 The frequency of the voltage fundamental frequency waveform which is single for the entire part of the Network connected to the System, and single for each electrically isolated part of the Non- 124 Interconnected Island Network Signals Transmission EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 125 Voltage Standard Rapid Voltage Changes EN 50160 Category of Network Voltage Disturbances 126 Standard Third Reference Day Article 30-3 The reference date for the implementation of the transitory provisions of the Network Code 127 High Voltage Article 3-1 Voltage value greater than 35 kV. 128 Low Voltage Article 3-1 Voltage value under 1000V. 129 Network User (User) Article 1-1 Each existing or potential Producer or Customer whose installations are connected to the Network 130 Network Connection Article 13-1, Charge paid by Users for the construction of a new connection for their installations to the Network, or Charge (Connection PART VIII for the amendment of an existing connection 131 Charge) Network Use Charge Article 28-1 Charges made to Network Users for using the Network 132 Funded Programs for Article 23-1 A mechanism for the provision of incentives to the Network Operator, in order for it to invest in the Research and growth of knowledge relating to technological issues in the design, operation and maintenance of the 133 Technology Network Hourly MV Generation Article 17-1 Network Meter measuring the energy injected per hour to the Network by a generation unit connected 134 Meter to the MV Network or the HV Network Hourly LV Generation Article 17-1 Network Meter measuring the energy injected per hour to the Network by a generation unit connected 135 Meter to the LV Network Hourly MV Load Meter Article 17-1 Network Meter measuring the energy absorbed per hour by MV Customer 136 Hourly LV Load Meter Article 17-1 Network Meter measuring the energy absorbed per hour by LV Customer 137 DMS (Distribution Article 5-5 An electronic supervision and management system for distribution networks, which employs the Management System) SCADA system and integrates algorithms to assist in the monitoring and optimizing of the operation of 138 electricity distribution systems. 13 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code CHAPTER Ε.I - 3 NOTES AND EXAMPLES Article Ε.I - 4 Notes 1. Note to Article 3-2, paragraph 3: The following shall apply with regard to the Interconnected Network: Α) the acceptable Network Frequency fluctuation, under normal operating conditions, shall be between 49.85 and 50.15Hz, Β) the acceptable fluctuation during System disturbances, or in foreign electric systems interconnected to the System shall be between 49.75 and 50.20Hz, and C) the acceptable fluctuation during serious System disturbances or disturbances in the interconnected to the System foreign electricity transmission systems shall be between 49.50 and 50.50Hz. For the Non-Interconnected Island Network and with respect to the acceptable Network Frequency fluctuation limits, the Standard EN 50160 will be initially applied, according to which the frequency must be between 49 and 51 Hz for 95% of the time in a week and between 42.5 and 57.5 Hz for 100% of the time, with regard to the average fundamental frequency value measured in a 10 sec period. 2. Note to Article 5-2: Flicker reaction is subjective and may vary depending on its cause and duration. In certain cases a value of Plt =1 causes disturbances, whereas, in other cases, higher Plt levels do not cause disturbances. 3. Note to Article 6-2 paragraph 7: That is for all existing and new connections with special requirements with regard to Power Quality (e.g. hospitals, buildings – such as the Parliament – which have a special symbolic importance) such requirements must be recorded on a Power Quality Contract and the corresponding User to assume, by virtue of such contract, the respective cost, in compliance with the provisions of Article 6-2. 4. Note to Article AP.I-6 paragraph 1 and Article AP.I-7 paragraph 2: Noted at this point are the provisions under Article 5-5 paragraphs 1 and 6. 5. Note to Article AP.I-11 paragraph 5: Noted at this point are the provisions under Article 7-3 paragraph 5. 6. Note to Article 15-1 paragraph 2: LV Users installations must comply with the ELOT-384 Standard, provided they fall in its scope of application. 7. Note to Article 15-4 paragraph 3: 14 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Due to the possibility of interaction between neighboring installations, Users must assess the necessity of installing protection or of a suitable level of immunity against signal transmitted through the Network to their installations. 8. Note to Article AP.IV-5 paragraph (1): Network installations which are operating, independent of whether they are distribution installations for cities, villages, just SSL or installations developed in the context of agricultural electrification programs (AEP, under the joint Decree by the Ministers of Agriculture and Industry, Energy and Technology under number F482.1/142196/10-11- 1987 (Gov. Gaz. Β΄ 738/1987), or electrification programs for rural land, or for the electrification of some particular Customer with a temporary Supply, under the condition that such installations may remain in place and after the expiry of the temporary Supply. 9. Note to Article 30-3 paragraph 6: For the first publication of the Network Code in Government Gazette, the following unit prices and parameters shall be in force and applicable: PRICE LIST 1 Measurement No. Participation System Factor Price Unit Ι. Factors for the calculation of LV Customer’s participation Ι.1 Participation Σα from power factor (a) Ι.1.1 Three-phase LV Customers except domestic ones • LV Connection Charge District A 50,60 • LV Connection Charge District B 50,60 ation power €/kVA • LV Connection Charge District C particip 37,10 Ι.1.2 Domestic three-phase LV Customers independently of their LV Connection Charge District • For the first 10 kVA 0 • For the next 11 kVA 50,60 • For the next 9 kVA 81,00 €/kVA n power • For additional kVA participatio 121,50 Ι.2 Participation Σπ LV Connection Charge District A and B 270,00 € LV Connection Charge District C 236,20 Ι.3 Participation Σδ Ι.3.1 For 03, 05,1,2 and 3 Supplies independently of the LV Connection Charge District • Α1 €/m 25,30 • Υ € 8.775,00 • Minimum Σδ for 30m LV Connection Charge District • Α2 €/m 37,10 • Y € 11.812,00 Ι.3.3 Νο 7 Supply • Υ (€) € 11.812,00 15 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Ι.3.4 Factor (δ) for overhead Network independently of LV €/m 19,60 Connection Charge District Factor (δ) for underground Network independently of €/m 91,10 LV Connection Charge District Ι.3.5 SSL Network independently of LV Connection Charge District • Per pylon installed € 894,40 • Per MV pylon replaced due to the addition of SSL € 894,40 conductor • Per meter of wall-mounted cable € 16,90 Ι.4 Participation to the installations of LV Zone Load 34,00 Meter ΙΙ. Calculation factors for LV Customer’s Participation ΙΙ.1 Participation Σπ ∆π ΙΙ.2 Factor (χ) 1 ΙΙ.3 Calculation values for factor Σεπ of the participation • Value for the calculation of factor (δ) for MV Customers located in Areas of Development of €/m 28,70 Overhead Networks • Value for the calculation of factor (δ) for MV Customers located in Areas of Development of €/m 106,30 Underground Networks ΙΙ.4 Values for the calculation of factor Σ1 of the participation due to the “Reinforcement of installations” • For the first 3.000 kVA €/kVA 39,10 • For the next 1.000 kVA €/kVA 59,00 • For the next 1.000 kVA €/kVA 79,00 • For the next 1.000 kVA €/kVA 98,90 • For the next 1.000 kVA €/kVA 118,80 • For all additional kVA €/kVA 138,70 ΙΙ.5 Values for the calculation of factor Σ2 of the participation due to the Reinforcement of Installations • For the first 10.000 kVA-km €/kVA-km 1,55 • For the next 5.000 kVA-km €/kVA-km 2,30 • For the next 5.000 kVA-km €/kVA-km 3,04 • For the next 5.000 kVA-km €/kVA-km 3,78 • For the next 5.000 kVA-km €/kVA-km 4,52 • For all additional kVA-km €/kVA-km 5,28 ΙΙΙ. Payment of the participation of LV Customers and MV Customers ΙΙΙ.1 Minimum sum of downpayment – installment (bimonthly or monthly) and independently of LV € 170,00 Connection Charge District ΙΙΙ.2 Minimum downpayment independent of district • Municipalities € 2.700,00 • Communities € 1.350,00 16 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code ΙΙΙ.3 Minimum sum of downpayment – installment (bimonthly or monthly) for customer groups € 170,00 independently of district PRICE LIST 2 Numerical value LV LV Unit prices for the execution of works or following No. Connectio Connectio Customer’s request, for LV Customers n Charge n Charge District A District C or B (€) (€) 1 Removal of LV or MV Supply 0 0 2 Removal of riveting – re-riveting of cable for overhead LV 85,00 75,00 Supply 3 Re-riveting only of the cable for overhead LV Supply 58,00 50,00 4 Reinstallation of full LV Supply • Single-phase Supply or three-phase No1 135,00 118,00 • Three-phase Supply Νο 2, Νο 3 or Νο 4 270,00 236,00 5 Reinstallation of Load Meter (with or without box) • Single-phase Supply or three-phase No1 58,00 50,00 • Three-phase Supply Νο 2, Νο 3 or Νο 4 115,00 102,00 6 Reinstallation of Supply cable (with or without support materials) • Single-phase Supply or three-phase No1 102,00 88,00 • Three-phase Supply Νο 2, Νο 3 or Νο 4 203,00 176,00 7 Alterations: • to three-phase Νο 5, Νο 6 and Νο 7 Supplies • to the Supply cable or the configuration of apartment block meters • to MV Supplies The total corresponding expense Π is payable: Π= Κα + Κτ - Απ where Κα = Removal Cost Κτ = Installation Cost (inclusive of the value of materials) Απ = Collection value In all cases above where the increase of power is not anticipated, Customers shall not be encumbered with participation Σα (from power factor) or Σδ per case applicable PRICE LIST 3 No. Other factors of the Participation System Price (€) Ι. Additional charges to new LV Customers for special cases (independent of the LV Connection Charge District). Lump sum payable in cash without the possibility of accommodations Ι.1 For supply of electricity at a distance L>30m accomplishable with a simple Supply and with Supply cable longer than 30m. and up to 60m., Surcharge Σπ: • Single-phase Supply 102,00 • Three-phase Supply 170,00 Ι.2 Change of meter or metering device location (prior to the realization of 17 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code the electrification), upon the customer’s request Ι.2.1 Prior to the commencement of the construction of single-phase and three-phase routings without intensity T/R: For small changes in the location of the meter or device, up to 1m 0 maximum For changes in the location of a single meter requiring additional cable up to 10m. maximum there is a surcharge Σπ: • Single-phase Supply 58,00 • Three-phase Supply 102,00 Ι.2.2 In all other cases, Σπ is supplemented by the amount Π – Π΄ + Μ where: Π : the actual expenditure for locating the Supply in the spot suggested by the interested party Π΄ : the ideal expenditure of the Supply in the position determined by the Network Operator Μ : possible unnecessary expenditures (should the construction of the Supply or device has already commenced) to which the Network Owner will be subjected to due to the requested change. Difference Π – Π΄ may never be less than 118,00 ΙΙ. Coverage of participation installments using bank guarantees Should the part of the participation of LV and MV Customers that is ΙΙ.1 settled by installments be greater than the sum opposite, it may be 1.860,00 covered using a Bank Guarantee of indefinite duration. Article Ε.I - 5 Examples 1. Example in Article 13-6 paragraph 5: Characteristic examples are apartment blocks and neighboring relatively small RES installations. 2. Example in Article AP.I-5 paragraph 2: For example, for a planned Supply Interruption of estimated duration 8 hours, from 05:00 until 13:00, the briefing of Users in order for the Interruption to be considered as Planned must be done at least 48× 2 +× 726 = 66 hours prior to 88 its commencement for LV Users and 72×+2 120 ×=6 108 hours for MV Users 88 and MV Producers. 3. Example in Article AP.I-9 paragraph 3: For example, for the construction of a new LV Customer connection, for which the construction of Network extensions is required and where this is not the extraordinary case of major extension to the Network, the penalty clause for each business day by which the limit of the 30 business days is exceeded, shall amount to 1/60th of the charge made to the Customer for the connection. 4. Example in Article AP.IV-3: Let there by a domestic Customer with the following characteristics of installed power: 18 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Illumination: 10 filament bulbs 100W each 1.000 W Electric iron 1.500 W Heater 4.000 W Electric cooker with a single hotplate 1.500 W Electric oven 3.000 W Fridge 170 W Television 170 W Total 11.340 W The maximum required supply power is calculated to be 0,6 × 11.340 W ≈ 6.800 W = 6,8 kVA, taking into account load diversity and the fact that for domestic appliances cosφ ≈ 1. Hence for this particular application a single-phase No 03 Supply will suffice. 5. Example in Article AP.IV-7: For Customer supplied by a single-phase Supply without extension or reinforcement of the existing Network, the formula for the calculation of the Connection Charges shall include on parameter Σπ. Namely Σ = Σπ. 19 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code CHAPTER Ε.I - 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I...... 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ...... 1 CHAPTER 1...... 1 ENTITIES, GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS...... 1 Fundamental definitions and Scope...... 1 Article 1-2...... 2 Code Supervision and Consulting Committee...... 2 Article 1-3...... 2 Code Implementation Manuals and Network Operator Instructions...... 2 Article 1-4...... 3 Decree regulating the distribution of electricity ...... 3 Article 1-5...... 4 Appeals and arbitration by RAE...... 4 Article 1-6...... 4 Ensuring the effective operation, maintenance and development of the Network 4 Article 1-7...... 5 Supervision of the Network Code Implementation ...... 5 CHAPTER 2...... 5 GENERAL PRINCIPLES ...... 5 Article 2-1...... 5 Non discrimination of Users...... 5 Article 2-2...... 5 Transparency – Confidentiality ...... 5 Article 2-3...... 6 Extraordinary and unforeseen circumstances...... 6 Article 2-4...... 7 Technical Rules and Limitations ...... 7 PART II ...... 9 NETWORK OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS...... 9 CHAPTER 3...... 9 NETWORK OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS...... 9 Article 3-1...... 9 Network Nominal Voltage...... 9 Article 3-2...... 9 Network Frequency ...... 9 Article 3-3...... 10 Network Short-Circuit Power...... 10 Article 3-4...... 10 Network Protection...... 10 Article 3-5...... 11 Network Earthing ...... 11 Article 3-6...... 11 Voltage regulation and control ...... 11 Article 3-7...... 12 Signal Transmission ...... 12 21 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code PART III ...... 13 QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR NETWORK USERS ...... 13 CHAPTER 4...... 13 QUALITY OF SERVICE – GENERAL PROVISIONS ...... 13 Article 4-1...... 13 Quality of Service – Fundamental Definitions...... 13 Article 4-2...... 13 Quality of Service – General obligations of the competent Network entities ..... 13 Article 4-3...... 14 Network Code Implementation Manuals for the regulation of quality of service14 Article 4-4...... 14 Quality of Service – General provisions regarding the limits of the quality provided...... 14 Article 4-5...... 15 Force majeure ...... 15 Article 4-6...... 16 Payment of penalty clauses and considerations to Users for Quality of Service. 16 CHAPTER 5...... 17 POWER QUALITY – DEFINITIONS AND CALCULATION RULES...... 17 Article 5-1...... 17 Power Quality Dimensions...... 17 Article 5-2...... 17 Network Voltage Interruptions - Definitions...... 17 Article 5-2...... 20 Supply interruptions - Definitions ...... 20 Article 5-3...... 21 General Statistical Indexes for Supply Continuity - Definitions...... 21 Article 5-4...... 22 Statistical Power Quality Indexes – Calculation Rules ...... 22 CHAPTER 6...... 24 USER POWER QUALITY LIMITS...... 24 Article 6-1...... 24 Rules for the implementation of Power Quality limits...... 24 Article 6-2...... 26 Power Quality Contracts...... 26 Article 6-3...... 28 Interruptible Load Contracts...... 28 Article 6-4...... 28 Individual Power Quality measurements...... 28 Article 6-5...... 29 Monitoring Power Quality at Network level ...... 29 Article 6-6...... 30 Consequences of the failure to observe individual Power Quality limits of Users with individual metering...... 30 Article 6-7...... 31 Consequences of the failure to observe individual Power Quality guarantee limits for Users without individual metering...... 31 Article 6-8...... 32 Consequences of the violation of the total Power Quality performance limits ... 32 Article 6-9...... 33 22 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Report and publication of Power Quality statistics ...... 33 CHAPTER 7...... 34 SERVICE QUALITY...... 34 Article 7-1...... 34 Service Quality - Definitions...... 34 Article 7-2...... 35 Statistical indexes for Service Quality – General Provisions...... 35 Article 7-3...... 36 Implementation rules for service quality limits...... 36 Article 7-4...... 37 Monitoring service quality...... 37 Article 7-5...... 38 Consequences of the failure to observe individual guarantee limits with respect to service quality...... 38 Article 7-6...... 38 Consequences of the violation of the total service quality performance limits... 38 Article 7-7...... 39 Reporting and publication of statistics regarding service quality...... 39 PART IV...... 41 OPERATION MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE NETWORK 41 CHAPTER 8...... 41 MONITORING OF THE OPERATION OF THE NETWORK ...... 41 Article 8-1...... 41 Monitoring of the Operation of the Network – General Provisions ...... 41 Article 8-2...... 41 Network Control Centers...... 41 Article 8-3...... 42 Network Operations...... 42 Article 8-4...... 43 Network Operation Testing ...... 43 Article 8-5...... 44 Safety rules ...... 44 CHAPTER 9...... 45 PROVISION OF INFORMATION REGARDING THE OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS...... 45 Article 9-1...... 45 Information provided by Users – General Provisions ...... 45 Article 9-2...... 45 Information provided by Customers...... 45 Article 9-3...... 46 Information provided by Producers...... 46 CHAPTER 10...... 47 STATES OF EMERGENCY...... 47 Article 10-1...... 47 State of emergency cases and general obligations...... 47 Article 10-2...... 48 Alarms ...... 48 Article 10-3...... 48 Load Shedding...... 48 CHAPTER 11...... 50 23 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code NETWORK MAINTENANCE...... 50 Article 11-1...... 50 Network maintenance – General provisions...... 50 Article 11-2...... 50 Network maintenance planning...... 50 PART V ...... 53 CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK AND OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS...... 53 CHAPTER 12...... 53 PROVISION OF NETWORK ACCESS...... 53 Article 12-1...... 53 Obligation to provide access to the Network...... 53 Article 12-2...... 53 Cases of connection denial and Network connection interruption ...... 53 Article 12-3...... 55 Customer installation categories...... 55 CHAPTER 13...... 55 PROCEDURES FOR THE PROVISION OF ACCESS TO THE NETWORK . 55 Article 13-1...... 55 Network Connection Contracts ...... 55 Article 13-2...... 56 Network connection contract terms...... 56 Article 13-3...... 56 User Succession...... 56 Article 13-4...... 57 Code Manual and implementation instructions for Network access ...... 57 Article 13-5...... 59 Procedure for submitting and processing Network connection applications...... 59 Article 13-6...... 60 Network connection application...... 60 Article 13-7...... 61 Network connection offer...... 61 Article 13-8...... 63 Temporary connections to the Network ...... 63 Article 13-9...... 63 Works for connecting producer installations...... 63 Article 13-10...... 64 Information provided by Customers for Network connection...... 64 Article 13-11...... 66 Information provided by Producers for Network connection...... 66 Article 13-12...... 68 Provision of information to the Users...... 68 CHAPTER 14...... 68 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ABOUT NETWORK CONNECTIONS...... 68 Article 14-1...... 68 Installation ownership boundary ...... 68 Article 14-2...... 68 Selecting a way to connect User installations – General Provisions...... 68 Article 14-3...... 70 General requirements for equipment at User installations ...... 70 24 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Article 14-4...... 71 Requirements for telecommunications equipment ...... 71 CHAPTER 15...... 72 OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS...... 72 Article 15-1...... 72 General Provisions for the operation of User installations connected to the Network ...... 72 Article 15-2...... 73 Coupling and protection equipment ...... 73 Article 15-3...... 74 Reactive power absorption ...... 74 Article 15-4...... 74 Disturbances caused to the Network voltage...... 74 Article 15-5...... 75 Information provided by the Network Operator...... 75 CHAPTER 16...... 76 CHECKING AND MONITORING THE OPERATION OF USER INSTALLATIONS...... 76 Article 16-1...... 76 Checking User installations for Network connection...... 76 Article 16-2...... 76 Checks of the operation of User installations by the Network Operator...... 76 Article 16-3...... 78 Checks run by Users on the operation of their installations ...... 78 PART VI...... 79 METERS, MEASURMENT MANAGEMENT AND...... 79 PERIODIC MEASUREMENT SETTLEMENT...... 79 CHAPTER 17...... 79 NETWORK METERS ...... 79 Article 17-1...... 79 Network Meter Categories...... 79 Article 17-2...... 80 Network meters Specifications...... 80 Article 17-3...... 81 Installation and maintenance of Network meters ...... 81 Article 17-4...... 81 Checks and tests of the operation of Network meters ...... 81 Article 17-5...... 82 Meter and metering device protection ...... 82 Article 17-6...... 83 Replacement of metering equipment...... 83 CHAPTER 18...... 83 MEASUREMENT COLLECTION AND MEASUREMENT DATA ...... 83 Article 18-1...... 83 Collection of measurements from non-hourly load meters and metering periods ...... 83 Article 18-2...... 83 Collection of measurements from hourly load and generation meters...... 83 Article 18-3...... 84 Measurement data...... 84 25 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Article 18-4...... 84 Measurement control ...... 84 Article 18-5...... 85 Measurement control results...... 85 Article 18-6...... 85 Correction and estimation of measurements...... 85 Article 18-7...... 86 Measurements and measurement data records and provision of information ..... 86 CHAPTER 19...... 87 METER REPRESENTATION...... 87 Article 19-1...... 87 Dominant and alternative suppliers ...... 87 Article 19-2...... 88 Meter representation – General Provisions ...... 88 Article 19-3...... 88 Load meter representation declaration...... 88 Article 19-4...... 89 Content and entry into force of network load representation declarations...... 89 CHAPTER 20...... 90 NETWORK LOAD REPRESENTATION CALCULATIONS...... 90 Article 20-1...... 90 Network load representation calculations – General Provisions ...... 90 Article 20-2...... 90 Procedure for the ex ante estimation of representation percentages of Network load ...... 90 Article 20-3...... 91 Procedure for the ex post calculation of the energy attributed to Suppliers ...... 91 CHAPTER 21...... 92 PERIODIC MEASUREMENT SETTLEMENT...... 92 Article 21-1...... 92 Calculation of charges and credits to Suppliers for each month ...... 92 Article 21-2...... 93 Periodic measurement settlement ...... 93 PART VII ...... 97 NETWORK DEVELOPMENT...... 97 CHAPTER 22...... 97 NETWORK DEVELOPMENT...... 97 Article 22-1...... 97 Scope of application ...... 97 Article 22-2...... 97 Regulatory framework for Network development...... 97 Article 22-3...... 99 Network development plan...... 99 Article 22-4...... 100 Load and generation forecasts ...... 100 Article 22-5...... 100 Network design instructions ...... 100 Article 22-6...... 101 Programs for works on the aesthetic improvement of the Network ...... 101 CHAPTER 23...... 102 26 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code RESEARCH AND TECHNOLOGY PROGRAMS ...... 102 Article 23-1...... 102 Research and technology programs – General provisions...... 102 Article 23-2...... 103 Research and technology programs - Financing...... 103 Article 23-3...... 103 Research and technology programs – Approval and reports...... 103 PART VIII ...... 105 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES...... 105 CHAPTER 24...... 105 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES TO CUSTOMERS ...... 105 Article 24-1...... 105 Charges for the connection of Customer installations to the Network – General Provisions ...... 105 Article 24-2...... 105 Participation System...... 105 Article 24-3...... 106 Charges for the connection of Customer installations to the Network – Special Cases...... 106 CHAPTER 25...... 107 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES TO PRODUCERS...... 107 Article 25-1...... 107 Charges for the connection of Producer’s installations to the Network ...... 107 CHAPTER 26...... 108 NETWORK CONNECTION CHARGES – GENERAL PROVISIONS ...... 108 Article 26-1...... 108 Approval of Network connection charges’ parameters ...... 108 Article 26-2...... 108 Network connection charges manual...... 108 Article 26-3...... 108 Accounts keeping ...... 108 Article 26-4...... 109 Network connection charges in cases of joint connection applications ...... 109 Article 26-5...... 109 Calculation of the consideration in cases of new User connections...... 109 PART IX...... 113 ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION AND NETWORK USE CHARGES ...... 113 CHAPTER 27...... 113 ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION...... 113 Article 27-1...... 113 Regulated parameters of the annual Network consideration...... 113 Article 27-2...... 114 Modification of the annual Network consideration regulated parameters...... 114 Article 27-3...... 115 Annual consideration and total annual income for the Network Owner ...... 115 CHAPTER 28...... 117 NETWORK USE CHARGES ...... 117 Article 28-1...... 117 Network use charges – General Provisions ...... 117 27 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Article 28-2...... 118 Methodology for the determination of the charges to MV and HV Producers for using the Network...... 118 Article 28-3...... 118 Annual income from the use of the Network by Customers ...... 118 Article 28-4...... 119 Customer charges categories and the allocation of the annual Network income to them ...... 119 Article 28-5...... 120 Constant-Fixed and variable Network use charge...... 120 Article 28-6...... 122 Calculation of Customer charges to for using the Network ...... 122 Article 28-7...... 122 Average load at peak for a group of Customers ...... 122 Article 28-8...... 124 Procedure for the determination of Network use charges ...... 124 Article 28-9...... 125 Payment of charges made to Customers for Network Use...... 125 Article 28-10...... 126 Network loss factors ...... 126 PART X ...... 129 OTHER CHARGES AND ACCOUNTS ...... 129 CHAPTER 29...... 129 OTHER CHARGES AND ACCOUNTS ...... 129 Article 29-1...... 129 Operating expenses charges to the Network Operator ...... 129 Article 29-2...... 130 Charges in favor of third parties...... 130 PART XI...... 131 FINAL PROVISIONS...... 131 CHAPTER 30...... 131 FINAL PROVISIONS...... 131 Article 30-1...... 131 Contracts between the Network Operator and the Network Owner...... 131 Article 30-2...... 131 Exemptions ...... 131 Article 30-3...... 132 Time signposts for the implementation of the Network Code...... 132 Article 30-4...... 133 Network connection contracts for existing Users’ installations ...... 133 Article 30-5...... 134 Other provisions ...... 134 APPENDIX I ...... 135 QUALITY OF SERVICE DURING THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD...... 135 CHAPTER AP.I - 1 ...... 135 POWER QUALITY ...... 135 Article AP.I-1 ...... 135 Power quality measurements ...... 135 Article AP.I-2 ...... 135 28 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Power quality contracts ...... 135 Article AP.I-3 ...... 136 Penatly clauses and considerations in favor of Users for power quality – General provisions...... 136 Article AP.I-4 ...... 136 Voltage quality – Limits and consequences of their non observance...... 136 Article AP.I-5 ...... 137 Planned supply interruptions – Time and manner for informing Users ...... 137 Article AP.I-6 ...... 138 Continuity of supply – Individual guarantee limits and consequences of the non observance thereof...... 138 Article AP.I-7 ...... 139 Continuity of supply – Total performance limits and consequences of the non observance thereof...... 139 CHAPTER AP.I - 2 ...... 140 SERVICE QUALITY...... 140 Article AP.I-8 ...... 140 Service quality measurements ...... 140 Article AP.I-9 ...... 141 Service Quality – Individual guarantee limits and consequences of the non observance thereof...... 141 Article AP.I-10 ...... 142 Service quality – Total performance limits and consequences of the non observance thereof...... 142 Article AP.I-11 ...... 142 Deadlines for Network connection...... 142 APPENDIX II...... 145 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR NETWORK DEVELOPMENT DURING THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD ...... 145 CHAPTER AP.II - 1...... 145 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK FOR NETWORK DEVELOPMENT DURING THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD ...... 145 Article AP.II-1...... 145 Netwrok development during the first distribution regulatory periods ...... 145 APPENDIX III ...... 147 ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION FOR THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD...... 147 CHAPTER AP.III - 1...... 147 ANNUAL NETWORK CONSIDERATION FOR THE FIRST DISTRIBUTION REGULATORY PERIOD...... 147 Article AP.III-1...... 147 Regulated parameters of the annual Network consideration...... 147 APPENDIX IV ...... 149 CONNECTION OF CUSTOMER INSTALLATIONS AND PARTICIPATION SYSTEM ...... 149 CHAPTER AP.IV - 1 ...... 149 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONNECTION OF CUSTOMER INSTALLATIONS...... 149 Article AP.IV-1 ...... 149 LV Supply Types...... 149 29 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Article AP.IV-2 ...... 151 Number of LV Supplies...... 151 Article AP.IV-3 ...... 151 Limitations on the selection of LV Supply...... 151 Article AP.IV-4 ...... 154 Indicative establishment of Supply type...... 154 CHAPTER AP.IV - 2 ...... 155 PARTICIPATION SYSTEM FOR LV CUSTOMERS ...... 155 Article AP.IV-5 ...... 155 Distances of LV Customer buildings from Network points...... 155 Article AP.IV-6 ...... 158 LV Customer connection charge Districts...... 158 Article AP.IV-7 ...... 160 General formula for the calculation of LV Customer Participation ...... 160 Article AP.IV-8 ...... 161 Calculation of individual participation in the cost of Supply - Σπ ...... 161 Article AP.IV-9 ...... 161 Calculation of individual participation in the cost of existing installations - Σα 161 Article AP.IV-10 ...... 161 Calculation of individual participation of a single LV Customer in the Network extension and reinforcement cost - Σδ ...... 161 Article AP.IV-11 ...... 163 Calculation of the individual participation of a group of LV Customers in the cost for the extension and reinforcement of the Network - Σδ...... 163 Article AP.IV-12 ...... 164 Calculation of the Participation of LV Customers for cases of connection power increase up to a No 6 Supply...... 164 Article AP.IV-13 ...... 165 Calculation of the Participation of LV Customers for cases ...... 165 of connection power increase up to a No 7 Supply ...... 165 Article AP.IV-14 ...... 166 Calculation of LV Customer Participation in cases of connection power reduction ...... 166 Article AP.IV-15 ...... 166 Calculation of LV Customer’s Participation in cases of connections consolidation ...... 166 Article AP.IV-16 ...... 166 Calculation of additional charges to LV Customer in special cases of connection works ...... 166 Article AP.IV-17 ...... 168 Calculation of LV Customer’s Participation for temporary connections to the Network ...... 168 Article AP.IV-18 ...... 168 Calculation of LV Customer’s Participation for connections exceeding the power limit...... 168 Article AP.IV-19 ...... 169 Calculation of additional charges made to LV Customers for connections exhibiting extraordinary specifications ...... 169 Article AP.IV-20 ...... 169 30 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Calculation of additional charges made to LV Customers for connections in inaccessible regions ...... 169 Article AP.IV-21 ...... 170 Additional charges made to a group of LV Customers in special connection cases ...... 170 Article AP.IV-22 ...... 170 Calculation of the Participation of Municipalities and Communities for Street and Square Lighting (SSL)...... 170 Article AP.IV-23 ...... 171 Participation calculation for the connection of mixed installations of buildings and SSL...... 171 CHAPTER AP.IV - 3 ...... 172 CONNECTION AND PARTICIPATION SYSTEM FOR...... 172 MV CUSTOMERS...... 172 Article AP.IV-24 ...... 172 MV Supplies – definitions and calculation parameters ...... 172 Article AP.IV-25 ...... 173 Calculation of MV Customer’s Participation in usual cases of permanent connection...... 173 Article AP.IV-26 ...... 174 Calculation of MV Customer’s Participation in cases of Maximum Agreed Power increase ...... 174 Article AP.IV-27 ...... 174 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers for connections with special conditions for the supply of electric power ...... 174 Article AP.IV-28 ...... 175 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers for temporary connections 175 CHAPTER AP.IV - 4 ...... 175 PARTICIPATION SYSTEM FOR THE CONNECTION OF PUMPING STATIONS TO THE MV NETWORK ...... 175 Article AP.IV-29 ...... 175 Scope of application ...... 175 Article AP.IV-30 ...... 176 Calculation of the Participation by MV Customers for the connection of drainage pumping stations...... 176 Article AP.IV-31 ...... 177 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers for the connection of pumping stations belonging to other categories ...... 177 Article AP.IV-32 ...... 177 Calculation of the Participation of MV Customers to the increase of the agreed power of pumping stations ...... 177 Article AP.IV-33 ...... 178 Calculation of MV Customer’s Participation for the connection of pumping stations exhibiting special conditions for their supply with electric power...... 178 CHAPTER AP.IV - 5 ...... 178 OTHER CHARGES BESIDES THE PARTICIPATION SYSTEM ...... 178 Article AP.IV-34 ...... 178 Charges for the processing of Network connection applications ...... 178 APPENDIX V...... 179 MEASUREMENT MANAGEMENT...... 179 31 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code CHAPTER AP.V - 1...... 179 EX ANTE CALCULATIONS...... 179 Article AP.V-1...... 179 En ante estimation of the representation percentages for Network load...... 179 CHAPTER AP.V - 2...... 181 EX POST CALCULATIONS ...... 181 Article AP.V-2...... 181 Ex post calculation of the per Supplier attributed energy for Customers with hourly LV or MV load meters ...... 181 Article AP.V-3...... 182 Ex post calculation of the per Supplier attributed energy for Customers with zone load meters...... 182 Article AP.V-4...... 183 Ex post calculation of the per Supplier attributed energy for Customers with simple load meters ...... 183 Article AP.V-5...... 185 Ex post calculation of the total energy attributed per Supplier for the Customers it represents...... 185 CHAPTER AP.V - 3...... 186 INDIVIDUAL DETAILED CALCULATIONS ...... 186 Article AP.V-6...... 186 Hourly difference of the ex ante and ex post consumption attributed per Supplier ...... 186 Article AP.V-7...... 186 Injection of energy into the Network – Past period energy calculations...... 186 Article AP.V-8...... 187 Non-hourly load meters – Past period energy consumption calculations...... 187 Article AP.V-9...... 189 Zone load meters – Calculating consumption percentages per zone...... 189 Article AP.V-10...... 189 Hourly MV or LV load meters – Past period energy consumption calculations189 Article AP.V-11...... 190 Hourly MV and/or LV load meters – Past period total energy consumption calculations ...... 190 Article AP.V-12...... 191 Non-hourly load meters – Calculations of the total past period energy consumption...... 191 Article AP.V-13...... 192 Total energy injection into the Network – Future period energy estimation..... 192 Article AP.V-14...... 192 Non-hourly load meters – Future period energy consumption estimation ...... 192 Article AP.V-15...... 194 LV or MV Hourly load meters – Future period energy consumption estimation ...... 194 Article AP.V-16...... 195 Synopsis of symbols used...... 195 APPENDIX VI ...... 199 TERMS OF NETWORK CONNECTION CONTRACTS ...... 199 CHAPTER AP.VI - 1 ...... 199 TERMS OF CUSTOMER CONNECTION CONTRACTS ...... 199 32 Manual Ι: Auxiliary texts for using the Network Operation Code Article AP.VI-1 ...... 199 General terms of Customer Connection Contracts ...... 199 CHAPTER AP.VI - 2 ...... 199 TYPE OF CONTRACT FOR THE CONNECTION OF GENERATION UNITS TO THE NETWORK ...... 199 Article AP.VI-2 ...... 199 Type of contracts for the connection of generation units to the LV Network... 199 Article AP.VI-3 ...... 199 Type of contracts for the connection of generation units to the MV Network.. 199 Article AP.VI-4 ...... 199 Type of contracts for the connection of generation units to the HV Network .. 199 MANUAL I ...... 1 AUXILIARY TEXTS FOR USING THE NETWORK OPERATION CODE .... 1 CHAPTER Ε.I - 1...... 1 GENERAL...... 1 Article Ε.I - 1...... 1 General...... 1 CHAPTER Ε.I - 2...... 1 Definitions of Terms and Abbreviations ...... 1 Article Ε.I - 2...... 1 Synopsis of abbreviations used...... 1 Article Ε.I - 3...... 3 Definitions ...... 3 CHAPTER Ε.I - 3...... 14 NOTES AND EXAMPLES...... 14 Article Ε.I - 4...... 14 Notes...... 14 Article Ε.I - 5...... 18 Examples ...... 18 CHAPTER Ε.I - 4...... 21 TABLE OF CONTENTS ...... 21 33